WO1998053556A2 - Direct sequence spread spectrum method, computer-based product, apparatus and system tolerant to frequency reference offset - Google Patents

Direct sequence spread spectrum method, computer-based product, apparatus and system tolerant to frequency reference offset Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1998053556A2
WO1998053556A2 PCT/US1998/010164 US9810164W WO9853556A2 WO 1998053556 A2 WO1998053556 A2 WO 1998053556A2 US 9810164 W US9810164 W US 9810164W WO 9853556 A2 WO9853556 A2 WO 9853556A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
signal
receiver
frequency
data
code
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1998/010164
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO1998053556A3 (en
Inventor
Britton H. Sanderford, Jr.
Gary A. Naden
Robert E. Rouquette
Dale E. Reiser
Charles A. Hwang
Marc L. Reed
Original Assignee
Sanconix, Inc. (La Corp)
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sanconix, Inc. (La Corp) filed Critical Sanconix, Inc. (La Corp)
Priority to EP98937930A priority Critical patent/EP0986860A4/en
Priority to AU86561/98A priority patent/AU744940B2/en
Publication of WO1998053556A2 publication Critical patent/WO1998053556A2/en
Publication of WO1998053556A3 publication Critical patent/WO1998053556A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B1/00Details of transmission systems, not covered by a single one of groups H04B3/00 - H04B13/00; Details of transmission systems not characterised by the medium used for transmission
    • H04B1/69Spread spectrum techniques
    • H04B1/707Spread spectrum techniques using direct sequence modulation

Definitions

  • the present invention is directed to communications-related systems, networks apparatuses and methods as well as computer-based digital signal processing mechanisms and methods used therein. More particularly, the invention is directed to the field of direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) communication that employ a DSSS transmitter and a DSSS receiver, or transceiver configured to convey a data signal in a transmitted DSSS signal by spreading the data signal on transmission and correlating on reception so as to "despread" the DSSS signal and recover the data signal.
  • DSSS direct sequence spread spectrum
  • RF radio-frequency
  • FM frequency modulation
  • AM amplitude modulation
  • interference signals e.g. jammers
  • disturbances in the communications path between the transmitter and receiver can interfere with reception. For example, fading due to multipath or atmospheric obstruction can attenuate the signal significantly. Also, shadowing becomes significant if the signal must pass through solid matter such as buildings, walls, floors or trees and vegetation.
  • Spread spectrum radio communication addresses the shortcomings of narrowband communications by mixing (i.e. applying) a wideband spreading signal to the data signal so as the "spread" the data signal.
  • the transmitter also modulates a RF carrier with data, as with the narrowband systems, but then adds one more modulation step by modulating the signal with a wideband, noise-like signal (e.g. a PN code). Consequently, the data signal is spread in frequency over a much larger bandwidth, typically several million Hertz (MHZ) .
  • Common spread spectrum techniques include frequency hopping and DSSS. Frequency hopping systems move (i.e., "hop") the data modulated carrier to frequencies following a pseudo-random pattern defined by the PN code.
  • DSSS mix a PN code with the data modulated carrier to create a DSSS signal which simultaneously occupies roughly the bandwidth of the pseudo noise signal.
  • Narrowband interference signals transmitted at same frequency as a portion ofthe spread signal "jam" the spread signal by an amount proportional to the ratio of jammer bandwidth to pseudo-noise bandwidth.
  • the interference signal will at least be attenuated by a "processing gain" ofthe spread spectrum signal, where processing gain is defined as a ratio of data signal bandwidth to spread signal bandwidth.
  • processing gain is defined as a ratio of data signal bandwidth to spread signal bandwidth.
  • DSSS systems have been used in the past to achieve low probability of intercept (LPI) for secure communication and thus are valuable in military applications or other scenarios requiring covert communications.
  • LPI low probability of intercept
  • DSSS is also used in places where multipath or fading is prevalent, such as satellite communication.
  • GPS Global Positioning System
  • conventional DSSS systems are expensive (considering the transmitter and receiver) because relatively high performance frequency references and digital signal processing equipment is used. Accordingly, DSSS techniques are most commonly used in military and high-end consumer market, where component cost is less of a factor than with low-end consumer product.
  • Conventional direct sequence spread spectrum transceivers are directed towards high-end systems (e.g.
  • Past DSSS systems have avoided using lower cost components because conventional wisdom dictates that selectively high fidelity frequency references are required at the transmitter and receiver, as well as powerful digital signal processing equipment so to compensate for even minor frequency deviations between transmitter and receiver systems. Contrary to conventional DSSS design practice, the present inventors have identified that these conventional DSSS devices are not applicable for low-end, inexpensive, commercial use applicable for high-volume sale, nor are they well suited for small packages, that may be used in a variety of non-standard field uses, such as, for example, home security and fire systems, data telemetry, access control, remote meter reading as well as other applications.
  • PN codes that require substantial digital signal processing to be despread in a receiver. While there are many advantages to using a long code (such as with code division multiple access, CDMA, telephony which permits many users to transmit on a common channel at the same time) the present inventors have recognized that a shorter code, such as a 63 bit PN code, may enable the use of components applicable for lower cost applications.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a conventional receive system that of either a conventional receiver (either narrowband or DSSS receiver)
  • the receive system includes a RF front end section 120, a first local oscillator (109, 112, 111, and 110, as will be discussed) section, an analog -to-digital conversion section 121, baseband mixing section (115, as will be discussed) and a baseband processing section 122, as shown
  • the details of the conventional receiver are desc ⁇ bed below, following a general overview description
  • the RF section 120 performs the function of converting electromagnetic wave energy (including the transmitted signal) and outputtmg an analog signal
  • the analog signal is maintained within a predetermined signal level range, as controlled by an automatic gain control circuit (AGC) as shown
  • AGC automatic gain control circuit
  • the output from the RF front end is provided to a first local oscillator section having a mixer 109, which translates the analog signal to a lower frequency by using a precise, and generally expensive, voltage controlled oscillator 110
  • the downconverted signal is then passed to the intermediate frequency processing section 121, that adds appropriate gam p ⁇ or to a digitahzation process while filtering out-of-band images necessary for the digitization process, as will be discussed herein
  • the output ofthe intermediate frequency section is passed to the analog to digital converter ADC shown as mixer 115 (as will be discussed), which converts the analog signal into a digital representation for subsequent processing in the baseband section 122
  • the analog AGC's function is to keep the signal level applied to the ADC 115 within an operational range ofthe ADC
  • the signal is passed to the baseband section 122, where digital signal processing operations are performed on the signal and the signal is detected and demodulated, resultmg in outputtmg the data signal originally transmitted from the transmitter (either in a spread or non-spread form)
  • the burden of performing the "inverse spreading" (despreading) operation on the signal usually falls on the digital signal processor 116 section 1 ofthe baseband processing section 122
  • the despreading code is mixed in the RF front end 120, first LO or intermediate frequency (IF) sections ofthe receiver, but such analog architectures require significantly precise components or specialized compensation mechanisms
  • conventional direct sequence spread spectrum receivers require high performance digital signal processors or complicated analog sections m order to perform the despreading and correlation functions, as well as signal acquisition and demodulation processes
  • a precise frequency reference at the DSSS transmitter is assumed to be present so little to no frequency ambiguity is presented into the signal received by the receiver
  • Conventional digital receiver design wisdom is such that the loss in performance associated with using low cost, low power desirable and possible components does not justify their use in light ofthe fact that slightly more expensive components provide greater precision and processing power and therefore avoid performance problems associated with low-cost, inaccurate components
  • Figure 1 depicts RF downconversion and signal conditioning components used to prepare a received analog signal for sampling
  • Antenna 101 receives the RF signal sent from a transmitter and passes the signal through RF diversity switch 102 and on to a bandpass filter (BPF) 103
  • BPF bandpass filter
  • a controllable select mechanism 104 may select antenna 105 to receive the RF signal
  • the antennas may be physically separated and/or of different polarizations so as to enable spatial or polarization diversity reception
  • the BPF 103 rejects undesired frequencies prior to signal amplification by an amplifier 106
  • the RF signal is then filtered by BPF 107 and amplified by another amplifier 108 prior to downconversion in a mixer 109
  • VCO voltage controlled oscillator
  • the downconverted signal is positioned at an intermediate frequency (IF) determined by the downconversion tone applied to the mixer 109, and additional gain is provided by an amplifier 113
  • a BPF 114 serves as an anti-aliasing filter pnor to a second downconversion operation that, as recognized by the present mventors, may be performed with the sampling ADC 115
  • the signal is positioned near baseband (l e near 0 Hz)
  • the digital signal processor (DSP) 116 performs va ⁇ ous operations including despreading the signal if it is a spread spectrum signal and then sends the baseband signal to a demodulation block 117 so as to extract the data originally added to the transmitted signal by the transmitter Frequency control of the DSP 116 is provided by an oscillator 118 and using the DSP 116 passes the frequency control to all relevant sections 110, 115 and 117 to compensate for mismatch m received signal frequency, and/or chip phase, though frequency mismatch is usually minimized by using accurate frequency references at the transmitter and receiver While Figure 1 depicts a smgle RF downconversion step, other downconversion steps may be added to properly center the received signal at the desired ADC IF frequency
  • Figures 2 and 3 show respective frequency plots of a signal of interest, before and after, respectively, being passed through a harmonic sampling operation, a technique that may be used to reduce signal processing complexity in digital receivers
  • harmonic sampling is performed using a "real", not complex or quadrature, harmonic sampling approach, as will be discussed
  • Harmonic Sampling Harmonic sampling also known as undersampling, bandpass sampling or Super-Nyquist sampling
  • IF intermediate frequency
  • Figures 2 and 3 illustrate an example strig ⁇ o where the sampling rate for the ADC is between 0 Hz (labeled as 204) and the maximum analog input frequency 214 (These specific frequencies are used to simplify the later discussion with respect to these present invention and should not be construed as a specific implementation of a prior art device)
  • the signal of interest 210 exists at an IF frequency 212 of 10 8 MHZ
  • the sample rate ofthe converter 206 is an integer multiple such as 4 times the chipping rate (l e , a rate at which chip ofthe PN sequence are produced)
  • the sample rate of the converter 206 is an integer multiple such as 4 times the chipping rate (l e , a rate at which chip ofthe PN sequence are produced)
  • Fs sample rate
  • any signal that exists between 0 Hertz (Hz) 204 and Fs/2 205 (l e , the Nyquist bandwidth) is digitized and represented untranslated following digitization
  • the sampling device operates as a discrete component whose sample event is set by a clock edge
  • the signal is tracked until the sample edge occurs, and is then immediately held
  • this track and hold system operates on an infinitesimally small time window (a clock edge)
  • This time domain operation is an impulse function and can be expressed as a series of fundamental frequencies (tones) in the frequency domain separated by the frequency ofthe sampling clock
  • tones fundamental frequencies
  • Each of these tones is equal in magnitude and extend to infinity
  • these tones act as harmonics in an ideal mixer and the input signal is mixed against these harmonics, creating repetitive images in the digitized spectrum
  • the resulting images 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, and 323 are separated every Fs/2 m frequency
  • Ideal IF center frequencies (F c ) will therefore exist at multiples ofthe sample rate ⁇ V ⁇ ofthe sample rate
  • the following equation may be used to select ideal IF frequencies for a given Fs
  • IF Fs(N ⁇ l A), where N is an integer harmonic sampling multiplicand
  • N 2 and "+ l /4 H ⁇ s selected Whenever the "-'//'option is selected, the downconverted image is "high side injected” and will be spectrally flipped (high frequencies at 0, and 0 at Fs/2)
  • the actual IF frequency can exist at anv harmonic of the sample rate
  • practical limitations should be observed because the input frequency range 202 is limited primarily due to the limitations in the track and hold operator to adequately follow the signal without introducing distortion Any slew limiting or overshoot will introduce noise mto the system, which is true for limiting single-bit digitizers as well as multi-bit digitizers
  • aperture jitter cont ⁇ butes to phase noise in the digitized signal, where aperture jitter is defined as a time difference present in a decision threshold for realizable sampling components Assuming the sample clock has zero phase noise (which seldom is true), the sampling component will observe the clock
  • the sample rate 406 is shown to be 4 times the chipping rate, and the anti-alias lowpass filter 408 attenuates undesired frequencies
  • the downsampled, digitized spectrum exists at 0 Hz, 519 (i e , baseband), and present in the Nyquist bandwidth 516 are two copies ofthe same spectrum flipped about 0 Hz All ofthe signal information is available now in the previous bandwidth of interest, but, 3 dB off orthogonal transmitter loss is present resultmg in degraded performance Repetitive images ofthe signal exist throughout the frequency spectrum and are depicted as items 518, and 520 through 522 Techniques for Processing Digital Signals Having High Sample Rates
  • a challenge with modern digital receivers is identifying how to convert radio frequency energy into digitized samples which occur at extremely high sampling rates (in most applications well over 1 MHZ) and providing enough digital signal processing power to process in real time the samples provided from the analog to digital converter
  • a technique that has been used to lower the sample rate of digital signals is to low pass filter the digital signal samples, followed by decimating in time the respective samples
  • Decimation in time is a process in which a set of adjacent samples are combined into a lesser number of samples so as to produce a lower sample rate This lesser number of samples is then more easily handled by digital signal processors Accordingly, decimation reduces signal processing demands in digital receivers by lowering sample rate
  • decimation and sample rate reduction techniques see Frerking, M, "Digital Signal Processing and Communication Systems", Van Nostrand Rernhold, 1994, the contents of which is incorporated herem by reference, in particular pp 65-66, 193-199 Nonetheless, while decimation is an approach for reducing sample rate, conventional wisdom suggests that performance in digital receivers requires high
  • Receive systems typically contain cascaded filters to band-limit the received signal prior to detection
  • the final filter prior to detection sets the predetection bandwidth ofthe system
  • this predetection bandwidth is as narrow as possible so as to maximize receiver sensitivity
  • Typical direct sequence systems set this final predetection bandwidth to be equal to the desired signal of interest, thus maximizing the receive sensitivity
  • Distnbutions 630 and 625 are for a keyed, or "ON" signal of -110 dBm as detected in a 115 kHz and 20 kHz predetection bandwidth respectively
  • SNR signal to noise ratio
  • the present inventors have identified that a performance penalty is to be paid in the form of decreased SNR if low-cost, inaccurate frequency references are used for transmitting and receivmg a signal
  • Figure 6 further demonstrates that the wider predetection bandwidth of 115 KHz incurs a sensitivity loss relative to a narrower predetection bandwidth As the predetection bandwidth is allowed to grow wider, the noise distnbution function approaches the signal distnbution function actually overlapping it and inducing e ⁇ ors on detection which corresponds to a reduction m sensitivity
  • Direct sequence transmission systems require that the receiver and the transmitter have aligned pseudorandom codes in order to properly despread the received signal.
  • the receiver has the burden of aligning the receiver pseudorandom code with a transmitter pseudorandom code in order to properly despread the signal.
  • Direct sequence receivers must correlate the received signal in order to recover data.
  • the correlation process can be described as either a serial or parallel process.
  • Prior art has typically performed low cost correlation in a serial process wherein multiple bit intervals (or multiple code repetition intervals) of received data are used against successive relative chip phases ofthe receiver PN code to correlate data.
  • High cost, high end systems typically achieve correlation much faster using a technique called parallel correlation.
  • System which use parallel correlation use one or a few code periods of data to correlate against many phases ofthe PN code in parallel to produce a correlation function over one or a few code periods of data.
  • the present inventors have recognized that with either the slow serial search or the parallel search, the RF front end must remain active in order to continuously receive the signal, and thus, cannot be turned off during the computation ofthe correlation function, so as to conserve battery power.
  • a fine sync process For direct sequence receivers, a fine sync process , sometimes called a fine search process, further reduces correlation error following the coarse synchronization process (course sync, or coarse search process) .
  • the coarse sync process terminates when a correlation result surpasses a predetermined threshold (i.e., a trip condition) indicating that the received signal is aligned to within +/- Vi of a code chip interval of the PN code.
  • a predetermined threshold i.e., a trip condition
  • the signal and the PN code should be perfectly aligned to provide optimum performance. So as to more closely align the signal with the PN sequence, a fine sync process is initiated after the coarse sync process so as to further reduce the relative chip interval between the received signal and the receiver PN code.
  • Figure 7 illustrates results observed in an ideal receiver when attempting to align the PN code to the received signal through successive 1/4 chip fractional chips steps as part of a fine sync process.
  • the circles in Figure 7 represent respective powers (i.e., co ⁇ elation results) received from the fine sync correlation process for relative 1/4 chip fractional offsets of a signal, absent noise, and the PN code.
  • a perfect correlation yields the maximum process gain at zero chip phase error, as shown by the center circle.
  • the maximum process gain is 18 dB.
  • chip enors that are greater than 1 chip width result in the loss of all system process gain, such that the received signal cannot be detected or demodulated.
  • Fine search processes are used to initially acquire the spread spectrum signal and at predetermined time intervals through the data message in order to maintain correlation alignment.
  • the term "reposition” or “repo” is a term used in spread spectrum systems, such as in transceiver systems designed by Axonn, to reposition the PN code and received signal while receiving a data message portion ofthe received signal. Drift Offset Between Transmit and Receive Frequency References
  • Typical direct sequence spread spectrum systems require very stable local frequency references for transmit and receive operations in order to maintain near coherent (i.e., in phase) operation. Ideally. transmitters and receivers will operate using a common frequency reference in order to maintain co ⁇ elation throughout the data message.
  • An example of such a direct sequence system is the Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) system, which requires very accurate frequency references, typically Cesium based or other atomic standards.
  • GPS Global Positioning Satellite
  • frequency offset between the transmitter and the receiver may be measured to determine the magnitude and direction of the frequency uncertainty
  • Frequency and /or phase detectors may be used to determine the magnitude and direction ofthe frequency uncertainty
  • RF downconversion portion of the receiver and not in the baseband processing section of the receiver, preserves the signal processing efficiency, thereby enabling the use of lower cost, lower performance digital signal processing components as compared with state-of-the-art signal processing components
  • a first LO is usually generated by a phase and/or frequency locked synthesizer
  • a phase and/or frequency locked synthesizer A block diagram of an integrated circuit-based LO synthesizer, such as a National Semiconductor
  • LMX1501A is given in Figure 8
  • Conventional phase lock frequency synthesizers are descnbed in Manassewitsch, V , "Frequency Synthesizers Theory and Design", John Wiley & Sons, 1987, pp 43-48, the contents of which is incorporated herein by reference
  • the synthesizer of Figure 8 includes a stable reference frequency source 800 (such as a quartz crystal oscillator), a reference divider 805, a phase and/or frequency detector 810, a loop filter 820, a voltage controlled oscillator 830 and feedback dividers 840 and 850.
  • An output 860 ofthe synthesizer is a signal at the desired frequency.
  • the desired frequency is set by programming the moduli ofthe dividers 805, 840 and 850.
  • Digital signal processing systems typically employ decimation as a way to lower a number of samples that need to be processed at various processing steps.
  • the effect of decimation is to combine a number of samples into a lesser number of samples, or merely select a subset of samples within a block of adjacent samples for subsequent processing.
  • Decimation is typically preceded by a filter whose characteristics often impact signal strength adversely, particularly because the decimation operation has a characteristic transfer function that preferentially passes signals occurring in a middle portion ofthe characteristic transfer function, but attenuating signal offset from the middle portion.
  • the present inventors have identified methods for eliminating or limiting the effects of decimation loss while minimally impacting processing requirements.
  • one object ofthe present invention is to overcome the above identified limitations and excesses in conventional direct sequence spread spectrum systems that prohibit the use of low-cost, low-end frequency references and digital signal processing components for performing the substantive direct sequence spread spectrum transceiver operations. It is another object ofthe present invention to provide a method and apparatus for receiving a direct sequence spread spectrum signal sent from a transmitter having a relatively inaccurate frequency reference.
  • Yet another object ofthe present invention to provide a method and apparatus for quickly acquiring a transmitted direct sequence spread spectrum signal.
  • An aspect of this object is to provide a fast serial search method that offers the simplicity attributes of a conventional slow serial search method and efficiency attributes of a parallel co ⁇ elator, while also conserving battery power by disabling an RF front- end of a transceiver after receiving a portion ofthe signal and while attempting to acqire the direct sequence spread spectrum signal.
  • Still a further obj ect ofthe present invention is to provide a receiver and/or transceiver architecture that includes a scalable sensitivity attribute that allows the sensitivity of the receiver/transceiver to be incrementally improved, at the expense of increasing computational loading.
  • AGC automatic gain control
  • DC direct current
  • Another object of the present invention to provide a method for receiving OOK signals using a receiver and/or transceiver that employs a hard limited analog to digital converter.
  • Still another object ofthe present invention is to provide a direct sequence spread spectrum system/ network that establishes a communications protocol for saving battery power at various remote receiver/transceiver elements in the network.
  • a method, apparatus, computer-based product and system that uses a receiver (or transceiver) to receive, digitize and process a direct sequence spread spectrum signal using efficient, low-cost digital signal processing components
  • a radio front end, and/or analog to digital conversion (ADC) apparatus are mcluded to receive the direct spectrum signal and convert the received signal into a digitized signal
  • Downconversion and decimation are performed on the digitized signal at an intermediate frequency prior to despreadmg and correlating the digitized signal with a pseudorandom noise (PN) code used at a transmitter to spread a data signal contained in the direct sequence spread spectrum signal
  • PN pseudorandom noise
  • despreading and co ⁇ elating the signal with PN signal extracts the data signal portion ofthe direct sequence spread spectrum signal for subsequent processing
  • a timmg and state control mechanism is included and provides time reference co ⁇ ection information to the signal processing components of the receiver and/or transceiver, without expressly
  • the receiver and transceiver employ power management mechanisms that, at least in selected embodiments, may be powered by small battenes that apply power only to those components necessary to maintain an operational state ofthe receiver and/or transceiver, based on a present operational state ofthe receiver and transceiver Using the power management features, the receiver and/or transceiver may communicate with other direct sequence spread spectrum transmitters and receivers as part of a communications network for multi-year penods of time
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a conventional Digital Signal Processor (DSP)-based receiver
  • Figure 2 is a graph illustrating a signal spectrum before conventional harmonic sampling of an Intermediate Frequency (IF) signal when the IF signal is converted to "near baseband",
  • IF Intermediate Frequency
  • Figure 3 is graph illustrating a resulting frequency spectrum of conventional harmonic sampling ofthe Intermediate Frequency (IF) signal of Figure 2 when the IF signal is converted to "near baseband”
  • Figure 4 is a graph illustrating the signal spectrum before conventional harmonic sampling of an
  • Figure 5 is graph illustrating a resulting frequency spectrum of conventional harmonic sampling ofthe IF signal of Figure 4 when the IF signal is brought directly to baseband
  • Figure 6 is a graph that shows signal level distributions for 115 kHz and 20 kHz of noise bandwidth
  • Figure 7 is a graph of a conventional co ⁇ elation function with associated power loss due to fractional chip e ⁇ or of spreading code alignment
  • Figure 8 is a block diagram of a conventional local oscillator frequency synthesizer
  • Figure 9 is a block diagram of a smgle channel transceiver ofthe first embodiment ofthe present invention.
  • Figure 10 is plan view of the single channel transceiver, and associated battery pack of the first embodiment
  • Figure 11 is a block diagram of a digital signal processing portion ofthe single channel receiver portion ofthe transceiver of Figure 9
  • Figure 12 is a circuit diagram of a digital downconversion and decimation stage ofthe transceiver ofthe first embodiment, as realized by a table lookup process,
  • Figure 13 is a circuit diagram that shows an alternative digital downconversion and decimation stage, realized by Boolean logic
  • Figure 14 is a graph that demonstrates (1) how decimation can reduce system performance, and (2) how this reduction in system performance can be avoided accordmg to the signal processing architecture ofthe first embodiment
  • Figures 15A-B are graphs that illustrate a signal acquisition process ofthe first embodiment
  • Figure 16 is a flow chart of a fast tune domam se ⁇ al search process ofthe first embodiment
  • Figure 17 is a graph that shows how the ideal correlation process of Figure 7 is adversely affected by noise
  • Figure 18 is a graph that compares respective results of different inventive fine search methods
  • Figure 19 is a flow chart of a Center of Mass fine search method
  • Figure 20 is a flow chart of a Center of Mass 9 method
  • Figure 21 is a flow chart of a Center of Mass 5+ method
  • Figure 22 is a flow chart of a Center of Mass 9' method
  • Figure 23 is a flow chart of a top-level search process performed by the transceiver of the first embodiment ofthe present invention
  • Figure 24 is a graph that shows how antenna diversity can improve the received signal to noise ratio
  • Figure 25 is a block diagram of a low-cost implementation of a frequency diversity transmitter portion ofthe transceiver of Figure 9;
  • Figures 26A-B are graphs showing the respective transmitted signals with frequency diversity disabled and enabled
  • Figures 27A-D are timing diagrams showing how a transceiver ofthe first embodiment implements antenna and frequency diversity
  • Figure 28 is a graph showing how averaging a signal in the first embodiment reduces an effects of noise
  • Figure 29 is a graph showing how averaging reduces a false alarm rate in the first embodiment
  • Figures 30A-F are respective approaches for incrementally increasing data rate using partial sums ofthe co ⁇ elation function
  • Figure 31 is block diagram of an alternative demodulator of the first embodiment showing a differential binary phase shift keying (DBPSK) demodulator, with scaleable bit rate;
  • Figure 32 is a block diagram of an alterative embodiment of a receiver portion shown in Figure
  • Figure 33 is a illustration of an approach for implementing a frequency detection portion ofthe receiver shown in Figure 32;
  • Figure 34 is a block diagram of an implementation ofthe digital-to-analog converter of Figure 32;
  • Figure 35 is a block diagram ofthe digital downconversion, decimation, and removal of Analog-to-
  • ADC Digital converter
  • Figure 36 is a block diagram of channel formation portion ofthe multichannel receiver shown in Figure 35, which reduces processing requirements for symmetric channel filters;
  • Figure 37 is a block diagram of a center channel forming portion, having reduced processing requirement attributes, for a center channel filter ofthe multichannel receiver of Figure 35,
  • Figure 38 is a graph demonstrating how a reduction in decimation loss may be achieved m the multi-channel receiver ofthe second embodiment ofthe present invention
  • Figure 39 is a graph showmg how non-uniformly spaced frequency channels in the multi-channel receiver ofthe second embodiment limits system performance loss
  • Figure 40 is a block diagram of a fast frequency domain code correlator portion of the second embodiment
  • Figure 41 is a block diagram of a conventional co ⁇ elator
  • Figure 42 is a block diagram of a conventional circular co ⁇ elator
  • Figure 43 is a block diagram of a conventional circular co ⁇ elator implemented with a convolution process
  • Figure 44 is a block diagram of a conventional circular convolution correlator, operating in the frequency domain
  • Figure 45 is a illustrative flow diagram of an implementation of an inventive frequency domain code correlator ofthe second embodiment
  • Figure 46 is a graph of signal conditions that can cause false t ⁇ ps (I e , false co ⁇ elation detection indications),
  • Figure 47 is a graph that shows how the power of a received noise signal will be distnaded among frequency channels in a multi-channel receiver
  • Figure 48 is a graph that shows how the power of a received Carrier Wave (CW) jammer signal will be distributed among frequency channels in a multi-channel receiver
  • Figure 49 is a graph that shows how the power of a received non-co ⁇ elated spread spectrum signal will be distnaded among frequency channels m a multi-channel receiver
  • Figure 50 is a graph that shows how the power of a received correlated spread spectrum signal will be distributed among frequency channels m a multi-channel receiver
  • Figure 51 is a flow chart of false trip avoidance method implementable in the multi-channel receiver
  • Figure 52 is a graph illustrating results of a co ⁇ elation function of a single code penod of data in the multi-channel receiver embodiment
  • Figure 53 is a graph similar to Figure 52, but mcludmg an averaging mechanism to reduce the effect of noise,
  • Figure 54 is another graph showing how averagmg reduces a false alarm rate m the multi-channel receiver
  • Figures 55-61 are flow charts of an Automatic Gain Control (AGC) method implementable in the multi-channel receiver ofthe second embodiment
  • Figure 62 is a graph showing signal power loss in a multi-channel receiver of the second embodiment due to past frequency drift ofthe transmitter;
  • Figure 63 is a graph showing received signal loss due to fast transmitter frequency drift;
  • Figure 64 is a flowchart of a process implementable in the multi-channel receiver to compensate for fast frequency drift in a signal transmitted by a transmitter;
  • Figure 65 is a graph showing a method for limiting noise contribution and corresponding to the process illustrated in Figure 64;
  • Figures 66A-C are graphs of signal loss due to frequency error and how this loss may be reduced by implementing a code phase repositioning and predictive code phase repositioning process throughout the message;
  • Figure 67 is a block diagram of a system with multiple transmitters, and multiple receivers that are connected to a processor via a common bus in a network, according to a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing a battery operated remote transceiver (BORT) application ofthe network of Figure 67;
  • BORT remote transceiver
  • Figures 69A-B are graphs shows network timing, co ⁇ esponding to Figures 67 and 68;
  • Figures 70A-C jointly present a flow diagram of a process flow implemented in a BORT device of Figure 68;
  • Figures 71 A-B jointly present a flow diagram of a process flow of a system transceiver of Figure 68;
  • Figures 72A-C jointly present a timing diagrams showing the steady state communication exchanges between a system transceiver and a BORT device;
  • Figures 73A-B jointly present a flow diagram showing the steady state operation of a BORT device;
  • Figure 74 is a timing diagram showing the initialization sequence of a BORT device in a BORT- based system, or network;
  • Figure 75 is a flow diagram showing a BORT initialization process
  • Figures 76A-C are timing diagrams showing the re-synchronization sequence of a BORT device in a BORT-based system, or network
  • Figure 77 is a flow diagram of a BORT re-synchronization process. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
  • a first embodiment of the present invention in the form of a credit card sized single channel transceiver (which includes a receiver and a transmitter, hence the term "transceiver"), that is included as part of a direct sequence spread spectrum network of transmitters, and receivers, which include transceivers.
  • the present transceiver is of a sufficiently small size that it may be operated under battery control, and require low end, low performance digital signal processors in order to perform the digital receiver, transceiver and other control functions.
  • Figure 9 is a block diagram ofthe single channel transceiver that includes two antennas 901 and 903 that feed a radio frequency (RF) front end 905.
  • a direct sequence spread spectrum signal formed at a transmitter preferably with a 63 bit pseudorandom noise (PN) code at a transmitter, is coupled into the antennas 901 and 903 and to the RF front end 905.
  • An output ofthe RF front end 905, provides, at an intermediate frequency (IF), the received signal to a single bit analog to digital converter (ADC) 907.
  • the ADC 907 converts the analog signal into a series of digital samples, as a particular sample rate as will be discussed, which are then be processed in baseband processing section 908.
  • the digital signal processing section 908 includes a low performance 16-bit digital signal processor, which operates at less than 20 MHZ clock.
  • One example of such a digital signal processor is Model 893x1, available in the United States from Zilog.
  • the digital samples from the ADC 907 are passed to a quadrature (i.e., inphase, I and quadrature, Q) downconversion mechanism 909 that further reduces the center frequency of the received signal to baseband, and decimates the digital signals.
  • a quadrature (i.e., inphase, I and quadrature, Q) downconversion mechanism 909 that further reduces the center frequency of the received signal to baseband, and decimates the digital signals.
  • the output ofthe quadrature downconversion mechanism 909 is provided to a direct sequence despreading/co ⁇ elator mechanism 911.
  • the despreading correlation mechanism 911 aligns the PN code, which is the same code as that used to spread a data signal at the transmitter but generated locally at the transceiver, to the incoming signal so as to correlate the received signal with the locally generated PN code. As a consequence (as will be explained), the despreading/correlating mechanism 911 further decimates the co ⁇ elated signal so as to further reduce the data rate and realize the 18 dB of processing gain (i.e., the gain associated with the PN spread spectrum signal) so that the signal may then later be passed to additional mechanisms for identifying when the signal is correlated, how well the signal was correlated, and ultimately for extracting the data from the co ⁇ elated signal.
  • the PN code which is the same code as that used to spread a data signal at the transmitter but generated locally at the transceiver
  • the output of the direct sequence despread/co ⁇ elator 911 passes to a switch 913, preferably implemented as a state-driven digital process, under control of a timing and state control mechanism 921, as shown.
  • the timing and state control mechanism 921 first throws the switch 913 so as to connect to a coarse search and trip mechanism 919 which performs initial signal acquisition, and acquisition detection respectively. Once the coarse search and trip mechanism 919 determines that the signal has been acquired, the timing and state control mechanism 921 throws the switch 913 into a middle position, as illustrated, so as to pass the output ofthe direct sequence despread/correlator 911 to a fine search mechanism 917.
  • the fine search mechanism adjusts the receive PN sequence to align within a small predetermined chip interval with respect to the transmitted PN sequence.
  • the fine search mechanism 917 positions the received PN sequence to less than 1/4 of a chip interval.
  • the timing and state control circuit 921 moves the switch 913 to the upper position, as illustrated, so as to pass the output of the direct sequence despread/co ⁇ elator 911 to the demodulation circuit 915 which extracts the data from the transmitted signal and passes the data to a data sink as shown.
  • the output of the demodulation mechanism 915 is also passed to the timing and state control mechanism 921 as a reposition signal to perform a reposition operation like that discussed in U.S. Patent 5,457,713, incorporated herein by reference.
  • the time reference co ⁇ ection mechanism 923 provides a time reference co ⁇ ection signal to the
  • ADC 907 quadrature downconversion mechanism 909, and direct sequence despread/correlator mechanism 911, in order to compensate for time drift e ⁇ ors induced by differences in transmitter and receiver time references (a time reference being a particular implementation of a frequency reference, and thus the two terms being used in a co ⁇ esponding sense herein), due to inherent inaccuracies in low-cost, low performance time references such as receiver time reference 927 as shown.
  • the time reference co ⁇ ection mechanism does not adjust the receiver time reference 927, as is done in convention receivers. Rather the time reference correction signal compensates for the inaccuracies induced by the time reference 927 in the various elements that employ an input from the receiver time reference 927.
  • the timing and state control mechanism 921 also includes an antenna select control signal which selects between antennas 901 and 903 when antenna diversity (such as for spatial or polarization diversity purposes) is employed.
  • the select signal includes a frequency control select signal, illustrated by a dashed line, applied to the RF front end 905, so as to control frequency diversity reception when frequency diversity is employed in the transceiver of Figure 9, as will be discussed.
  • the transceiver of Figure 9 includes a power control mechanism 925 that is controlled by the states determined in the timing and state control mechanism 921 , so as to provide a power management function for the transceiver. More particularly, when the transceiver is operated in selected states, where not all of the components, such as the RF front end 905, are required for successful operation, the power control mechanism 925, places the selected components in a reduced power consumption mode of operation. Although not shown for clarity purposes in Figure 9, the power control mechanism 925 is operatively coupled to a battery pack 1003 ( Figure 10) and to each of the active components in the transceiver illustrated in Figure 9.
  • the power control mechanism can remove power from the RF front- end 905, transmitter 929 and the entire, or subsections of, the digital signal processing section 908.
  • the transmitter 929 that is connected to a transmit antenna 931 , which may be a separate element, but preferably is the same as antenna 901 or 903 with an accompanying diplexer (not shown).
  • the transmitter 929 is provided with an external data source as shown, and derives time and frequency information from the receiver time reference 927 such that transmissions by the transmitter 929 will also be subject to the timing uncertainties caused by low cost receiver time reference 927.
  • the transmit feature associated with the transmitter 929, and the waveform produced therein are discussed in U.S. Patent
  • Figure 10 is a plan view ofthe credit card outline transceiver 1000 as was discussed in Figure 9.
  • the two dimensional footprint ofthe credit card outline transceiver 1000 includes a length in an X direction of about 3 A", and a width in a Y direction of about 2J" as shown. A thickness (not shown) is roughly A".
  • the battery pack 1003 connects to the credit card outline transceiver 1000 via a connector 1002 as shown.
  • the battery pack 1003 includes two external 3.6V lithium thionyl chloride (LiSOCL) cells (such as a LS- 14500 cell available from Faft Co ⁇ oration), which provide sufficient power to operate the transceiver, as discussed herein, for multiple years.
  • LiSOCL lithium thionyl chloride
  • the data source and data sink on the credit card transceiver shown in Figure 9, is provided via bidirectional interface 1004 as shown in Figure 10.
  • the connector includes a serial interface such as a
  • RS232C pseudo RS232C (0-5 V RS232C) or other interfaces such as RS-485.
  • other interfaces may also be suitable, such as universal serial bus USB, Fire Wire (IEEE 1394), and other data interfaces available in data communication equipment.
  • Selecting Sequence Length Based on Prime Factors The process gain that a radio exhibits is driven by the length of the spreading sequence.
  • the present invention uses the class of codes refe ⁇ ed to as maximal length (ML) sequences, due to their co ⁇ elation properties, and preferably a 63-bit ML sequence.
  • ML sequences are always of length 2 k -l, where k is any positive integer.
  • the process gain associated with a particular spreading sequence is 201og(n), where n is the length ofthe spreading sequence. Longer spreading sequences allow for more process gain; but require more computational loading to achieve correlation .
  • the present invention does not attempt to achieve the greatest possible processing gain (because too much processing power is required) but provides a reasonable amount of processing gain that can be realized with limited computational resources.
  • code phase refers to an alignment ofthe code chips used to spread the signal relative to the code chips ofthe PN code generated locally at the transceiver
  • code phase refers to an alignment ofthe code chips used to spread the signal relative to the code chips ofthe PN code generated locally at the transceiver
  • the present invention uses decimation m the time domam and Founer transforms in the frequency domain to achieve this result
  • the present invention utilizes partial decimation (1 e , multiple decimation stages distnubbed throughout the transceiver) and partial transformation techniques to reduce computational loading These techniques are enabled by selection of length ofthe spreading sequence that can be factored into pnme numbers In the preferred embodiment, a code length of 63 is selected and can be factored into prime numbers 3, 3, and 7 Table 3 depicts ML sequences of length 2 k -l for k up to 13, as well as the number of prune factors for each length and a processing gain associated with each code length
  • Another computational efficiency feature offered by a code sequence that is factorable by multiple pnme numbers is that increase flexibility is achieved in selectmg intermediate decimation factors This in turn enables flexibility m the number and position of decimation, filtering, and downconversion processes employed in the transceiver Single Channel Receiver Partial Decimation Method
  • the single channel embodiment of this invention employs a distributed (partial) decimation scheme configured to reduce the Nyquist bandwidth ofthe signal to equal the frequency uncertainty caused by inaccurate frequency references in the transmitter and receiver
  • the signal is sampled at 4 times the chip rate (l e , the number of chips per second applied in the despreading stage), downconverted and decimated by 4 immediately so as to drop the resultmg sample rate to 1 2 MHZ
  • the signal is correlated (despread) and subsequently decimated again to drop the Nyquist bandwidth to ⁇ 57 6 kHz, which m the preferred embodiment is the frequency uncertainty bandwidth (BW)
  • the digital signal processing flow for the receiver portion ofthe transceiver shown in Figure 9 is depicted in Figure 11 In Figure 11, a signal of interest lies at an IF frequency of 49 2 MHZ and is applied to an input 1102 of a ADC 1104 at a sampling frequency of 4 8 MHZ (1106)
  • 1116Q and decimation blocks 11181 and 1118Q Code co ⁇ elation is performed as the signal from PN code generator 1120 is mixed in 11221 and 1122Q to generate correlated I and Q data streams This data is further filtered by low pass filters 11241 and 1124Q and then decimated by elements 11261 and 1126Q
  • the resulting I and Q data streams form a set of partial decimation sums, each sum being the co ⁇ elation of 42 processed samples
  • the decimation from the sample rate with 252 points to 6 points reduces the effective Nyquist bandwidth for the signal and sets the predetection bandwidth to 115 kHz
  • the magnitude ofthe resulting signal power is calculated by respective squaring mechanisms 1128 I and 1128 Q and summation blocks 11301, 1130Q, and 1132
  • the result is signal a 1134, which is a magnitude scalar value representative ofthe correlated signal power m a 115 kHz noise bandwidth
  • the leftmost portion of Figure 11 performs the quadrature downconversion and partial decimation
  • the nght portion of Figure 11 performs the subsequent despreading and decimation required to limit the noise bandwidth and achieve maximum sensitivity, while spanning a frequency uncertainty of 115 kHz Alternating a dec ⁇ mate-by-10 operation followed by a dec ⁇ mate-by-11 operation, three times in succession, realizes the dec ⁇ mate-by-10 5 block 1126 in Figure 11
  • the resultmg 6 data points of I and 6 data points of Q are squared, thus destroying their phase relationship pnor to final decimation which is performed as a summing function
  • further techniques for limiting noise bandwidth is prevented so that the subsequent summation yields a predetection noise bandwidth of 115 kHz
  • the wide predetection noise bandwidth of 115 kHz which is much larger than the approximately 19 2 kHz baseband signal is needed because the exact position ofthe baseband signal cannot be a pno ⁇ predicted with any degree of certainty, owing to the inaccuracy of
  • the ADC 1104 is a 1-bit sampled luniter
  • a multi-bit ADC may also, albeit at greater expense and possible requirement that an Automatic Gain Function (AGC) function be used to avoid applying the signal at a level that is outside ofthe multi-bit ACC's dynamic range
  • AGC Automatic Gain Function
  • the overall noise contnbution due to IF slew limiting and aperture jitter is evaluated to ensure that remaming dynamic range supports signal processing requirements
  • the dynamic range must be able to receive both noise and at least 18 dB (and preferably 36 dB) of signal Because the low-cost embodiment ofthe instant invention is a 1 -bit limited system, the dynamic range ofthe system is hmited to the process gam of 18 dB But since the system can also produce earner insertion for jamming signals, the theoretic process gain against a frequency coincident jamming signal is 36 dB
  • the resulting spectrum following digitization is centered at +'/ 4 Fs so as to maximize distance to the nearest image (as was discussed in reference to Figure 3) Additional images exist at -% Fs as well as - VA FS Because the signal is sampled real, the image is ideally centered m the Nyquist bandwidth prior to final downconversion as shown previously m Figure 3
  • the final conversion to baseband must be performed in quadrature to ensure that negative images do not overlap
  • the digitized signal is downconverted to baseband using a half-mixer, as discussed m reference to the background art
  • the present invention completes the signal downconversion operation by moving the quadrature signal centered at Fs/4 (1 e , 1 2 MHZ) to baseband (I e , 0 Hz), as performed with components 1110, 1112 and 1114
  • Figure 11 illustrates the sampled limiter (l e , ADC) 1104 as a mixer because the sampled miter
  • IF 1004 is operating as a harmonic sampler and thus also downconverts the IF centered at 49 2 MHZ Several IF frequencies are preferred based on the availability of inexpensive surface acoustic wave (SAW) filters
  • Inexpensive bandpass SAW filters enable the harmonic sampling technique due to their sharp roll-off and excellent ultimate rejection characteristics 10 8 MHZ is very near the standard SAW frequency of 10 7
  • MHZ used widely as a communication IF 34 8 MHZ is ideal due to SAW filters that are present in many color televisions 49 2 MHZ, the prefe ⁇ ed embodiment, is also ideal due to the volume of portable telephones using this frequency 70 MHZ SAW filters are also available, but the harmonic multiplicand
  • the 10th harmonic multiplicand ofthe sample rate 1106 of 4 8 MHZ creates a mixing tone at 48 MHZ, the difference yielding the digitized downconverted image 1108 centered at 1 2
  • the half-mixer (1144) performs a complex translation ofthe real signal centered at 1 2 MHZ and completes the downconversion to the baseband signal at 0 Hz
  • the downconversion tone 1110 is realized digitally as a series of values of 1 2 MHZ as sampled at 4 8 MHZ, which in turn defines a 4 1 relationship between Fs and the IF center frequency (Fc)
  • This 4 1 relationship enables a particularly efficient downconversion operation because a coefficient set for the I (In phase) data downconversion mixer may be represented as follows
  • the half-mixer multipliers 11141 and 1114Q become simple XOR gates for single-bit data
  • the resulting complex signal 11131 and 1113Q at the input to the lowpass filters 11161 and 1116Q have a Nyquist bandwidth of 2 4 MHZ
  • the time resolution provides ' ⁇ -chip steps for fine search by skippmg or reusing a data point
  • the fine search algorithm uses this technique to co ⁇ elate the incoming signal against a fixed PN at %-ch ⁇ p resolution
  • Coarse search does not require '/4-ch ⁇ p time resolution Rather, a reduction of data and co ⁇ espondmg computational loading is realized by decimating the complex signal to the chip rate
  • Figure 11 performs this function in the lowpass filters 11161 and 1116Q and decrmators 11181 and 1118Q
  • Decimation-in-time processes may be viewed as providmg mixmg and sampling operations
  • Filters 11161 and 1116Q are used to reject unwanted images that exist in the digitized spectrum separated by the Nyquist bandwidth, m this case 2 4 MHZ
  • Decimate-by-four 11181 and 1118Q mechanisms follow the filters 11161 and 1116Q so as to lower the effective sample rate to 1 2 MHZ, shown as signals 1 1 191 and 1119Q
  • the decimation process immediately following the half-mixer may be realized as a simple adder that adds every other sample, ignoring the products containing zero coefficients
  • the combined downconversion decimation block is therefore optimized for minimized computation and signal processing load, reducing multipliers to single XOR gates and the decimators to simple adders
  • the entire downconversion decimation process is performed without any mathematical processmg operations being performed on samples originating from a one-bit ADC converter
  • Specific signal processmg functions are avoided by using two 16-element lookup tables and indirect addressmg based on a serialized 4-bit nibble
  • the 16-element lookup tables may be implemented in semiconductor memory or other mechanism for holding database entnes (such as boolean operators, as will be discussed)
  • database entnes such as boolean operators, as will be discussed
  • Data structures for the database entnes are shown m Tables 1 and 2, where respective fields of the respective data structures include decimated and downconverted data samples corresponding to particular sets of pre-decimated samples
  • Figure 12 depicts a digitizing system that would use this technique replacing the half mixer and decimate operators of Figure 11
  • a signal of interest 1202 lies at an IF frequency of 49 2 MHZ and is sampled by the 1 bit ADC 1204 at a sampling frequency of 4 8 MHZ (1206)
  • the resulting signal 1208 is at a near baseband frequency of 1 2 MHZ with a sampling rate of 4 8 MHZ Because the sampling rate is four times the code repetition rate, four samples represent a single code chip
  • These four samples are converted into parallel by the senal-to-parallel converter 1210 and then passed to a database implemented as the lookup tables 1212 I and 1212 Q implemented as semiconductor memory
  • the four parallel samples are used as the address input (address or database indica) of these lookup tables 12121 and 1212Q
  • the four address bits are weighted accordmg to the I coefficients (1, 0, -1, 0) and the co ⁇ espondmg Q coefficients (0, 1, 0, -1) to produce the
  • the I data only uses alternating data points exclusive ofthe Q data (unused points are shaded gray in Table 1), and therefore, Table 1 collapses into two 4-element tables as shown m Table 2 Conversely, m systems where additional memory is available, the shift register 1210 can be expanded and the table appropnately increased in scale to perform a wide vanety of decimation ratios and downconversion tones For example, if the Fs to Fc ratio were 8 1 , eight samples ofthe data would be sufficient for multiplication
  • the shift register 1210 would be lengthened to 8, and the lookup table would have 256 values
  • the data width of the output would be scaleable, and the quantization e ⁇ or would be predictable and programmed into the lookup table
  • This quantization e ⁇ or is not a problem in the case of 4 1 ratios because the coefficients are integer Fractional coefficients. however, create a need to represent non-integer decimation results
  • the output of the lookup table can represent the fractional results to whatever resolution is required by the system implementation at the cost of widening the datapath (e g , a bus)
  • Table 2 The example in Figure 12 uses a 16-element table that holds the sum ofthe two valid samples in a two-bit result. Processors that have an abundance of memory and excellent memory access operations but do not have fast multiply-accumulators will benefit from this technique. This enables the class of general pu ⁇ ose microcontrollers to perform "DSP" functions without the need of fast multiply-accumulator operations.
  • Table 2 In another alternative, reference is made to data in Table 2, where the resulting I data and Q data are simplified into logical combinations ofthe input samples.
  • the lookup table itself can be replaced with a few logic gates (serving as the database, which is a hardwired, preprogrammed alternative to the semiconductor database of Figure 12) implemented in the decimation stage. The Boolean logic expression for these is given by:
  • a signal of interest 1302 lies at an IF frequency of 49.2 MHZ and is sampled by the 1 bit ADC 1304 at a sampling frequency of 4.8 MHZ (1306).
  • a center ofthe resulting signal 1308 is above a baseband frequency by about 1.2 MHZ and represented with a stream of samples at a sampling rate of 4.8 MHZ. Because the sampling rate is four times the code repetition rate (i.e., a rate at which the PN code repeats itself), four samples correspond to a single code chip interval. These four samples are converted into a parallel representation by the serial-to-parallel converter 1310 and then passed to Boolean logic blocks 13121 and 1312Q.
  • the combinatorial block 13121 performs the same function as the lookup table and produces a decimated, downconverted signal.
  • a divide-by-four device 1316 serves to clock latches 13141 and 1314Q so to produce the decimated, downconverted output data samples as 13181 and 1318Q.
  • Another alternative approach for implementing the quadrature downconversion and decimation function uses a signal processing engine such as a DSP or other processor to perform this function as the data is read from the sampling device.
  • a signal processing engine such as a DSP or other processor to perform this function as the data is read from the sampling device.
  • the processor combines the 4:1 downconversion ratio efficiencies discussed previously with the data collection and decimation to perform the downconversion, despreading and decimation process without the need for storing any data coefficients . This is particularly useful for processors with limited RAM memory such as very inexpensive processors or a hardware state-machine implementation (as implemented in a programmable logic device--
  • Coefficient-less decimation, downconversion and despreading as implemented in the present embodiment is based on the processor's ability to sign-accumulate data as read from the sampling device Two parallel interleaved processes are executed to compute the inphase and quadrature data streams
  • an in-line execution process is performed that adds/subtracts m the accumulation process to represent multiplication by 1 or -1
  • the in-line code itself serves as the database repository for the resulting downconverted, despread, and decimated samples So as to further illustrate to explain this technique, exemplary pseudo-code for the in-line code is listed below
  • a single processor can interleave the inphase and quadrature functions if there exists multiple accumulators or registers in the processor to hold intermediate values
  • the above instructions would be modified to replace the "A" register with a "B" register Either multiple accumulators, context switched register files or temporary storage of intermediate values performs this function
  • the downconversion and decimation algonthm may be encoded into the firmware without using any data store For example, if the processor executed four instructions per sample, the downconversion and decimation function becomes as follows
  • the above pseudo-code performs a quadrature downconversion and 4 1 decimation on an input data stream It is repeated as in-line code for however many iterations necessary to correspond with a symbol interval
  • the NOP instructions are replaced with instructions for performing concurrent processes, such as moving data or subsequent signal processmg
  • despreading could be combined with the method where the spreadmg code inverts the sign of accumulation on a chip by chip basis For chips where the spreadmg code is a "1", the above described process leaves the resultmg sample unchanged For chips where the spreading code is a "0", the above process sign inverts the decimated result pnor to performing the STORE operation, or alternatively the LOAD and SUBTRACT functions could be replaced with a LOAD NEGATIVE and ACCUM instruction where the data is sign inverted on the initial read and accumulated on the second sample instead of subtracted
  • the code becomes an m-hne algonthm where the length ofthe algonthm extends to the encompass the received signal spreading code Because multiplication is an associative operation, the downconversion and decimation functions can be performed concurrently even if the downconversion and oversample ratios are different The downconversion ratio is given by the ratio of
  • oversample ratio is given by a ratio of Fs to the frequency of chippmg rate, F ch ⁇ p which may be any integer number
  • the present embodiment uses an oversample rate of 4 1, but a 5 1 is used m the multichannel embodunent (discussed later) Table 3 depicts how the associative property of multiplication allows for simultaneous downconvert and despread without the need for coefficient store
  • the decimation ratio becomes a straight-forward operation in that the accumulated sum may be stored as an intermediate partial decimation result at any integer number of samples This provides for intermediate decimation results for setting a predetection noise bandwidth similarly for the quadrature data For example, assuming the receiver is already PN aligned with the received signal and demodulating the signal, the 252 samples may be decimated by 42, 1 e .
  • the sampled signal interval is initially decimated to a sampling rate equal to the chipping rate Durmg coarse search mode, before the signal is aligned with the PN code, the sampled data is mixed with the PN code at increments of 1-ch ⁇ p steps
  • the co ⁇ elation result is bandwidth limited down to the predetection bandwidth so as to determine if that particular spreading code position resulted in a high co ⁇ elation result, indicative of code alignment
  • decimation filter is included pnor to the decimation step to ensure that alias images do not destroy system performance Also, this filter should attenuate the desired signal to a mmimal extent because the signal may still contain mismatches in PN alignment
  • a boxcar averaging filter is used as the decimation filter
  • a boxcar averaging filter has a rectangular time domain window characteristic and therefore maximizes co ⁇ elation gain derived near the sample wmdow discontinuities
  • the boxcar averaging decimation filters implemented in the preferred embodiment are unitary scaled at the window discontinuities In the frequency domam, this is a sine function, which is characteristic of a transfer function of the decimation filter, having a roll-off that is a function of the decimation frequency Because the transfer function will have a rounded shape, signals that are not centered in the middle ofthe transfer function will be attenuated by an amount corresponding to a frequency offset error imparted on the transmit signal by the inaccurate frequency reference employed by the transmitter while forming and transmitting the signal
  • the present embodiment reduces the effects of decimation loss as a way to keep from incurring as much as 3 9 dB loss for transmitters that have a significant frequency offset error that place the transmitted signal at the edge ofthe detection bandwidth, Nyquist band edge
  • decimation loss due to a filtenng effect
  • Curve 1402 in Figure 14 represents how a frequency uncertainty e ⁇ or imparted on the received signal will reduce a signal power in an initial downconversion and decimation operation
  • the frequency ofthe transmitted signal is close to the Nyquist band edge, (l e , at a left hand side or right hand side ofthe "transmitter frequency uncertainty range", as illustrated) the receiver will suffer a 3 9 dB loss in signal power, which, among other things, will inhibit the receiver's ability to align the signal
  • a co ⁇ ection is then made to the downconversion tone so as to shift the frequency of the receiver by ⁇ l A the frequency uncertainty
  • the effective signal loss ofthe transmitter will then be represented by either curve 1404 or 1406 depending on whether the signal is shifted up or down in frequency
  • the processor determines that the transmitter frequency e ⁇ or exceeds at least 50% of the decimation bandwidth, the downconversion tone is altered by ⁇ 50% of the Nyquist bandwidth, which moves the desired signal from the center to 50%
  • the resultmg effect is that depicted m Figure 14 of moving the decimation center by ⁇ 50% where it can be seen that the worst case decimation loss is limited to 9 dB This shifting operation recovers 3 dB at band edge relative to usmg the center channel alone
  • the added step of altering the digital downconversion tone adds complexity to the receiver because the downconversion coefficients become a complex tone sampled at the ADC rate
  • the sign ofthe tone is a function of whether the I component leads or lags the Q component
  • the tone should be 50% ofthe decimation bandwidth so as to limit loss to 9 dB
  • a tone close to 9 dB will yield similar results and may improve computational efficiencies m performing the downconversion
  • the coefficient set may be represented by only a portion ofthe cycle For example, 252 data samples would be collected if the sample rate were 4 tunes the chip rate for a 63 chip sequence The sample rate is approximately 4 8 MHZ, so a downconversion tone equal to Fs/4 would repeat every 4 samples, thus the coefficient set need only be 4 samples long Only l A cycle ofthe downconversion tone need be stored as coefficients smce the I and Q processes access the same coefficient set in offset sequence The order and the sign of coefficient retrieval completes the
  • a second approach for correcting the frequency of an incoming signal is to adjust the downconversion frequency in the 1st local oscillator This is accomplished by programming the conventional LO synthesizer of Figure 8 to a new frequency
  • the synchronization search process is modifiable m yet another method for reducing frequency uncertamty decimation loss
  • the digital or RF/IF frequency co ⁇ ection was made following initial search and trip determination
  • there exists a significant loss of signal power at the frequency uncertainty band edge This loss also has an adverse impact for signal detection
  • the previous discussion makes the assumption that the signal can first be detected and roughly located so an appropnate correction be made to limit the loss for demodulation
  • SNR signal-to-noise ratio
  • the detection process is enhancable by inco ⁇ orating the techniques discussed above into the search process.
  • One method for improving detection at band edge is to subdivide the frequency uncertainty band into a set of center frequencies which set the worst case loss for decimation loss at tolerable limits.
  • Lines 1404 and 1406 represent 2 center frequencies which will perform this task.
  • the search process simply makes an adjustment, alternating between these two candidate frequencies.
  • frequency selection can be made either in the digital downconversion or in a RF/IF downconversion step.
  • the signal leader (or preamble, as will be discussed) or synchronization interval needs to have sufficient duration for all candidate frequencies to be evaluated.
  • both lobes may be simultaneously performed, the two lobes being depicted in Figure
  • Another method for improving band edge sensitivity is averaging, which as discussed later herein, is a technique for improving sensitivity across the predetection bandwidth, including the frequency uncertainty band edge.
  • Optimal sensitivity can be achieved using averaging, band limiting and frequency adjustments as discussed above at the cost of system complexity, transmitted duration and receive algorithmic loading.
  • the signal amplitude information is stripped, and thus, except for signals which are at the same relative power as thermal noise, all signals appear in the final co ⁇ elation function at the same relative power level. Because of this, a simplified threshold mechanism searches only the maximum and compares it to an absolute threshold, thus skipping a noise estimation process.
  • the correlation (or despreading) task is performed in software at the minimum frequency possible, namely the chipping rate
  • Direct sequence receivers align the receiver PN code with the transmitter PN code (as represented in the received signal) in order to realize the process gain
  • This search process can be performed senally by evaluating a sampled data set with respect to a given receiver code phase, stepping the code phase by one chip, and repeatmg the process until a power mcrease is noted Smce the information provided by the correlation function is relevant for only a 1 chip width ofthe PN code, the co ⁇ elation process must be repeated so as to cover each possible chip location Because the code length in the present embodiment is 63 chips long, a serial search approach would require as many as 63 steps before alignment is attained So as to assist in code alignment, the transmitter transmits, as a first part ofthe direct sequence spread spectrum signal, a leader which is a repeated copy ofthe PN code
  • Figures 15A-B help illustrate this alignment process, where Figure 15A depicts the transmitter power over time For an ASK data modulation (such as on-off-keying for binary channel symbols), the transmitter keys-on at
  • Figure 15B depicts the received power developed in the receiver corresponding to the transmitted signal An mcrease in transmitted power is detected at point 1506 Signal correlation is achieved at point 1508, which is the initial trip event Because the search process steps in one chip mcrements (or multiples thereof), the resultmg trip alignment up to point 1508 will be within Vi chip This degree of alignment is insufficient because a Vz chip offset error represents a 6 dB process gam loss Consequently, to improve performance by further limiting alignment loss, a fine search process follows the course search so as to resolve the code misalignment to within a small fraction of a chip, which is accomplished at a time 1510 Once fine search is performed, the receiver waits until a tune 1512 to begin receivmg the ASK data
  • the present embodiment uses the fast serial search to achieve initial t ⁇ p
  • This approach offers a preferred trade-off of performance versus computational complexitv in the first embodiment
  • the fast senal search operates m the receiver in the tune domain by collecting and sto ⁇ ng one code repetition interval (I e , one portion ofthe leader that corresponds m length to a PN code repetition)
  • I e one code repetition interval
  • the receiver initiates a real-tune clock and then sequentially steps the PN code in one-chip steps agamst the collected and stored data until the portion of received signal has been correlated with all 63 code positions
  • the maximum correlation power is determined along with the associated phase position ofthe PN code that generated the maxima
  • the t ⁇ p condition would require that the maximum value exceed the average ofthe remaining values by a predetermined threshold
  • the tnp condition may optionally use a predetermined threshold because systems with a sampled limiter are
  • This fast serial search process has several key advantages for digital receivers as implemented in the present invention Because the receiver only collects one code repetition, the RF front-end may be powered down dunng the subsequent DSP search, savmg battery life Also, the physical collection of data as descnbed in the serial search consumes much ofthe processors computational bandwidth By halting the collection process, the computational bandwidth is recovered in the present invention Even with low- cost DSP processors, the search tune is reduced from 63 code periods to approximately 10 The transmitter leader can therefore be reduced, extending transmitter battery life
  • the fast senal search is performed in less than 14 the time required to transmit the leader so as to ensure detection by the receiver Moreover, assuming that a first sampled bit was collected immediately before the key-on ofthe transmitter, I e , time 1502 m Figure 15A
  • the receiver's search process will not report a tnp event because the receiver's locally generated PN code will be compared to an incomplete portion ofthe transmitters PN code contained in the leader Under these conditions, if the receiver spends more than 14 the leader transmit time performing the search, the next portion ofthe leader sampled by the receiver would he past a mid-point ofthe leader, and thus the receiver would once again fail to synchronize with the transmitted signal because the receiver would be attempting to correlate based on a portion ofthe transmitters PN sequence, contamed at the end ofthe leader, and a beginning portion ofthe ASK data contamed in the transmitted signal Moreover, the new search would extend into the data section of transmission and the receiver would not be ready to demodul
  • Figure 16 is a flowchart explaining the steps performed in the fast serial search process
  • the process beings in step 1605 and proceeds to step 1610, where a data record corresponding to a PN code length is captured and stored in memory
  • the process proceeds to step 1615, where an initial PN sequence phase is set to zero
  • the data sample is co ⁇ elated agamst the current PN sequence and the result is stored in step 1620, subsequently, the PN sequence phase is mcremented by one m step 1625
  • a decision block is performed in step 1630 wherem the process determines whether or not the data sample has been correlated agamst all possible PN sequence phase positions If the data sample has not been co ⁇ elatcd agamst all possible PN sequence phase positions, the process returns to step 1620 to correlate the data agamst the next PN phase position If the data sample has been correlated against all possible PN sequence phase positions, the process continues to step 1635 wherein the maximum value of the 63 co ⁇ elation calculations is
  • alterative steps include stepping the PN code relative to the data, data relative to the PN code or both, because the relative phase positions is the relevant information sought in the co ⁇ elation process.
  • the receiver aligns the two spreading codes as closely as possible, therefore maximizing the signal strength ofthe received spread spectrum signal. So as to more closely align the two spreading codes, the receiver of the present embodiment initiates a fine search process wherein the receiver changes the spreading code by fractional chips and attempts to establish a better code alignment.
  • the processor slips or advances a single sample by 1/4 chip intervals. Because the processor executes several instructions per sample interval, a fraction ofthe 1/4 chip step is achieved by hesitating instruction intervals combined with slipping samples. In the prefe ⁇ ed embodiment, the processor controls the sample clock to the ADC, so that the processor executes 4 instructions per sample. Therefore, the processor can affect a slip ofthe locally generated PN code relative to transmit PN code (as represented in the received portion ofthe leader) by 1/16 of a chip by inserting a single NOP instruction into the bit- time processing loop.
  • Figure 17 shows a "real world" fine search process, to be contrasted with the ideal co ⁇ elation process discussed in reference to Figure 7.
  • the solid triangular line 1705 represents the ideal correlation peak, and the vertical lines 1710 at each fractional chip phase position show the potential signal drift due to instantaneous noise.
  • the dashed line 1720 shows an example of a fine search process in the presence of noise.
  • Conventional fine search algorithms correlate each relative code position with the data sample, and then choose the code position that generates the highest signal level. In Figure 17, such an algorithm will result in a % chip e ⁇ or, resulting in a mean 2.5 dB signal loss; the e ⁇ or will resulting from the process detecting that correlation occurred at position 1730 rather than 1725.
  • the standard deviation ofthe noise becomes a significant factor in identifying the true correlation peak. More particularly, a larger standard deviation noise will cause the lengths of the vertical lines 1710 to increase causing greater numbers of co ⁇ elation e ⁇ ors in the serial fine search process.
  • a conventional method to overcome the effects of instantaneous noise is to dwell on each fine search position for more than one code period and average the values.
  • a disadvantage to this method, for battery operated applications is that increased amounts of transmitter leader time is required to obtain enough samples to average.
  • a goal of the fine search algorithm in the present embodiment is to obtain the best possible spreading code correlation as quickly as possible.
  • the receiver ofthe present embodiment dwells on each fractional spreading code position for only one code period, but does not select the strongest signal out ofthe data set.
  • the present fine sync process uses both chip offset and correlation strength of the entire data set to determine the ideal code alignment.
  • application of a center of mass operation on this entire data set improves fine search accuracy.
  • Alternative operations including least squares, curvefitting and convolution may be used, but are less computationally efficient in the present application.
  • Figure 18 shows the results of three different search processes evaluated over several hundred fine search passes on real data containing noise. These processes slip the phase position of the receiver despreading code by 1/5 chip steps, and seven discrete positions are used (-3/5, -2/5, -1/5, 0, +1/5, +2/5, and +3/5 ) . Because the initial trip can occur within 14 chip ofthe transmitted spreading code, the respective processes at least include data from -14 chip to +14 chip ofthe trip position. Also, the processes may utilize any fractional value, keeping in mind that smaller fractional positions may yield a better result but will require more data samples as well as require more computational power.
  • the "Peak 7" process searches the 7 different chip phase positions and selects the maximum signal value.
  • the "Peak 7" line 1810 depicts the results when the maximum signal strength value is selected from the 7 chip positions. Note that even though the initial trip sometimes occurs at the best possible code alignment, the fine search process will, on the average, result in a 1.5 to 2.0 dB loss in received signal.
  • CM 7 This process has been previously implemented. Inventive methods described as "CM 7" and “CM 7+” algorithms have an effect of averaging out the noise of 7 bit times without dwelling on each chip position for 7 bit times.
  • the "CM 7" process calculates the center of mass ofthe 7 different chip positions and selects the chip value which coincides with the center of mass. This process works well if the initial trip is within 1/5 of a chip of the ideal relative code phase position. However, if the initial trip is greater than 1/5 of a chip from the ideal position, the co ⁇ elation loss becomes severe, as seen at the end points of curve 1820 of Figure 18. This shortcoming is addressed in the CM7+ process, explained below.
  • the "CM 7+" process is a conditional two-step process. If the initial trip and subsequent center of mass calculation results in a fine search adjustment of less than 1/5 chip, then the condition is satisfied. If, however, the center of mass calculation shows that the initial trip error was greater than 1/5 chip, then the process moves the trip location by 2/5 chips, collects new data points out to 1 chip from the initial trip position, and re-calculates the center of mass, by re-using 5 ofthe first correlation sums. The fine search error results in less than a .75 dB loss, as seen on curve 1830 of Figure 18.
  • Steps in the "CM 7+" algorithm are explained with reference to Figure 19 where the method begins in steps 1905 and then 1910, where an initial PN sequence phase is set to the initial trip phase minus 3/5 of a chip.
  • the process proceeds to step 1915, where one code period of data is taken and stored.
  • the data sample is correlated against the current PN sequence and stored in step 1920; subsequently, the PN sequence phase is incremented by 1/5 of a chip in step 1925.
  • a decision block is performed in step 1930 wherein the process determines whether or not the data sample has been co ⁇ elated against all seven fractional phase positions . If the data sample has not been co ⁇ elated against all fractional code chip phase positions, the process returns to step 1920 to co ⁇ elate the data against the next phase position.
  • step 1935 the process continues to step 1935 wherein the center of mass calculation is performed.
  • the process proceeds to step 1940, where the center of mass result is compared against the initial trip value. If the center of mass indicates that the fine search position is within 1/5 of a chip ofthe coarse search position, then the algorithm proceeds to step 1945 to begin the demodulation process. If the center of mass indicates that the fine search position is more than 1/5 of a chip away from the coarse search position, then the algorithm proceeds to step 1950, where the algorithm recenters the trip location by 2/5 of a chip, collects new data points, and recomputes the center of mass. As stated earlier, other algorithms such as least squares, curve fitting, and convolution can also be used to implement this fine search technique. Center of Mass 9
  • a variant ofthe fine sync process uses the decimation process to acquire a minimum of data points and gives a reasonable trade-off between accuracy and computational loading
  • the initial code phase will be withm 14 chip of the ideal code phase position
  • the process as descnbed below, uses a sample rate (Fs) at 4x the chippmg rate
  • a data sample Once a data sample is acquired, it can be co ⁇ elated agamst different phases ofthe spreadmg code, and, if not decimated, the data sample can be co ⁇ elated agamst all fractional code phase positions, provided that a fractional resolution of the spreadmg code equals the sampling rate of the data
  • This approach requires storage of a single data sample with a duration equal to the code repetition
  • the initial downconversion and decimation process is performed prior to despreading and the result is a data set containing one element for each chip of the spreading sequence
  • This data set is used m coarse search where all possible combinations ofthe phase of the spreadmg code are used to determine if a trip event occurs, and thus the coarse search step resolution is in integer chip steps
  • the receiver ofthe present embodiment re-uses the decimation process in the fine search process Multiple data samples are taken at fractional phase offsets so as to calculate the correlation power over the correlation peak
  • This center of mass 9 process is explamed with reference to the flowchart of Figure 20
  • the process begins in step 2005 and then block 2010 where a first data sample is acquired at a 4 1 multiple ofthe chip rate and then decimated to the chip rate This data sample is co ⁇ elated three times in block 2011 with the spreadmg code at - 1 , 0, and + 1 chip offsets from the initial tnp position
  • the spreading code is adjusted by +14 chip from the initial tnp phase position
  • a second data sample is acquired and then decimated to the chip rate
  • This data sample is co ⁇ elated twice m block 2021 with the spreadmg code at -% and +14 chip offsets from the initial t ⁇ p position
  • the spreadmg code is adjusted by +14 chip from the previously sampled phase position
  • a third data sample is acquired and
  • the center of mass calculation is performed on the co ⁇ elation results from the -1, -VA, -YI, -54, 0, +54, +54, +%, and +1 code phase offsets This calculation is used m step 2051 to establish the code position to receive and demodulate data m block 2052
  • steps 2115, 2120, and 2130 may be removed from the process, although m this vanant all possible data pomts must now be calculated
  • This alternative process is explained with reference to Figure 22 where the process begms in step 2205 and then 2210 where a data record is acquired at said multiple ofthe chip rate and stored for re-use
  • the algonthm proceeds to block 2211 where the data is despread and power measured determined for mne relative code chip offsets of -1, -%, -14, -54, 0, +14, +14, +% and +1 chips where the 0 chip offset equals the initial trip phase
  • the center of mass is calculated on the co ⁇ elation results from the -1, - 3 4, -14, -14, 0, +14, +14, +% and +1 code phase offset power measurements
  • the process then proceeds to block 2240 where the relative phase ofthe receiver code generator
  • On / Off Keyed (OOK) systems a subset of ASK modulation systems, use OOK modulation to format transmitted messages, and rely on an ability ofthe receiver to detect the presence or absence of energy coincident with particular bit (or symbol) times This is the extreme case for amplitude modulation where data is encoded linearly or at discrete amplitude steps relative to a peak value
  • Hard-limited receivers are not typically used for ASK systems because hard-limited receivers use a detection mechanism that inherently strips the amplitude information from the signal.
  • hard-limited systems are mostly used in phase or frequency modulated systems, where the data information is encoded in the phase of a carrier. Nonetheless, because ofthe hard limiting receiver's wide dynamic range, it is desirable to use it in a low-cost receiver to receive transmission from an OOK transmitter.
  • a transmitter feature of the present embodiment implements on-off-keying by imposing a requirement to not only amplitude attenuate the signals during a "0" state, but also suspend the PN code generator used to spread the transmitted signal as shown in Figure 25, 2510, 2552.
  • the receiver that uses a hard-limiter will not notice the amplitude key but it will be able to use the code on / code off aspect to make a determination between correlation sum and no co ⁇ elation sum.
  • the bit state determination is therefore a function ofthe ability to produce process gain in the receiver.
  • the receiver is relatively indifferent to amplitude changes, it may seem reasonable to modulate only by employing code on / code off, but not varying a power. However, it is presently identified that systems operating near power per unit bandwidth restrictions should not use this approach because removal ofthe code will cause the transmitted na ⁇ ow band signal to have a higher peak power roughly equal to the process gain. Otherwise, a combination of amplitude and code keying is desired to create a OOK transmitter which operates at controlled power spectral density.
  • the present invention has scaleable embodiments that allow for increased system improvement for increase processing power and, perhaps, battery power. Accordingly, the several approaches discussed herein, in some instances, are specialized algorithms to acquire, synchronize, detect a trip condition and subsequently demodulate data using the least amount of computational resources. Processes that appear to be equivalent in function must be compared based on their computational efficiency, and related power draw for a particular application. To this end some processes disclosed herein may appear to be less elegant than known algorithms, but, as is often the case, these known, conventional algorithms presuppose that a certain amount of processing resources and power is available.
  • Figure 23 is a flow chart of a top level receiver signal acquisition process, which is applicable to a battery mode of operation where "time to search" is triggered by a wake-up interval timer.
  • the process of Figure 23 is also applicable to continuous search receivers that stay on line continuously where "time to search" merely is a start point in a continuous loop.
  • the process begins in step 2305 arid then step 2310 where the receiver samples and stores one code period of data. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step 2315 where the antenna and/or frequency settings are selected for the subsequent search to allow for settling in the VCO, as will be discussed in reference to Figure 27. Alternatively, if averaging is used, these steps may be delayed until the last sample is taken so as to complete the average.
  • the decision to perform antenna or frequency selection is an optional step and depends on the specific system requirements and architecture.
  • the process continues at step 2325, where a coarse search process is performed. Coarse search may be any of the fast search methods discussed previously, or any known methods.
  • step 2330 the process continues to step 2330 through branch 2331 and then branch 2333 is taken, where the steps of 2310 and 2325 are repeated until the proper amount of data has been sampled, stored, and averaged.
  • Averaging is implemented on a single antenna and frequency setting; therefore, step 2315 is not repeated in the averaging algorithm.
  • decision block 2335 a trip decision is made based on the process depicted in Figure 28 . If a trip is detected, then the receiver performs the fine search and demodulation processes in step 2340, where the fine search operation uses a center of mass algorithm discussed previously or other known methods.
  • step 2345 the process decides whether or not to enter into sleep mode, based upon the receiver type. If the receiver is battery powered, the receiver will either go into sleep mode in step 2350, or return to step 2305 to repeat the signal acquisition process. If the receiver is externally powered, the receiver returns to step 2305. If in step 2335 a trip is not achieved, the process proceeds to step 2355 where the receiver verifies that the acquisition process has been performed for all possible antennas and frequencies. If not, the process returns to step 2310 to collect new data and select another antenna (if necessary) or another frequency (if necessary) 2315. From step 2355, the process proceeds to the sleep decision step 2345 only if all possible antennas and frequency values have been searched. Many possibilities exist for a specific path followed in process of Figure 23, depending on system requirements, transmitter leader length and averaging options. Nonetheless, the flexibility afforded by the scaleable approach for acquisition, trip and demodulation based on system requirements is evident.
  • the present transceiver includes redundant receive antennas 901, 903 ( Figure 9) so as to offer recourse in overcoming signal fading or shadowing by allowing the antennas 901, 903 to be physically separated and or orthogonally polarized.
  • the receiver utilizes the antennas 901 , 903 in acquisition to select the channel with greatest power for demodulation.
  • Figure 24 depicts the antenna selection process, assuming the coarse search process has already been performed.
  • the fine search process is complete with an optimal phase position calculated at time 2405 and verified at time 2410, all of which being performed using the same antenna.
  • the alternate antenna is evaluated for reception, using the same PN phase that was selected at the end ofthe fine search process.
  • the alternate port is selected and demodulation begins during interval 2430. The process is also repeated at various points throughout the data collection during bit periods where known symbols are expected.
  • transmitters and receivers must overcome the effects of jammers.
  • Many systems use time diversity, or data redundancy, to overcome the effects of instantaneous jammers.
  • the transceiver ofthe present embodiment uses a frequency diversity scheme in an economical manner that does not force the requirement of a frequency synthesizer in a compatible transmit-only or transceiver device.
  • Figure 25 is a block diagram of a DSSS transmitter that may be used to communicate with the receiver ofthe first embodiment or may be in the transmitter portion of a transceiver according to the first embodiment.
  • the transmitter includes a frequency reference source 2502, which is low cost crystal having accuracy of 50 ppm (parts per million) e ⁇ or. This example shows one frequency reference for the entire transmitter, clock divider circuit 2504 produces a code clock signal 2506 for a data generator
  • the data generator 2508 is implemented by a microprocessor, external source or other data source.
  • the PN generator 2510 is also implemented, although it does not have to be, by the same device as data generator 2508.
  • a Clock divider circuit 2512 produces a diversity clock signal
  • the frequency diversity enable signal 2516 controls switch 2518 (implemented as an AND gate), either producing a logic "0" (2520 with diversity disabled) or passing the diversity clock signal (2522 with diversity enabled).
  • the data generator 2508 generates a binary data stream 2524 at baseband and is combined with the PN code 2526 in the XOR gate 2528 so as to produce a waveform spectrum 2530, also at baseband. With frequency diversity enabled, the baseband signal is mixed in a second XOR gate 2532 with diversity enable signal 2522 and low-pass filtered 2534 to produce a signal with spectrum 2538.
  • the second XOR gate 2532 and LPF 2534 serve as a buffer, producing a signal with spectrum 2536, which is identical to the signal with spectrum 2530.
  • the output of frequency source 2502 is upconverted in upconverstion circuit 2540 to produce an
  • RF ca ⁇ ier 2542 with a center frequency of about 915 MHZ (plus the frequency error of 2502 multiplied by the upconversion factor of 2540).
  • the signal with spectrum 2536 is combined with the ca ⁇ ier 2542 in mixer 2544.
  • This product is band-pass filtered in 2546 to produce a signal with single sine spectrum 2548 with a center frequency of about 915 MHZ.
  • This signal is amplified at 2552 and transmitted from antenna 2554.
  • the signal with spectrum 2538 is combined with the carrier 2542 in mixer
  • This product is band-pass filtered in 2546 to produce a signal with dual sine spectrum 2550 with a center frequency of about 915 MHZ.
  • This signal is amplified at 2552 and broadcast on antenna 2554.
  • the generated signal will be as depicted in Figure 26B, with dual images 2601 and 2602 centered at about 915 MHZ.
  • the signal power of either lobe of this signal is 3dB down from the power output ofthe signal from Figure 26A, because the signal power is now distributed in twice the bandwidth as the signal in Figure 26A.
  • the receiver may select from either of two frequency components from which to retrieve the data signal.
  • the receiver performs signal searches at all three frequency values, using the algorithm from Figure 27 to cycle through all possible frequency settings. This approach assumes a transmitter that alternates, or coexists with other transmitters, between diversity (Figure 26B) and no diversity ( Figure 26 A).
  • the present receiver includes a select mechanism for selecting one of several receive frequencies. This mechanism is provided for two primary modes of operation. In the first mode, the receiver is tasked to use one of the available frequencies to select transmitters using that frequency band. This allows the receiver to be compatible with pools of transmitters separated by frequency to be selected through receive frequency tasking. The time to switch between frequencies is typically not critical in this mode of operation.
  • the second mode of operation is intended to capture a transmitter pool (i.e., a group of one or more transmitters) that transmit simultaneously at different frequencies using the previously discussed frequency diversity process.
  • a transmitter pool i.e., a group of one or more transmitters
  • Such transmitters use this diversity technique where the signal is split and separated in frequency by a fixed amount.
  • the receiver must monitor the two (or three) frequencies as part of the acquisition process. Because the frequency selection is integrated into the acquisition process, a timely transition between selection helps minimize transmitter leader time.
  • This mode of operation adds diversity in frequency to increase the probability of data throughput in the presence of intentional or unintentional interference and multipath propagation. If a static interference signal and/or a fade exists at one ofthe transmitted frequencies, the other frequency may be used to demodulate the data.
  • the receiver of the present embodiment uses this technique to improve throughput, quickly alternating search frequencies while processing a previous captured bit interval. By pipelining the process, the frequency transition time can be absorbed thus minimizing the impact on search time.
  • Figures 27A-D depicts this receive acquisition schedule which includes the antenna and frequency diversity processes discussed above.
  • Figure 27D depicts a transmitted signal and Figures 27A-C depict the receiver process used to acquire the signal.
  • Figure 27A represents different candidate frequencies on which the receiver attempts to acquire the signal;
  • Figure 27B represents the antennas on which the receiver attempts to acquire the signal;
  • Figure 27C represents different samples obtained by the receiver and used by the receiver to determine if the transmitter is presently transmitting.
  • the transmitter presents a leader (i.e., preamble) signal prior to data, where the leader is of sufficient duration to allow the receiver to evaluate all combinations of diversity provided for in the system architecture.
  • the receiver samples data at times 2735 for one code period then processes the data using the fast serial search process for a duration 2737, lasting several code periods.
  • the leader is of sufficient length that allows for the receiver to perform successive searches which coincide with all diversity combinations used in the system.
  • Figure 28 depicts the benefit of averaging over successive co ⁇ elation processes to improve acquisition sensitivity.
  • Each coarse search 2812, 2814, 2816, 2818 produces a cross correlation of the received signal and the PN code embedded in the receive coefficients, with 2810 being the average value over the previous N multiple searches.
  • This process requires that subsequent samples are phase coherent to each other, meaning that the time relationship of the first sampled data point in each code period is identical.
  • This phase coherency is obtained using a timer and/or counted state processes to ensure zero relative code phase alignment. Only the frequency reference drift is left uncompensated, but this drift is low relative to the time interval of search.
  • the averaging is performed as a box-car or finite impulse response (FIR) filter structure where the last N symbols are averaged, or the averaging may be performed in an exponential or Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) averaging process where the previous results are decayed and added to a fraction of the current sample.
  • IIR Infinite Impulse Response
  • an exponential averaging process is used so as to minimize memory requirements because only the cu ⁇ ent sample plus one decaying average need be maintained.
  • the weight "N" is 6 where the previous average is multiplied by 5/6 to decay the previous result, the current sample is multiplied by 1/6 and summed to the previous product. The result is stored for future decay and then passed to the trip decision process.
  • Figure 29 depicts the reduction in false alarm rate for averaging 6 samples in the present single channel receiver embodiment.
  • Curves 2910 and 2920 show the power distribution of noise in a 115 kHz noise bandwidth with and without averaging, respectively.
  • Curves 2930 and 2940 show the power distribution of a -110 dBm signal in 115 kHz noise bandwidth with and without averaging, respectively. Improvement is visualized by comparing a minimized overlap of distributions (2920 and 2940, and 2910 and 2930) which is a measure of false alarm rate and degradation in bit error rate. The mean power for the noise and signal plus noise distributions remain unchanged, yet the deviations are reduced creating a greater miss distance between the minimum "On" and the maximum "Off' distributions.
  • Averaging is only useful if coordinated with the leader length ofthe transmitter, and in the case of the present signal channel receiver embodiment, each coarse search operation takes less than 12 PN code intervals. Accordingly, averaging over 6 searches produces a maximum benefit after 72 code intervals. Because the leader length is 92 code intervals on the transmitter, this leaves 20 code intervals for fine search, AGC and overhead. In systems where the leader length must be reduced, the averaging time-base may be reduced accordingly. There is an asymptotic diminishing return on investment for averaging. Averaging two noise samples together reduces the noise deviations by 3 dB. To gain another 3 dB, the number of samples must be doubled to 4. Each significant reduction of noise deviations requires a doubling of time.
  • the most effective average is, therefore, the first average and subsequent averages, while helpful, provide diminishing returns. Also, the improvement cannot exceed the mean signal to noise ratio (SNR) at the output ofthe bandpass filter preceding the magnitude computation. While averaging can improve trip sensitivity to overcome the greatest portion ofthe 3.9 dB loss at maximum frequency ambiguity due to decimation loss, the system performance and cost is at odds according to a trade off of sensitivity for leader length in the transmitter and power/computation loading in the receiver.
  • SNR mean signal to noise ratio
  • a "scalable" feature ofthe present invention is an adjustable data rate .
  • Data rate may be increased in the receiver while using partial decimation coupled with data modulation transitions in the transmitter that occur at fractional PN code boundaries.
  • a standard modulation method for transmitting data in the present inventive system is OOK where a data value "1" is represented by the presence of signal for a repetition ofthe PN code and a data value "0" is represented by the absence of signal for the same interval
  • An alternative data modulation method is BPSK data where the signal is present for both “1" and “0” data symbols, yet the earner phase is inverted 180 degrees to delineate the data state
  • the correlation sum will either sum positively or negatively depending on the arbitrary earner relationship at acquisition
  • the data " 1 " is assigned the state dunng the preamble (leader) so that the PN sequence will be transmitted "in the clear”
  • a Costas loop or other techmque for translating the received phase normal to that ofthe phase detector is used to create a maximum data miss distance and therefore maximize SNR
  • phase mversion event marks a data state where the absence of inversion marks the alternate bit state
  • the data rate can be increased by creatmg artificial symbol boundanes within the PN code
  • the present transceiver system uses a 63 chip PN code length to represent a standard symbol, and therefore provides a data symbol (or data bit) rate of approximately 19 2
  • the data rate can be effectively doubled by arbitrarily assigning the first 31 5 chips to one data symbol, and the second 31 5 chips to the second
  • the transmitter must perform the BPSK or DPSK phase inversion at the 31 5 chip boundary or amplitude key the signal, and the receiver must perform the correlation process by parts (I e , treatmg the first 31 5 chips separate from the subsequent 31 5 chips)
  • Boundary conditions are relatively arbitrary and data rates may be mcreased at any fractional code interval provided the rate divides evenly mto the code repeat rate or a multiple ofthe code repeat rate For example, it may be desirable to send three symbols over two code repeat intervals
  • the transmitter and receiver need only have a synchronization method, or other prearranged agreement, to know when to expect phase mversion or keying ofthe earner
  • Figure 30A depicts the maximum process gain available for a symbol rate equal to the code repeat rate resulting in 17.99 dB of process gain at a 19.2 kbits/sec data rate.
  • FIG. 30B depicts the maximum process gain per symbol for a symbol rate equal to twice the code repeat rate. This effectively doubles the data rate to 38.4 kbits/sec with a co ⁇ esponding process gain maximum of 14.98 dB.
  • Figure 30C depicts three symbols per code interval yielding a data rate of 57.6 kbits/sec with a maximum process gain of 13.22 dB.
  • Figure 30D depicts four symbols per code interval yielding a data rate of 76.8 kbits/sec with a maximum process gain of 11.97 dB.
  • Figure 30E depicts five symbols per code interval yielding a data rate of 96.0 kbits/sec with a maximum process gain of 10.97 dB.
  • Figure 30E depicts six symbols per code interval yielding a data rate of 115.2 kbits/sec with a maximum process gain of 10.21 dB.
  • Data demodulation may proceed after acquiring spreading code synchronization ofthe receiver to the transmitter. If the transmitter derives its spreading code sequence from the same frequency reference as its RF carrier, it is sufficient for the receiver to track the transmitter carrier so as to maintain spreading code synchronization throughout data demodulation. Also, to demodulate a phase modulated signal, it is prefe ⁇ ed to remove the effect ofthe carrier frequency e ⁇ or between transmitter and receiver.
  • One way to remove the effect ofthe carrier frequency e ⁇ or between transmitter and receiver is to use conventional DBPSK demodulation augmented with frequency error co ⁇ ection. According to this approach, assume the received signal is despread, downconverted to baseband and decimated to a bandwidth greater than or equal to the frequency e ⁇ or as previously discussed. This is shown as 3100 in
  • Figure 31 with 6 output samples C(n') 3105 per code period. Choi, Z. Y, Lee, Y. H, "Compensating Frequency Drift in DPSK Systems via Baseband Signal Processing", IEEE Transactions on Communications Vol. 45 No. 8, August 1997, pp 921-924, the contents of which is inco ⁇ orated herein by reference, discusses this techmque using one sample per code period as unduly limiting the frequency range that can be co ⁇ ected
  • a conventional DBPSK demodulator 3110 as taught in Frerkmg, M , "Digital Signal Processing and Communications Systems", Van Nostrand Remhold, 1994, pp 433-435, 448-450, is shown in Figure 31
  • the bit rate being scaleable by the parameter L in the DBPSK demodulator 3110 R (kbit/s) L
  • a product of the present bit samples C(n') 3105 are multiplied by a complex conjugate of the previous bit samples and decimated to one sample C(n) 3115 in the DBPSK demodulator so as to convert the frequency error to a static phase e ⁇ or ⁇
  • the complex sample C ⁇ (n) 3125 whose angle is the static phase error ⁇ , averaged over the previous M bits, is estimated in a decision feedback loop 3120
  • the static phase e ⁇ or ⁇ is canceled before making the demodulated data bit decision b ⁇ t(n) 3130 as shown m Figure 31 , and is accomplished by multiplying C(n) by the complex conjugate of
  • the synthesizer includes a stable reference frequency source (such as a quartz crystal oscillator) which is the master clock for the DSP 3280, a downconvert despread and decimate function 3210 as previously disclosed, a frequency detector 3220, a loop filter 3230, a voltage controlled oscillator 3250 and feedback divider 3255
  • the output 3260 ofthe synthesizer is a signal at the desired frequency
  • a digital to analog converter (DAC) 3240 is placed between the loop filter 3230 and the VCO 3250 to provide an analog control signal to the VCO 3250
  • Low cost DACs 3240 are available in a dual 8-bit converter package where fine converter steps are set to 1/64 ofthe coarse converter steps
  • the loop filter algonthm 3230 first adjusts the coarse converter to the coarse frequency error 3232 and then the fine converter to the fine frequency error 3233 dunng frequency control loop settling After the LO is locked to the receiver frequency reference, the receiver is reconfigured by changing the switch 3205 to position 2 in Figure 32.
  • the receive antenna 3201 feeds the conventional analog RF front end 3203 which includes an analog to digital converter (ADC) at its output.
  • ADC analog to digital converter
  • the downconvert coefficients in block 3210 are the computationally efficient Fs/4 set, as previously discussed, and thus a computational burden is minimal and may be shared by other receiver functions.
  • the frequency locked loop drives the coarse and fine frequency e ⁇ ors 3232, 3233 between the transmitter and receiver and hence the decimation loss to zero.
  • Figure 33 illustrates part of a frequency detector implementation as was shown as the decimating frequency detector 3220 in Figure 32, and preferably uses the output of the digital down conversion operation, decimated to 12 samples per spreading code period.
  • signal frequency is the first derivative of signal phase with respect to time. (The over dot signifies first derivative with respect to time.)
  • the continuous time first derivative is approximated by the discrete time first difference 3320 as is known in the DSP art.
  • a group delay of the first difference must be independent of frequency and must equal a group delay ofthe decimated I and
  • Figure 34 is a block diagram of a very low cost DAC that includes a coarse 3401 charge pump and a fine 3403 charge pump (controlled current source) driving a capacitive voltage divider 3405.
  • the "Charge Control" logic 3410 turns on a charge pump for a predetermined time interval required to deposit or remove a particular charge on the capacitors 3405 This produces an output voltage proportional to the frequency e ⁇ or 3415 computed by the loop filter
  • the charge estimate logic 3420 keeps track ofthe charge on the capacitors To conserve power m a battery operated device, the power to the synthesizer is cycled on and off Dunng a power-off event, the estimated charge on the capacitors is saved in non-volatile memory During a power-on event, the estimated charge is ret ⁇ eved from non-volatile memory and used, as will be discussed, to replace the charge on the capacitors that was present pnor to the power-off event
  • a third way to remove the effect ofthe ca ⁇ ier frequency error between transmitter and receiver is to control the first LO VCO 3250 ( Figure 32) in a Costas earner recovery loop for BPSK demodulation
  • a fourth way to remove the effect ofthe earner frequency e ⁇ or between transmitter and receiver uses the Costas earner recovery loop for BPSK demodulation This shown m Figure 32 with the frequency detector 3220 replaced with a Costas phase e ⁇ or detector
  • the DAC 3240 is fed a constant frequency setting and the loop filter 3230 outputs 3232, 3233 control the down conversion coefficients
  • Some ofthe diagram blocks in Figure 32 may be shared by other receiver functions According to this approach the NCO must generate arbitrary frequencies for the downconvert tone so the computational efficiencies discussed previously may not be as prevalent
  • a fifth way to remove the effect ofthe earner frequency e ⁇ or between transmitter and receiver is to measure the frequency error using the frequency detector 3220 shown in Figure 32
  • An additional computation downconverts the decimated I and Q signals from downconvert and despread and decimate block 3210 to zero frequency error in a feedforward a ⁇ angement prior to DBPSK demodulation
  • a second embodiment ofthe present mvention is directed to a multi channel transceiver, having a receiver and transmitter that provides enhanced system sensitivity and performance relative to the single channel transceiver ofthe first embodiment, although requmng additional digital signal processing power than the smgle channel transceiver ofthe first embodiment
  • the multi channel transceiver contains several common components with the single channel transceiver ofthe first embodiment
  • the multi-channel transceiver includes the antennas 901, 903, RF front end 905, transmitter 929, associated antenna 931, and low performance receiver time reference 927 of the single channel receiver, as discussed in Figure 9 Differences, however, will be descnbed with respect to the digital signal processmg section 908 ofthe single channel receiver m Figure
  • the smgle channel receiver compensates for a frequency ambiguity ofthe transmitted signal by using a 115 kHz predetection bandwidth so as to be assured of capturing the transmitted signal therein
  • the wider bandwidth caused a sensitivity loss, as compared with a conventional receiver that does not attempt to compensate for transmitter frequency uncertainty and therefore uses a detection bandwidth that is commensurate in size to a signal bandwidth
  • the multi-channel receiver (actually transceiver, but for simplicity referred to as a receiver) includes a baseband processmg stage that is sufficiently wide to account for the transmitter frequency uncertamty range, although the multi-channel receiver offers improved sensitivity by further subdividing the frequency ambiguity bandwidth mto smaller overlapping bandwidths, each of which match the bandwidth ofthe desired signal
  • the multi-channel receiver In order to determine which ofthe channels actually contains the signal, the multi-channel receiver mcludes a channel selection mechanism that selects one of a plurality of smaller bandwidths in order to acquire the spread spectrum signal and demodulate the data contained therein
  • the multi channel receiver offers slightly better performance than the single channel receiver of the first embodiment because at least one ofthe channels will capture the signal, and that channel will have a bandwidth that more closely approximates a bandwidth ofthe signal
  • the multi channel receiver uses a multi-bit ADC 3504 that serves the same function as the single bit converter in the single channel receiver, in that it digitizes the analog signal mto a series of digital samples, however the ADC 3504 represents the digital samples in multi bit words for subsequent processing in the baseband processor Because the ADC 3504 has hmited dynamic range (I e , a range from lowest signal representable by the ADC 3504 to the highest signal representable by the ADC 3504), an automatic gain control AGC mechanism 3502, as depicted on Figure 35, is used to adjust the incoming signal from the RF front end (similar to the RF front end 905 of Figure 9) to fall within the dynamic range ofthe ADC 3504 Keeping the received signal within the dynamic range of the ADC 3504 prevents the signal from being "clipped" (l e , causing the ADC to perform a non-hnear operation on the signal) if the signal is too high, and prevents the signal from bemg "swamped" by quantization noise generated by the
  • Figure 35 also shows a quadrature downconvert and decimate operator similar to 909 in Figure 9, although processor 3530 depicts the mechanisms used for creating the downconversion and decimation coefficients used m the multi-channel receiver Tone generator 3532 generates a tone at frequency (Fc) equal to an IF center frequency (Fc) ofthe received signal
  • Tone generator 3532 feeds phase shifter
  • Each downconversion tone is mixed with the PN code generator 3536, which has been spectrally compressed with a filter 3538 and mixed m mixers 3540 and 3542 so as to create a downconversion and despreading coefficient table that is precalculated and stored in semiconductor memory m the DSP processor
  • Mixers 3512 and 3522 perform the downconversion and despread process using the signal from the ADC 3504 and the quadrature downconversion despreading signal from the precalculated look-up table stored in memory
  • the resulting signal is a quadrature, baseband, despread signal passed to low pass filters 3514 and 3524 and decimated in downsampling operators 3516 and 3526 to lower the signal sample rate pnor to DC (0 Hz) removal in DC removal mechanisms 3518 and 3528
  • the resulting signal is a despread downconverted and decimated representation of the sample signal received at the input of the quadrature downconversion, despread and decimation process
  • the signal processmg mechanism depicted in Figure 35 has sufficient processmg power to perform either a slow senal search, or a fast senal search, as long as the data record for one code repetition interval is stored in memory and correlated agamst all possible combinations ofthe PN code generated locally m PN code generator 3536 To this end, the decimation efficiencies previously discussed may also be employed herem
  • the sample rate (Fs) ofthe ADC is 6 0 MHZ which differs from the single channel sample rate of 4 8 MHZ
  • the prefe ⁇ ed over sample rate ofthe multi-channel receiver is a 5 1 ratio relative to the chipping rate of 1 2 MHZ which sets the sample rate at a slightly higher frequency
  • the over sample ratio is immaterial to the operation ofthe device and only sets the requirements for the anti-aliasing filter preceding to the ADC Accordingly, a subsequent descnption for the multi-channel receiver will be based on a 5 1 over sample ratio
  • the present mventors have identified that by precalculating the hybrid coefficients, a coefficient lookup table may enable the downconvert, despread and decimate process to be implemented m very modest DSP components that are presently available
  • the final process step depicted m Figure 35 is DC removal, and is performed by DC removal mechanisms 3518 and 3528 that remove undesirable effects of a voltage bias introduced at an analog signal side ofthe ADC 3504
  • DC removal mechanisms 3518 and 3528 that remove undesirable effects of a voltage bias introduced at an analog signal side ofthe ADC 3504
  • the present multi-channel receiver may use a low precision voltage reference at the ADC 3504, compensating in real-time in firmware This further reduces hardware complexity and cost in realizable systems at a very small computational loading cost
  • ADC devices typically have an AC coupled input with a voltage reference set by precision resistors and active components D ⁇ ft in the resistors due to agmg and temperature will vary the reference voltage and center point, creating a DC bias in the incoming data stream
  • ADC bias on the signal will be mte ⁇ reted as a CW jammer in the system, exactly centered in the IF, and will be translated to the Nyquist extremes (0 and Fs/2) This creates an elevated noise floor and will decrease radio sensitivity if left unco ⁇ ected
  • the present multi-channel receiver performs DC removal at a later point in the signal processing, removing the need to perform the math function at the sample rate
  • DC removal is performed in operators 3518 I and 3528 Q, not at pomt 3508, and thus performs DC removal on downconverted, decimated and despread samples
  • the multi-channel receiver performs a despread-and- decimate function on the raw data, reducing the number of samples by the decimation ratio of decimators
  • the signal is decimated by 21 to produce 15 quadrature samples per bit period, yielding a Nyquist-bandwidth frequency uncertamty of 288 kHz, of which only 120 kHz is of interest
  • Removing the DC component from the input data following the decimation reduces the loading from 315 math operations to 30 ( 15 I terms and 15 Q terms)
  • Decimation often implements an averagmg function, but instead of averaging, the decimation process can instead compute the sum This introduces an e ⁇ or factor that will be proportional to 1/N where N is the decimation ratio.
  • decimation (summing) process can be expressed as 15 multiply-accumulate processes against independent data and coefficient sets.
  • Each decimation block / can be expressed as:
  • the result is a scalar value representing one of 15 downsampled data points per I and Q processor. Because a DC offset value is present in the samples, the term D,(n) contains the sampled data plus a constant, A, added to each data point.
  • the new constant K represents the sum of the coefficients for the decimation block.
  • a non-zero mean for the decimation block acts as a multiplier for DC offset if a correction is not performed.
  • the product AK must be compensated within each decimation block if the computation is to be co ⁇ ect.
  • Each I and Q decimation block therefore has an independent K scalar multiplier that magnifies DC.
  • a mean measure ofthe DC component is needed so as to complete the decimation co ⁇ ection.
  • a number of random sampled data points are averaged for each bit interval to produce an estimate ofthe mean. More particularly, in the present embodiment, 16 random ADC data points per code period are averaged to compute a mean.
  • the "code period" mean is then time-averaged over an the most recent 8 code periods to calculate a running approximation of A.
  • each decimation coefficient block (K,) is computed at a compile time and provided as a lookup table.
  • the time-averaged mean (A) is multiplied with each ofthe I and Q coefficient sums (K,) to create 30 DC removal products (AK,) which are subtracted from their respective I and Q decimation results.
  • a final bandwidth in a receiver must match the information bandwidth to achieve maximum sensitivity.
  • the present multi-channel receiver embodiment uses overlapped channel filters to achieve an optimal signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
  • SNR signal-to-noise ratio
  • the data sampled at the ADC 3504 is despread and partially decimated to a point where the decimated signal bandwidth is at least as great as the frequency uncertainty of the transmitter (greater to reduce decimation loss at band edge, as was discussed).
  • the receiver next sends the partially decimated data into a bank of channel filters to complete the decimation process and make the decimation bandwidth equal to the signal bandwidth.
  • the channel filters may be implemented using a fast Fourier transform (FFT) or discrete Fourier transform (DFT), finite impulse response (FIR) filter or infinite impulse response (IIR) filter or other similar transform that band-limits the data signal.
  • FFT fast Fourier transform
  • DFT discrete Fourier transform
  • FIR finite impulse response
  • IIR infinite impulse response
  • a DFT is prefe ⁇ ed over an FFT because an FFT provides uniform channel spacing that is equal to the channel bandwidths. If an FFT is used, the between-channel roll-off adds 3.9 dB of loss to the decimation loss.
  • the input data stream may be represented as:
  • a +jB where "A" and "B” represent vector components of sampled data.
  • the vector holds 1 code period of sampled data partially decimated down to a sampling rate greater than 2 times the frequency uncertainty.
  • the channel filter coefficient is atone represented by the complex vector C + jD.
  • the positive channel filter becomes the product of these two tones.
  • the prefe ⁇ ed embodiment employs this technique to maximize the number of usable overlapped channels . Adding more channels reduces the between-channel losses and more efficiently utilizes processor computational bandwidth. This technique enables the realization of many channels in a very modest digital signal processor.
  • Figure 36 depicts a signal processing mechanism that implements the above-described symmetrical channel filter efficiencies, for realizing a single pair of channel filters, symmetric about 0 Hz. Other mechanisms are used for calculating the other symmetrical channel filter pairs.
  • signals 3602 and 3604 represent the I and Q decimated data streams of a baseband signal.
  • a frequency generator 3606 and delay element 3608 i.e., a phase shifter
  • Multiply operators 36M1 through 36M4 generate the product terms 36P1 through 36P4 respectively by multiplying signals 3602 and 3604 with inphase and quadrature frequency offsets produced by frequency generator 3606 and delay element 3608, as shown.
  • the product terms 36P1-36P4 are decimated by lowpass filters 36F1 through 36F4 and then decimated by 15 in the downsampling elements 36D 1 through 36D4 so as to produce the signals AC, BD, BC, and AD.
  • the signals AC, BD, BC, and AD are then either added or subtracted in elements 36A1 through 36A4 to produce the intermediate values that will be used to determine the signal power in the respective symmetric channel filters.
  • These intermediate values are squared in squaring operators 36S1 through 36S4 and then combined in adders 3614 and 3616 to produce both the positive and negative channel filter outputs for a particular frequency offset.
  • the center channel filter i.e., 0 Hz offset.
  • the center channel filter is the most straight forward to implement because it may be noted that for a 0 Hz frequency offset, as noted in Figure 36, the quadrature component ofthe sinusoidal transform may be constant 0 while the in-phase component may be constant 1. Thus, half of the product terms go to 0 while the other product term is the data itself (multiplied by 1). The 0 Hz channel filter therefore becomes the sum ofthe squares ofthe decimated in-phase and quadrature data.
  • Figure 37 illustrates a center frequency channel determination mechanism that receives the I and Q decimated data streams, 3702 and 3704 respectively, and applies the same to lowpass filters 37F1 and
  • the pu ⁇ ose for employing the decimation filter is to attenuate image frequencies that exist above the Nyquist frequency. According to the filter roll-off, these image frequencies are rejected by at least 13 dB.
  • the decimation loss with regard to transmitter frequency error is the loss across the center ofthe main lobe ofthe sine function.
  • Figure 38 is a graph illustrating an amount of decimation loss for the transmitter frequency uncertainty range as a function of percent of Nyquist bandwidth. When a signal of interest 3803 approaches the band edge of the Nyquist bandwidth 3802 or 3804, up to 3.9 dB of decimation loss can be expected, as shown.
  • the multi-channel receiver performs decimation to reduce the data rate prior to channel filter implementation.
  • the optimal decimation would bring the Nyquist bandwidth down to equal the transmitter frequency uncertainty at a cost of significant decimation loss. Maximizing decimation means that each channel filter performs its function on the minimum of data points. Relaxing the decimation increases the channel filter computational loading, yet provides relief against decimation loss.
  • the sampled data is processed to create overlapping filters that span the frequency uncertainty.
  • the sensitivity of each channel filter is set by the bandwidth ofthe channel filter and the total decimation loss.
  • the ideal channel filter would be performed at the maximum data rate, thus suffering no decimation loss. This is not practical, in systems having limited computational resources, as is the case with the present multi-channel receiver. Accordingly, the realization ofthe present multichannel receiver performs a partial initial decimation, lowering the effective bandwidth and associated data rate prior to channelization.
  • a set-on channel filter may be used to further reduce system loss due to filter shape
  • Set-on channel filter 3910 is used to eliminate or reduce the effects of between-channel loss, where the set- on channel filter has vanable center frequency that may be moved to be centered overtop of a signal, once the signal is detected Following a tnp event m one ofthe static channels, the processor implements an inte ⁇ olation mechanism that inte ⁇ olates a power m two adjacent channel filters so as to determine a best estimate of actual frequency offset
  • the set-on channel filter is subsequently steered to exactly match the desired signal center frequency, thus removing any channel filter roll-off Total system loss is therefore hmited to the decimation loss
  • Figure 39 depicts the set-on filter as a dashed line 3910 which recovers the roll-off loss between two fixed channels
  • the ambiguity function is the received signal energy as a function of spreading code phase ⁇ and carrier frequency shift v between transmitter and receiver.
  • the receiver is adjusted by the code phase and carrier frequency shift that results in greatest received signal energy so as to acquire synchronization with the transmitted signal.
  • a size ofthe phase step in the search method is one code chip and a size of the frequency shift step is the frequency ofthe code repetition.
  • Step 1 A real input fast Fourier transform (FFT) 4010 is performed on an input record 4005 of one period ofthe reference code.
  • the 63 output (frequency) points centered on 0 Hz are saved in memory and the remaining output points are zeroed, which results in a reference code 4014 being filtered by an ideal low pass transfer function 4012. This computation is perfo ⁇ ned only once.
  • FFT fast Fourier transform
  • Step 2 The received signal is preferably sampled at the rate of 5 samples per spreading code chip (or 4 may be used as well).
  • a real input fast Fourier transform (FFT) 4020 is performed on an input record 4015 one code period long.
  • Step 3 A circular indexing shift operation of v -f s /44030 is performed on the output points 4024 so as to downconvert from the IF to baseband, and the resulting 63 output (frequency) points 4034 centered on 0 Hz are saved. The remaining output points are then zeroed, which results in an ideal low pass filtered baseband received signal at a frequency shift v.
  • Step 4 These 63 frequency points 4034 are multiplied in a multiplier 4040 by the complex conjugate 4045 ofthe 63 reference code frequency points 4014.
  • An inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) operation 4050 is performed on the product, and the result is a slice of the ambiguity function at one frequency shift v.
  • IFFT inverse fast Fourier transform
  • Step 5 Steps 3 and 4 are repeated for each frequency shift so as to complete the computation of an ambiguity function 4060, and from this result the receiver can be synchronized using the methods disclosed elsewhere herein.
  • This algorithm is exemplified with a 63 chip spreading sequence, although parameters of the algorithm may be changed to accommodate other spreading sequence lengths, intermediate frequencies, and sampling rates.
  • Fast Frequency Domain Fine Search After resolving the ca ⁇ ier frequency shift v between transmitter and receiver, it is preferable to resolve the spreading code phase ⁇ to 54 of a chip. This is preferably accomplished by repeating step 3 with v set for greatest received signal energy. See Figure 40.
  • the 63 frequency points 4034 are multiplied in the multiplier 4040 by the complex conjugate 4045 ofthe 63 reference code frequency points 4014.
  • the 63 point product is zero padded to 252 points (i.e., add points having zero value) in zero pad operator 4070, and perform an inverse fast Fourier transform
  • IFFT IFFT 4080 on the zero padded product.
  • the result is a slice of an ambiguity function 4090 at the optimum frequency shift v with a phase resolution of 54 of a chip, from which the receiver can be synchronized to within ⁇ 1/8 of a chip using the methods discussed herein.
  • the pu ⁇ ose of this algorithm is to synchronize the PN code ofthe receiver to that ofthe transmit signal.
  • Two parameters need to be resolved in order to achieve this end: transmitter-receiver frequency offset and code-delay ⁇ .
  • the processor can chose the best parameters for synchronization.
  • This 2-dimensional co ⁇ elation function over code-delay and frequency is called the Ambiguity function A( ⁇ , v). Assuming a strong-enough signal is indeed being transmitted, the ( ⁇ , i ⁇ -pair that best aligns with the transmit signal will have the strongest Ambiguity function value. See Figures 41 through 45.
  • Figure 41 illustrates the conventional process of evaluating the Ambiguity function at a specific ( Figure 41 shows N samples over atime span of one code period, dfnj 4101 and N coefficients of one code period, afnj 4102. Both enter a correlator 4103 and the correlation between the two signals 4104 is the Ambiguity function evaluated at ( ⁇ , v).
  • Figure 42 illustrates a conventional process where a slice of the Ambiguity function 4201 is evaluated for all delays ⁇ using a circular correlation operator 4202 with the same inputs.
  • Figure 43 illustrates a conventional circular co ⁇ elation process that is very similar to a process known as circular convolution. Reversing one input sequence a[n] 4301 produces a sequence b[n] 4302, as shown and thus the circular convolution operator 4303 can be used as part ofthe circular co ⁇ elation operator 4304 to produce the ambiguity function.
  • a conventional circular convolution process is shown in Figure 44 and is based on an understanding that convolution in the time domain is equivalent to multiplication operator 4401 in the frequency domain.
  • Sequences 4402 and 4403 entering the circular convolver are reformatted into a frequency representation using the DFT operators 4404 and 4405, and combined in the multiplication operator 4401 an output as product 4406.
  • the product 4406 is reformatted into a time-domain representation 4407 using an Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform operator (IDFT) 4408.
  • IDFT Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform operator
  • Figure 45 illustrates an inventive fast-frequency search process employed in the multi-channel receiver embodiment, which is relatively more computationally intensive than any search process employed in the single-channel receiver ofthe first embodiment, but uses bandpass filtering, and decimation-in-time as a way to reduce processing load.
  • CfnJ 4501 is an extracted M-length frequency-domain subsequence from BfnJ 4502 centered around/74, where B[n] 4502 is a product of an N-point DFT performed on time domain representations (a[n] ... b[n]) ofthe spreading sequence, as generated by the receiver.
  • E[n] 4503 is an extracted M-length frequency-domain sub-sequence from D[n] 4504 centered around (f/4) + v, where D[n] 4504 is an N-point result of a DFT operation performed on N time domain samples, d[n] ofthe received signal.
  • C[n] and E[nJ are equivalent to ideal band-pass filtering in the frequency domain and decimating in the time domain.
  • DfnJ 4504 are stored in RAM so that DfnJ
  • E[n] 4505 can re-extract E[n] 4505 as the process steps through values of vto fill in the Ambiguity function, as shown in the graph portion of Figure 45.
  • a gray region of Figure 45 represents precalculated values stored in ROM.
  • a data structure of the stored data includes a field configured to hold the M points co ⁇ esponding to the portion of the code spectrum centered around f s /4.
  • the product F[n] 4505 is transformed back to the time domain sequence f[n] 4506 before being put into the Ambiguity a ⁇ ay 4507, as shown in Figure 45.
  • the DFT and its Inverse can be calculated using the Fast Fourier Transform process.
  • the DFT (or the IDFT) takes N 2 multiply-accumulate operations, just as many as circular convolution.
  • the FFT algonthm breaks the large DFT into smaller DFT's
  • the Winograd DFT method may be used as a substitute for the smaller prime DFTs Winograd 's method minimizes the number of multiply operations for certain prime DFTs but also incurs higher indexing complexity
  • Most effective digital signal processing devices will perform multiply operations as efficiently as addition operations, and may have provisions for successive and modulo indexing Winograd' s method will not be as advantageous in such processors as it could be with a processor that does not have smgle-instruction multiply operations
  • the Winograd method is not used m the present embodiment for the indivisible DFTs because digital signal processing devices are generally more efficient m the N 2 calculation in general
  • 3 and 7 are relative low number pnmes and thus N 2 is somewhat small
  • prime factors should also play a role selecting a spreading sequence, as they are in the preferred case of 63 chip spreading sequence
  • the multi-channel receiver ofthe present embodiment offers relatively fast signal acquisition and reduced transmitter preamble time
  • False tnps events are received power fluctuations at an e ⁇ oneous code phase that are sufficient to cause the receiver to dwell at that code phase and evaluate the incoming signal to determine if correlation has, in fact, been obtained
  • Sources of received RF signals include ambient noise, keyed earner wave (CW) jammers, non-co ⁇ elated spread spectrum signals, and co ⁇ elated spread spectrum signals ⁇ on-co ⁇ elated spread spectrum signals are signals that may properly be decoded by the receiver, provided that the receiver can eventually obtain code phase coherence with the received signal, a correlated spread spectrum signal is one m which spreadmg code phase coherence has already been achieved
  • a tnp event occurs when there is a measurable increase in received signal power over successive penods of time, however, this increase may be due to several sources and, perhaps, many of these increases will not result in a legitimate, true tnp event signifying that the received signal should be demodulated
  • the presently descnbed inventive process is a ⁇ anged
  • tnp event decisions are made after the signals have been despread and after the signal has been separated mto vanous frequency bins, where a highest performance is obtained by usmg 11 overlappmg frequency bms (channels)
  • the aforementioned signal types will have unique power distnbution charactenstics (e g , signal "signatures") as cumulatively viewed in the frequency bins
  • Figures 47-50 depict the power levels of these signals distributed throughout the bins Figure 47 represents random noise and m Figures 48-50, a center frequency of a received signal is depicted as bemg coincident with the center frequency 4805, 4905, 5005 (l e , in bm 5) ofthe channel filters in the respective figures
  • the signals have similar characteristics, even though Figure 48 depicts an undesired CW jammer while Figure 49 depicts a desired signal at an unco ⁇ elated relative code phase
  • the power level ofthe frequency bms 4805, 4905 is lower than the
  • Figure 50 illustrates the power distnbution in the respective bins when the co ⁇ elated spread spectrum signal is present
  • Frequency b 5 (5005) holds the center frequency ofthe transmitted signal as depicted by the maximum signal level Because the frequency bins overlap, some ofthe energy present in bm 5 will also be in bins 4 (5004) and 6 (5006), but powers in the remaining bins begins to drop off sha ⁇ ly after that, as set by the attenuation provided by each channel filter (1 e , because much, or all, of the signal energy falls outside ofthe filter passband) Steps in the false t ⁇ p avoidance process are explained with reference to Figure 51 where the method begins in step 5105 , where the power level is measured in each channel filter The process proceeds to step 5110 where the frequency bin with the maximum signal strength is determined and designated as maxl Subsequently, step 5120 ignores the frequency bins that are adjacent to maxl providing for channel overlap Step 5120 calculates the average value ofthe signal strength values m the remaining frequency bms and design
  • Figure 51 also illustrates another process that uses the approach discussed earlier for the 1-bit ADC for the single chaimel embodiment
  • the process begms m step 5105, as previously discussed, and proceeds to step 5110, as previously discussed
  • the process flows to step 5141, where a stored predetermined threshold is ret ⁇ eved from memory and, in step 5145 is compared with maxl obtained in step 5110 If the response to the inquiry in step 5145 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step 5140, where the fine search process is initiated However, if the response to the inquiry m step 5145 is negative, the process proceeds to step 5150, where the course search process continues by returning to step 5105 Enhancing Coarse Search
  • Averagmg similarly improves signal acquisition performance in the present multi-channel recerv er embodiment, as was the case for the single channel receiver embodiment
  • the averaging process is a different m several respects
  • the correlation data being represented as vectors
  • the co ⁇ elation data exists m another dimension as well, so as to be a ⁇ anged in a plane of information, each data pomt being described by three axes coordmates frequency channel
  • Figure 52 depicts a sample data set from one code period (i.e., no averaging), while Figure 53 shows the collection of several data sets, appropriately averaged.
  • a most noticeable result of averaging is a suppression of background noise, as is evident from a comparison of noise floors 5220 and 5320 in Figures 52 and 53, respectively.
  • averaging may be performed as a boxcar or FIR structure where the last N symbols are averaged.
  • averaging may be performed in an exponential or IIR averaging process where the previous results are decayed and added to a fraction of a present sample.
  • Figures 52 and 53 depict the desired signal co ⁇ elation peak at points 5210 and 5310, respectively, in a plane of frequency channel versus correlation code phase.
  • the prefe ⁇ ed multi-channel receiver embodiment employs 11 frequency channels and 63 code chips, although the number of channels and chips may be varied in accordance with the discussion of trade-offs as presented herein.
  • Figure 54 is a histogram of power versus occurrences that illustrates a reduction in false alarm rate achieved by averaging 6 samples in the multi-channel receiver embodiment.
  • Curves 5410 and 5420 show the power distribution of a 20 kHz noise bandwidth with and without averaging respectively.
  • Curves 5430 and 5440 show the power distribution of a -110 dBm signal in 20 kHz noise bandwidth with and without averaging respectively.
  • the mean power for the noise and signal plus noise distributions remain unchanged, yet the deviations are reduced creating a greater distance between the minimum "On” and the maximum “Off". Consequently, extending the distance between the minimum "On” and the maximum “Off” corresponds directly with decreasing the probability of reporting a false trip condition.
  • Frequency domain averaging is identical to the multi-channel case depicted in Figure 45, where the result ofthe fast frequency coarse search is a plane of power versus frequency and code phase. This process, however, uses different mathematical operations to achieve the same result, yet the result may be averaged as in the channelized time domain coarse search to achieve better SNR. Applying the method for reducing false trips for impulsive interference following averaging provides the maximum sensitivity achievable, under the presently described circumstances.
  • AGC Automatic Gain Control
  • AGC is used to adjust a signal level of a received signal to fall within an instantaneous dynamic range of the ADC. At times this is a challenge, because the receiver may be exposed to signals of varying strengths. For example, a receiver placed within a few feet of a transmitter will be exposed to a very strong signal level, but a receiver located far from the transmitter will be exposed to a very weak signal level. AGC allows the received signal, in either case, to be adjusted to within a predetermined range, prior to being applied to the ADC.
  • One factor considered in the AGC mechanism is a level of a received noise floor and thus the AGC mechanism monitors the received noise floor, attempting to keep it within an operable range ofthe ADC
  • the noise floor nses, there is a nsk that the AGC mechanism will not act to lower the signal level applied to the ADC and will result in clipping an intended signal, as a result of madequate "headroom", which has profound adverse affects on signal correlation and reception Accordmgly, if the AGC mechanism detects that the noise level has risen too much, the AGC mechanism will act to attenuate the received signal (and noise) to a lower level, ensuring that the received signal will remain withm the ADC's dynamic range
  • the AGC process is implemented in software and is executed once per code period while the search process is attempting to correlate If an attenuation change is deemed necessary by the AGC process determining that the sample values are above a predetermined threshold, for example, the search process is interrupted while AGC adjusts the receiver gam, over several code periods, which m turn adjusts the co ⁇ esponding signal strength ofthe received signal Decisions made by the AGC process are based on the measured noise floor (where the measurement may be made with a discrete level detector or by digital analysis on the received sample stream) and serves to keep the noise floor within the operable region ofthe ADC
  • the AGC process may be augmented with tune constant mechanisms to offset the effect of impulsive interference, and averaging mechamsms that combme several sample sets so as to avoid invokmg an AGC adjustment if short-term perturbances in the noise floor are observed Similarly, the AGC process may be adapted to operate off of the strongest received signal, so as to avoid dnvmg the ADC outside of the
  • Attenuation ofthe received signal is set with two controls, implemented m hardware, although other software or firmware driven control may be used as well
  • the signal level may be adjusted (preferably attenuated) in the attenuator 3502 by a maximum of 75 dB usmg a step and digital attenuator that operates under the control ofthe AGC signal (as shown in Figure 35)
  • a 4-bit digital attenuator located in the attenuator 3502 is positioned prior to the ADC and provides attenuation in 3 dB steps up to a maximum of 45 dB attenuation
  • a coarse 30 dB step attenuator may optionally be applied in front ofthe first RF amplifier, thus protecting the mixer from very strong signals and related lntermodulation products created by excessively strong signals being applied to the mixer
  • a related problem caused by excessively strong signals is that the signals may result in the digital signal processmg operations performed on the signals to enter an overflow state
  • the digital signal processor used to compute the co ⁇ elation sum on the received signal also implements the decimation process concu ⁇ ently therewith
  • a digital signal processor that computes this correlation sum has the undesirable attribute of failing to retam an indication of intermediate overflow This means that m the decimation process, should an accumulator m the digital signal processor overflow at some intermediate point, there may be no report ofthe overflow condition after the decimation process is complete
  • the digital signal processor may reset the overflow flag on the next mathematical instruction
  • the overflow concern is easily avoidable by using modern digital signal processors having sufficient processing capability, overflow indication mechanisms, and/or large accumulators
  • identifying the source of the problem and solution to the problem requires innovative processes and mechanisms
  • the present multi-channel receiver uses a small accumulator while managing the possibility of overflow by integrating signal scaling mto the AGC process
  • the receiver's processes and mechanisms must be able to detect the presence of strong or weak signals and act accordmgly, making adjustments in the attenuator 3502 ( Figure 32) to keep the signal m the desired received power band Weak signals do not create a problem, because the signal power drops monotonically with signal attenuation, and a low threshold near the minimum co ⁇ elation limit triggers a signal drop event
  • the present multi-channel receiver uses a threshold set near the maximum co ⁇ elation limit ofthe accumulator so as to create a value d ⁇ ven overflow condition
  • the threshold is effective in determinmg a need for AGC (e g , provides a warning signal), yet the value reported is not used because it becomes non-monotomc
  • the AGC process addresses this unreliable reporting of an overflow condition by searching backward, keeping a range of untrustworthy samples (l e , perhaps tainted by an unreported overflow condition) shadowed in previous evaluation ranges where the power can be trusted
  • the range of ambiguity can be eliminated by asserting first maximum attenuation and then subsequently stepping through progressively less attenuation.
  • the AGC process When first initiated, the AGC process starts by asserting maximum attenuation (so as to produce a minimum signal level applied to the ADC) and then progressively lowering the amount of attenuation in roughly 9 dB steps (or other suitable step sizes), through 7 coarse acquisition steps. By first applying maximum attenuation, there is no ambiguity regarding whether the data samples have been caused an overflow condition during the decimation process.
  • the noise level detected in one of these steps is near optimal (i.e., at a prefe ⁇ ed level within the ADC's instantaneous dynamic range)
  • the AGC process causes a fine attenuation step to be executed so as to place the received noise floor within 3 dB of the desired level. Subsequently, the AGC process terminates and the normal correlation (search function) resumes.
  • the AGC process as implemented in the present embodiment accounts for a three-code period delay set by pipeline processing.
  • the AGC process causes an AGC attenuation change
  • the next two code periods are already being processed.
  • the third code period following a setting operation, will hold data that reflects the change. For this reason, the AGC acquisition process is heavily pipelined to minimize waiting for data.
  • Figures 55 through 65 depict the state process implemented in the AGC process and mechanism. The following description details the steps used in the most sensitive exemplary embodiment ofthe multi-channel receiver.
  • the AGC process flow shown in Figure 55 begins in step 5501 and then to step 5502 where a Boolean flag is maintained. An inquiry is made so the AGC process recalls, between program calls, whether the AGC process is cu ⁇ ently acquiring a signal. If the response to the inquiry is affirmative, the process proceeds to step 5506 so as to determine where the AGC process is in the acquisition cycle. If AGC is not acquiring, the process continues by computing a time averaged noise floor in step 5503 using the last 8 code periods for smoothing the instantaneous noise. A counter (code interval timer) is decremented and tested in steps 5504 and 5505 so as to add hysterisis to the AGC process.
  • code interval timer code interval timer
  • step 5507 the instantaneous noise floor is monitored so as to determine if there exists enough headroom in the ADC and decimation process to support a co ⁇ elation operation. If the noise level is too high, and there exists more attenuation as inquired in step 5508 for use, the process proceeds to step 5506 so as to initiate the acquisition process . However, if the instantaneous noise value requires attenuation but there is not any additional attenuation available, the process proceeds to step 5511, where the process aborts. If the instantaneous noise level is not too high, the process continues at 5509 where the time averaged noise floor is evaluated as being too low.
  • step 5506 If the time averaged noise floor is too low, and attenuation can be removed from the cu ⁇ ent setting 5510, an acquisition is necessary, so the process proceeds to step 5506 to properly set the lower attenuation level If the time averaged noise level is too low, but no further attenuation can be removed, the algonthm aborts m step 5511
  • Figure 56 is a flowchart of a decision tree for determining where the AGC algonthm is in the AGC acquisition cycle Step 5601 continues from step 5506 as shown on Figure 35 After step 5601 the process proceeds to step 5602 where an inquiry is made regarding the AGC processing state, which is determmed by checking a state vanable Depending on the value of the state vanable, the process continues to respective of steps 5603 through 5613, as will be explained below with respect to Figures 57-61
  • Figure 57 is a flowchart of four ofthe decision tree branches depicted in the flowchart of Figure 56 Step 5701 is the continuation of step 5603, Step 5704 is the continuation of step 5604 Step 5711 is the continuation of step 5605 Step 5714 is the continuation of step 5606
  • the acquisition process begins m step 5701
  • the maximum attenuation (mimmum sensitivity) is applied m step 5702
  • the state vanable is advanced to step 5703 and the AGC process terminates in step 5710 and waits for a new code period of data
  • the noise value has crept up to the decision threshold and only a small adjustment is needed
  • the last two noise samples are averaged in step 5706 and a small adjustment is made
  • step 5714 On the next code interval, the process flow resumes through step 5714 and then in step 5715, attenuation is lowered to continue the search process Subsequently, the state vanable is advanced in step
  • step 5716 the process waits for a new code mterval of data in step 5717
  • Figures 58, 59 and 60 are flowcharts of six ofthe decision tree branches depicted m Figure 56 Step 5801 is the continuation of step 5607 Step 5810 is the continuation of step 5608 Step 5901 is the contmuation of step 5609 Step 5910 is the continuation of step 5610 Step 6001 is the continuation of step 5611 Step 6010 is the contmuation of step 5612
  • the processes depicted in Figures 58, 59 and 60 demonstrate the evaluation ofthe attenuation levels set 3 code intervals previous (due to pipeline delay)
  • the first evaluation step 5801 the instantaneous noise level is evaluated in step 5802 If the noise level is too high, the optimum pomt has already been passed, and thus a blmd 9 dB is added in step 5806 before the AGC process terminates in step 5807, instructing the calling module that it has completed acquisition
  • the noise level as determined in step 5802 is not too high, the noise level is tested for being too low m step 5803 indicating the attenuation is still to great
  • the next attenuation step is applied m step 5804, the state is advanced in step 5805 and the process is suspended in step 5809, waiting for the next code mterval of data If the test performed in step 5802
  • the evaluation steps 5810, 5901, 5910, 6001, 6010 evaluate the instantaneous noise level 5811, 5902, 5911, 6002, 6011, respectively If the noise level is too high, the optimum pomt has already been passed, and a blmd 9 dB is added in steps 5815, 5906, 5915, 6006, 6015 respectively before the AGC process terminates in steps 5816, 5907, 5916, 6007, 6016 respectively, instructing the calling module that it has completed acquisition If the noise level of steps 5811, 5902, 5911, 6002, 6011 is not too high, the noise level is tested for being too low m steps 5812, 5903, 5912, 6003, 6012 indicating the attenuation is still to great The next attenuation step is applied in steps 5813, 5904, 5913, 6004, 6013, the state is advanced in steps 5814, 5905, 5914, 6005,
  • Figure 61 is a flowchart ofthe last evaluation step and the small step algonthm process flow
  • the last attenuation step is evaluated if the search thus far has not found a solution
  • Step 6101 is the contmuation of step 5613 depicted m
  • Step 6109 is the contmuation of steps 5707, 5808, 5817, 5908, 5917, 6008, 6017 or 6108
  • the attenuation is set to a minimum three bit code intervals previous, so the cu ⁇ ent data represents the maximum sensitivity setting
  • the noise level is tested m step 6102 and if the noise level is too high, the optimum pomt has already been passed, and a blmd 9 dB is added in step 6106
  • the algonthm suspends operation in step 6107, instructing the calling module that the AGC process is finished If the noise value measured in step 6102 is not too high, it is evaluated as being too low step 6103 If too low, there are no further steps to minimize atten
  • the conventional approach has been to avoid drift problems altogether by ensuring the transmitter and receiver reference components not experience frequency drift, primarily by using crystal controlled or direct digital synthesis frequency references
  • Cost efficient transmitters often have frequency references which are sensitive to changes in power supply voltage or electro-mechamcal mterference, even self interference This is especially true for OOK transmitters which often enable and disable amplification stages to modulate data which can effect local frequency references such as voltage controlled oscillators
  • the combination of an OOK transmitters with an inaccurate frequency references causes particular challenges for a low-cost receiver that has available only minimal processmg capacity
  • the present invention employs cost efficient components and combines them so as to be used in systems havmg transmitters that transmit messages with, perhaps, significant frequency drift and offset
  • Conventional practice accommodates the sizable transmitter frequency dnft by quantifying the total frequency error budget, for all ofthe relevant system components, and expanding the channel bandwidths in the receiver to exactly match the worst case frequency dnft The wider receiver bandwidth de-sensitizes the receiver because the mcrease
  • the present multi-channel receiver embodiment uses several channels, each matching the data bandwidth, so as to track frequency drift throughout a message Figure 62 depicts a bank of channel filters where a specific filter matched to the data bandwidth has shape 6200 A signal exactly aligned in channel 6203 transmitting a " 1 " would have a measured mean power denoted as 6201 in Figure 62 Because the channel filters have independent roll- off charactenstics, a signal adjacent to the desired channel will be attenuated according to the shape ofthe filter 6200 As such, there exists a between-channel loss (l e , because the signal falls in between to channels) denoted by point 6202, signifying a worst case system sensitivity for signals which have no frequency drift A signal exactly centered between two channel filters would be measured in either filter with a mean power as denoted at 6202 For this reason, it is most beneficial to overlap the channel filters to limit the between channel loss The system loss budget can then be specified using this worst case estimation The above description remains valid as long as the transmitters do
  • the Curve 6204 depicts the ideal signal 6203 which has been pulled off frequency beyond the between-channel point 6202 to a high attenuation pomt 6205
  • the signal from the initial channel 6200 would progressively drop power, durmg bit interval, because the dnft would cause signal to move away from the center ofthe channel and toward an edge ofthe channel
  • the transmitter dnft was constramed between the frequency excursions shown as curves 6203 and 6204
  • the signal power will fluctuate between pomts 6201 and 6206 (heavy line 6206)
  • the present multi-channel receiver uses several channel filters to track frequency fluctuations during data demodulation The total frequency excursion must be quantified for the transmitters in question and system application The techmque is most feasible for co ⁇ ecting small scale frequency dnft on the order ofthe data bandwidth Wide scale frequency drift could be corrected in the transmitter
  • the steady state condition is defined as the restmg frequency of the transmitter Typically frequency dnft is caused by changes m the transmitter power structures, most typically caused by keymg an OOK transmitter As such, it is common for the frequency to have error coincident with a change m amplitude key state The steady state condition is therefore measured when there is a run of same state values while the transmitter is keyed, perhaps in a preamble or initiation sequence ofthe signal data structure
  • the lines 6301 represent the respective powers measured m a smgle channel filter over a sequence of bit intervals Vanation between the heights ofthe lmes indicates that there is a time vanable power vanation
  • the transmitter exhibits signal loss dunng a 0 to 1 transition state shown as line 6303
  • the power is recovered by the bit interval co ⁇ esponding with the line 6304 This recovery coincides with the transmitter dnft co ⁇ ection over tune
  • the loss in power when the sequence of Is is transmitted effects the bit error rate, and may influence the decision threshold mechanism to call the bit a "0" (l e , a bit e ⁇ or) in cases where there is low SNR, l e , where the noise floor 6302 approaches the Is level (6303)
  • the trip determination step 6400 may be any ofthe processes discussed herein or any other determination of signal activity
  • the pnmary channel determination is determined in step 6401 where the pnmary channel is determined as the channel which most closely aligns with the steady state power of the transmitter, while the transmitter is transmitting a preamble portion ofthe signal
  • the pnmary channel is the channel with the largest measured mean power dunng a run of Is in the preamble ofthe transmitted message
  • the process proceeds to step 6402 when an initial primary OOK decision threshold for determining a 1 or a 0 is set This may be static based on the measured amplitude of a 1, a zero or combination thereof, or it may be dynamic and change to track with the message as received
  • Data demodulation commences following initialization, and at each new bit interval collected step 6404, the received signal power is measured m each ofthe candidate channels in step 6405 where the signal may deviate
  • the power in the primary channel is compared to the primary OOK decision threshold in step 6406 If the power exceeds the threshold,, a Is determination is made in step 6408 and the next bit is processed If the power is below the pnmary OOK decision threshold, the alternate channels are evaluated in step 6407 usmg the alternate decision threshold If any ofthe alternate channels exceed the alternate decision threshold, a Is decision is made in step 6408 and the next bit is processed If none of the alternate channels exceed the alternate decision threshold, a 0's determination is made in step 6409 and the next bit is processed
  • the difference between the pnmary and alternate channel decision threshold effects the bit e ⁇ or rate (BER)
  • the alternate decision threshold must be at least equal to the pnmary decision threshold and preferably larger so as to minimally impact the receiver BER Figure 65 depicts noise versus signal
  • a second threshold is used for the alternate channels which is set such that the combined zeros determination BER contribution for the alternate channels is small relative to the primary zeros BER The overall system BER is not adversely affected and the benefit of using the alternate channels is achieved
  • Exact placement for decision thresholds and separation for primary and alternate decision thresholds is determined based on system requirements for signal detection and data integ ⁇ ty Predictive Code Reposition
  • the present receiver embodiments use the results ofthe initial search process to predict the rate of time base drift
  • This method requires that the transmitter use one time base to control the RF frequency as well as to generate the code chip rate Conversely, the receiver must use one time base to generate the downconversion tones as well as generate its code chip rate
  • This method also requires that the receiver be able to quantify the frequency error so that the spreadmg code phase drift can be predicted
  • one of the eleven channels will be selected as the candidate filter by the coarse search process
  • the receiver uses the channel mdex (e g , channel number) relative to 0 frequency error to predict the tune base drift as follows
  • the predictive reposition method may be sufficient to maintain code coherence over a message duration without the use ofthe standard reposition method
  • the effects of reposition are explamed m Figures 66 A, 66B, and 66C wherein points 6610, 6620, and 6630 represent the signal level after the coarse and fine search algo ⁇ thms have been performed After the duration ofthe message 6611, the signal strength ofthe message will have decreased to points 6615, 6625, and 6635 due to crystal dnft Item 6613 shows the signal strength of an ideal message with no loss of process gain Items 6626 and 6636 show
  • the feature 6627 shows a signal recovery provided by the predictive reposition method
  • An amount of signal recovery 6628 is determmed by the system's ability to discern the frequency error ofthe received RF signal
  • the repetition rate 6634 ofthe predictive reposition method is set by the worst-case system loss requirement and the amount of signal recovery 6628 that can be achieved
  • the two reposition methods can be used together to provide enhanced performance Feature 6638 shows the combination ofthe two methods as providing better results (signal levels) than either method working alone Elimination of Redundant Data in a Multi-Drop Network
  • a network with multiple transmitters 6710 through 6715 and multiple receivers 6720 through 6724 are installed in vanous locations and each of which may be required to assure adequate coverage
  • a common processor 6740 with some type of shared medium 6730, such as a multi-drop bus, such as an RS- 485 bus, a local area network, USB, FireWire, etc
  • Poll-response, Ethernet, and token-ring protocols are just three of many methods that would serve this pu ⁇ ose, and would be used whenever some type of data collection and/or processmg is to be performed at a central location
  • multiple receivers R2, R3, and R4 may, or may not, receive the same transmitted message 6717 from transmitter T4 Each of these receivers would then attempt to forward the message to the application processor 6740
  • Present network systems allow the bus penpherals (the receivers) to forward all messages to the common processor 6740, forcing the processor 6740 to detect and eliminate redundant messages
  • this technique increases bus traffic and forces the processor to perform extra processmg to detect and eliminate redundant data messages
  • the present invention eliminates this extra bus traffic by requi ⁇ ng that the receivers monitor the bus 6730 for redundant data messages Whenever a data message is received, the receiver will store the message m a queue until it is time for that receiver to relay the messages to the common processor 6740 Smce the receiver is attached to a multi-drop network, the receiver is able to momtor all messages transmitted on the bus 6730 Whenever a receiver is not transmitting data to the common processor 6740, that receiver will monitor the bus 6730, reading
  • the waiting receiver will compare each data message on the bus with the messages stored in its local message queue Whenever the waitmg receiver detects that another receiver is transmitting a message to the processor 6740 that is identical to a message in its local queue, that waiting receiver will delete the message from its local queue Each waitmg receiver will attempt to eliminate as many messages from its local queue pnor to relaying the messages to the common processor, thereby reducmg bus traffic and reducing the processmg requirements ofthe common processor
  • Figure 67 shows that transceivers and/or receivers on the same hard-wired interface communicate with all remote transmitters and transceivers withm a defined proxmuty Further, the present network embodunent uses the same CDMA and system property code for all devices associated with a particular hard-wired line This method allows redundancy and the ability of the system to eliminate redundant messages
  • Another embodiment of the present mvention is a very small, battery operated transceiver that inco ⁇ orates combinations of features ofthe single-channel and multi-channel transceiver embodiments
  • transceiver can be installed in places and in quantities that are not possible or practical for larger devices
  • an attribute of being small is that the transceiver may operate for long periods of time off of battery power, and thus may be used in remote locations where commercial power service (e g , electncal wall outlets) are not available (e g , on top of flagpoles, buildings, and mobile platforms, such as cars, ai ⁇ lanes, etc )
  • Such applications might include two-way smoke detection, strobe light and/or sounder control, two-way keypad, two-way thermostate, remote auto-dialer, remote sensor/controller, two-way remote meter reading/power cut-off, and process control/energy management
  • Using a battery operated remote transceiver creates problems with feasibility of use and battery life
  • conserve power is a challenge for battery operated transceivers that may be located in accessible locations where it is difficult to replace the batteries
  • Conventional transmitters conserve power by operatmg in sleep modes where the transmitter alternately sleeps, wakes up, transmits, and then returns to sleep These transmitters are not restncted to transmit on any particular schedule and thus do not care when they transmit, because these transmitters assume that a receiver is continuously available (powered on)
  • the BORT will go mto alternate sleep and active cycles, which m turn creates an additional difficulty when the BORT is used in a network setting
  • the transceivers must be active dunng predetermined windows of time (l e , scheduled events) Otherwise, one device m the network may transmit while the would-be receive devices are m sleep mode, resultmg m lost data messages To maintain this network coherency, a
  • each BORT device turns off its RF front-end (905 in Figure 9) and signal processmg sections (907, 909, 911, 913, 915, 917, and 919, m Figure 9) when not in use Upon a wake-up event and once a full power-up condition is completed, the BORT device
  • the BORT device will re-apply power to the RF front-end 905, use the data to determine code phase coherency, and then re-acquire the data signal
  • This acquisition process uses a fast search process as previously described, but if no signal is detected, the BORT device must reacquire system timmg, which it does by remainmg active and continuing to acquire data samples until a network synchronization pulse is detected
  • the BORT device can query the system transceiver, by transmitting a query message, requesting network timing information
  • Figure 68 depicts a BORT application where several system transceivers 6811-6813 maintain communication with a plurality of BORT devices 6801-6803
  • a system controller 6820 maintains supervision ofthe system transceivers via multi-drop bus 6825, such as an RS-485 bus or the like
  • the transceivers 6811-6813 and BORT devices 6801 -6803 have access to 6 code-division multiple access (CDMA) channels, based on 6 umque PN sequences
  • CDMA code-division multiple access
  • the network uses CDMA channel 1 for ALOHA-type transmissions 6832, 6833, and the system transceivers use CDMA channel 2 to broadcast system synchronization messages 6830
  • a phase ofthe PN sequence will be random throughout the system transceivers, so as to allow all transceivers to broadcast the synchronization message simultaneously This method allows fast signal acquisition without undue destructive self-interference due to the fact that the correlation function is only one chip wide
  • the BORT device will power up at a tune 6910 ( Figure 69B) from a low-power sleep mode
  • the BORT device will sample one code penod of data at time 6911 and then go off-line at time 6912
  • the BORT device will reacquire the signal at time 6914 and wait until the end of the synchromzation signal 6916
  • the BORT device will measure and store the duration of the received synchronization signal By keeping a running log ofthe signal duration, the BORT can determine if its wake-up timer is moving relative to the system synchromzation timing If so, the BORT device can then make co ⁇ ections to its wake-up tuner so as to better maintain system coherency
  • the system transceivers 6811 -6813 have multiple options after the completion ofthe sync message at time 6916 If no commands need to be transmitted to the BORT devices 6801 -6803, the transcei
  • the transceiver pauses for 700 ms pnor to transmitting command message 6904
  • the system transceivers 6811-6813 can maintain code phase coherence when changing from CDMA channel 2 to CDMA channel 3 In this manner, the BORT devices 6801 -6803 may achieve instant spreading code synchromzation with CDMA channel 3 codes smce there will be no code phase ambiguity
  • protocol messages may also be used to mamtam system coherency If one ofthe the BORT devices 6801-6803 wakes up and does not detect a system sync message on CDMA channel 2, then that BORT device may send a 'not acknowledge' (NAK) message to the system transceivers 6811-6813 on CDMA channel 1 Upon receipt ofthe NAK message, the closest ofthe system transceivers 6811-6813 will transmit a timing co ⁇ ection message to the BORT device on CDMA channel 1 The BORT device will adjust its sleep timer accordmgly, and may or may not reply to the transceiver with an ACK message on CDMA channel 1 The BORT device will then go mto sleep mode and wake up during the next available system sync message
  • the system controller 6820 can send commands to the system transceiver of the system transceivers 6811-6813 nearest the desired BORT device of the BORT devices 6801-6803 at any time
  • This command will be queued and sent behind the next sync pulse, the system controller 6820 creates the timing and gives the command to initiate the sync pulse
  • the BORT system includes two types of devices, namely the BORT devices 6801- 6803 and the system transceivers 6811-6813, each of which may include the single channel or the multichannel transceivers ofthe first and second embodiments, respectively
  • a flowchart explaining the control process implemented m respective processors m the BORT devices 6801 -6803 begms in Figure 70A
  • the process begms m step 7001, where one ofthe BORT devices 6801-6803 is in a low-power sleep state, and then the process contmues to step 7002, where the BORT device powers up mto an active state based upon a wake-up signal provided by a wake-up timer that is preferably contained m the BORT device
  • the BORT device executes a coarse search process on CDMA channel 2, where the steps for this coarse search routine begin m step 7070, continuing in step 7071 where the device powers up the RF section on the CDMA channel provided by the calling routine
  • the BORT device will
  • step 7004 the BORT device makes a tnp event decision in step 7004 If m step 7004 it was decided that a t ⁇ p event occurred, the process proceeds to step 7005 where the BORT device powers up its RF front-end for reception on CDMA channel 2 and demodulates the data message m step 7006 In step 7007, the BORT device determines whether or not the BORT device acquired a synchromzation message If a synchromzation message was present, the BORT device performs an additional coarse search on CDMA 3 (m steps 7008 and 7009) and then searches for an additional data message m step 7020, which is continued m Figure 70B If the respective condition of either step 7004 or step 7007 is not met, the BORT device has become active and has not detected a valid synchronization message, and so control is then passed to step 7010
  • step 7010 If the BORT device is receive only, the BORT device remains active, repeating steps 7003 through 7006 until a subsequent synchronization message is detected, satisfying the condition of step 7007 From step 7010, if the device has transmit capability, then the device has the option to power up its RF section m step 7011 m preparation for transmitting a handshaking message The process then proceeds to step 7012 where the BORT device initiates a handshaking protocol with a system transceiver on CDMA channel 1 to acquire system timing information and then proceeds to step 7060, which is the beginning of a shutdown routme
  • step 7062 the BORT device sets the low-power sleep timer correctly so that the BORT device will awaken during the next network synchronization penod Other tasks are performed as necessary to minimize sleep cu ⁇ ent loading and to assist the BORT device in its subsequent wake-up interval Finally, the shutdown process proceeds to step 7063 where the BORT device enters a low-power sleep state
  • Step 7020 initiates a data message search process which occurs after the BORT device has performed a coarse search, as was discussed in reference to step 7007 in Figure 70A
  • the BORT device starts a message tuner m step 7022 and receives and demodulates the message m step 7023
  • m step 7024 the BORT device ve ⁇ fies that the mcommg message was mtended for that device If that BORT device was the mtended recipient ofthe message, the process contmues to step 7025 where the BORT device verifies that the incommg message was valid If the message was valid, then the process continues to step 7026 where the BORT device transmits an acknowledgment on CDMA channel 1 and then in step 7027 responds to any commands that were embedded within the message
  • the process proceeds to step 7028, where BORT device determines if there are any outgoing messages to be transmitted to the system transceivers 6811-6813 From step 7021 , if the BORT device
  • step 7060 which initiates the shutdown procedure If there are one or more messages to be transmitted to the system transceivers 6811-6813, the BORT device will initiate preparations for transmission m step 7029 From step 7026, if the received message had an error, the process proceeds to step 7032 where the device determines if the message timer has expired If the tuner has expired, then the BORT device will quit (e g , time out) and pass control to step 7028 If the timer has not expired, the BORT will send a "not acknowledge" command on CDMA 1 (step 7033) The process then proceeds to step 7034 where the device performs a coarse search on CDMA channel 1 In step 7035, if no tnp condition is met, then the device performs the steps of 7033 and 7034 until either a trip condition is met or the timer expires If a trip condition is met m 7035, the process proceeds to step 7036 where the BORT device will apply power to its RF front-end
  • step 7038 the BORT device ve ⁇ fies that the mcommg message was mtended for that device If the BORT device was the mtended recipient ofthe message, the process continues to step 7039 where the BORT device verifies that the commg message was valid If the message was valid, the process contmues to step 7026 where the BORT device transmits an acknowledgment on CDMA channel 1 If the conditions of either steps 7038 or 7039 are not met, then process control is returned to step 7032
  • step 7030 the device will power down its RF front-end and then seed a random timer as shown m step 7030
  • the process continues in step 7040, as will be discussed m reference to Figure 70C
  • step 7042 the BORT device powers up its RF front-end with channel CDMA 1 settings as its default settings
  • the BORT device is configured so that an external event (step 7080) can cause the device to awaken from sleep mode (step 7041 ) and power up its RF section in CDMA channel 1 (step 7042)
  • step 7043 the BORT device will start its message timer in 7043, and then transmit the outgomg messages in step 7044 At this point, the BORT device is expecting an acknowledgment from the system transceiver
  • step 7045 the device performs a coarse search on CDMA channel 1
  • step 7046 a trip decision is made If a trip occurred, the BORT device will receive and demodulate the message m 7047
  • step 7118 If an acknowledgment is received m step 7118, the transceiver clears its message queue for that particular BORT device step 7120 and then the proceeds to step 7110, (as will be discussed in reference to Figure 7 IB) From step 7118, if the transceiver does not receive an acknowledgment from the BORT device, it will then check to see if the message timer has expired If the timer has not expired, control is returned to step 7116. where the message is retransmitted to the BORT device If the timer has expired, control is passed to step 7110 ( Figure 7 IB)
  • step 7130 the system transceiver monitors CDMA channel 1 for mcommg messages from the BORT devices 6801 -6803
  • the transceiver remains in this loop until in step 7132 it is determined that either a message is received in step 7134 or (as was discussed m reference to Figure 71 A) the transceiver receives a message from the system controller to transmit a synchromzation pulse (step 7104)
  • step 7134 the transceiver starts its message tuner and then in step 7136 transceiver receives and demodulates the message
  • Decision step 7138 determines whether or not the message was valid If the message was invalid, the process proceeds to step 7140 where the transceiver transmits a "not acknowledgment" message If the message tuner has expired (step 142), then process control returns to step 7130 to momtor for additional messages Otherwise, process control returns to step 7130
  • step 7136 to attempt to re-acquire the message From step 7138, if the message was valid, the transceiver will transmit an acknowledgment message (step 7144) and respond to the message if necessary (step 7146) If there is any queued message for this particular BORT device, process control returns to step 7150 (as is seen in Figure 71 A), otherwise, control is returned to step 7130
  • Figures 72, 73 , 74, 75, 76 and 77 show an alternative time division multiple access-based (TDMA) system/network architecture for the BORT devices The following discussion explains the low level operation ofthe BORT system devices, as were previously discussed
  • Figure 72 shows a steady state communication timing diagram between a system transceiver and a BORT device for three types of messages
  • the term steady state means that these are messages used for normal exchange of information in three modes of operation Initialization and exception handling will be discussed following the steady state discussion
  • the system architecture is configured to minimize power dram at the BORT device A significant amount of battery power is expended m the BORT device whenever it receives RF energy or transmit messages, a modest amount of battery power is expended whenever the BORT device is active, but has selected circuitry in a reduced power state, examples including initialization, Fast Serial Search as discussed earlier, and sleep mode preparation, and a minimum amount of battery power is expended while the BORT device is m sleep mode because the only active circuit is a low power oscillator and counter
  • the overall system architecture is configured to maintain positive control of the BORT devices with recovery mechamsms for re-establishing a communication link in the event of a lost message due to tuning error or interference
  • the system transceivers behave predictably over time, and as discussed before, the BORT devices wake up on a schedule so as to retneve a system sync message
  • the system controller manages the synchronization process, which is a different approach than pre-arranged options such as staggered, coincident or mterleaved system transceiver sync intervals
  • the system sync interval is fixed at 5 seconds with all transceivers interleaved and timmg controlled by the system controller
  • Other options are also available, the preferences for each option depending on unplementation trade-offs including consideration of on-air time, probability of receipt based on mterleaved system controllers and asynchronous neighbor interference
  • Figures 72A-C respectively show three messages which are all used to maintain sync with the system transceiver
  • the sync message is the most common system message (Figure 72A), where this message occurs once every sync interval, 5 seconds for the pu ⁇ oses of this discussion
  • the sync message is the most common system message
  • the BORT device continues to demodulate the remaining data 7218, detecting the message type and transceiver ID.
  • the message type data field instructs the BORT device that the message is for sync only and no further action is required.
  • the transceiver ID data field instructs the BORT device that it is accurately tracking the same system transceiver and has not drifted off with another transceiver. A positive lock for system integrity is therefore established by the BORT device without a need to energize a transmit circuit for the most common of system exchanges.
  • Figure 72B shows a second steady state communication exchange denoted as a Point to Point message between a system transceiver and a BORT device.
  • This message may occur once every sync interval in place of a sync message. In normal operation this message is infrequent relative to the sync message by an order of magnitude.
  • the system transceiver appends additional data to a sync message intended for a specific BORT device. It is assumed that the system controller maintains an allocation database for which BORT devices are slaved to which system transceivers. The allocation mechanism will be discussed later in the discussion of system initialization.
  • Figure 72B shows the system transceiver transmit process followed by the receive process.
  • the bottom line shows the BORT receive process followed by the acknowledge (transmit) process.
  • the system transceiver sends the Point to Point message leader 7222, followed by the sync 7226, message type 7228 and transceiver ID 7230 data patterns.
  • additional data is appended to include a BORT ID 7231 and optional data 7232 followed by the CRC 7234.
  • the BORT device follows the normal wake-up process and samples a code repetition interval 7242, performs search processes and demodulates the message 7244.
  • the BORT decodes the message as a Point to Point message, notes the transceiver ID and his BORT ID and responds with an acknowledge (ACK).
  • ACK acknowledge
  • the ACK follows similar structure including a leader 7246, followed by data fields of sync 7248, message type (ACK) 7250, BORT ID 7252, optional data 7254 and a CRC 7256.
  • the system transceiver is always in listen mode when not transmitting, and so the transceiver detects the BORT acknowledge 7236 and demodulates the ACK 7238 completing the point to point exchange.
  • the system controller either polls the ACK from the system transceiver or the transceiver initiates the interchange completing a positive handshake to the system controller.
  • Figure 72C shows a third steady state communication exchange denoted as an "All Call" message between a system transceiver and a BORT device. This message may occur once every sync interval in place of a sync message.
  • the message may optionally include end-user data 7268 followed by the CRC 7270 Every BORT device slaved to the system transceiver issuing the All Call follows its normal wake-up process and samples a code repetition mterval 7278, performs search processes and demodulates the message 7280 When the BORT decodes the message as an All Call message, the BORT notes the transceiver ID and responds with an acknowledge
  • ACK A high potential for collision exists as all BORT devices are trying to ACK the message simultaneously So as to reduce contention probability, a delay is initiated by the BORT pnor to sending the ACK to stagger the respective replies to the system transceiver
  • the BORT calculates the delay 7282 based on the sync interval divided by the BORT ID (or a number of bits in the BORT ID) which staggers the BORT devices to assist in collision avoidance
  • the ACK data structure mcludes a leader 7284, followed by data fields of sync 7286, message type (ACK) 7288, BORT ID 7290, optional data 7292 and a CRC 7294
  • the system transceiver is always m listen mode when not transmitting 7272
  • the transceiver detects the BORT acknowledge 7273 and demodulates the ACK 7274 completing the communication exchange
  • the system controller either polls the ACK from the system transceiver or the transceiver initiates the interchange completing a positive handshake to the system controller
  • FIG. 73 A and 73B show a flow diagram ofthe steady state processing co ⁇ esponding with Figure 72
  • the steady state process begins m step 7300 where once per sync interval the BORT wakes up, performs a search in step 7302 and makes a decision as to whether a trip condition exists in step 7304
  • the coarse search step 7302 is implemented as a subroutme call which is shown starting in step 7380 where the receiver RF front-end components are energized in step 7382, one code repetition interval is sampled and stored m step 7384 and the RF front-end is de-energized prior to a fast serial search step 7388 where the co ⁇ elation function is performed pnor to returning, m step 7390, to step 7302
  • This coarse search subroutine is also called, as shown in Figures 75 and 77 Because the present portion ofthe process is a sync processmg thread, the BORT device expects to find a tnp condition, but if no tnp
  • the receive thread is initiated m step 7306 and the BORT device performs fine search, waits for the sync byte in order to establish a tune-tag for use later in setting the sleep interval (in step 7308)
  • the message is demodulated and data fields extracted
  • a check is made to determine if the message originated from the correct transceiver m step 7310 If the transceiver ID is not as expected, then synchronization with the desired transceiver is lost and a re-sync operation is performed m step 7318 If the transceiver ID is correct, then the BORT device has mamtained sync and the message type is evaluated m steps 7312, 7314 and 7316
  • the exception handler defaults to the re-sync function of step 7318 If the message type does not match one ofthe three allowed steady state messages, the exception handler defaults to the re-sync function of step 7318 If the received message type is a standard sync message, the algorithm continues through steps 7324 and 7330 to 7332 where the time of sync byte relative to the wake up time is used in a digital lock loop in step 7334 to calculate the sleep tune which will wake up the BORT device in the leader ofthe next sync message The sleep timer is set in step 7336 and the BORT device enters a power down mode in step 7338 awaiting sleep timer wake up in the next sync interval
  • step 7314 If the received message was a Point to Pomt message in step 7314, the algonthm continues through steps 7326 and 7340 to 7342 where the BORT ID is evaluated in step 7342 If the received BORT ID matches the ID of the BORT device, the data bits are used to instruct the BORT on which function to perform in step 7344 An optional short delay is performed in step 7346 prior to a BORT ACK message in step 7348 The delay may be necessary to ensure the system transceiver is ready to receive the message, l e settling time for reversal of transmit to receive Once the ACK has been sent, the BORT is ready to enter sleep mode and exits through the sync message process 7330 as discussed before If the received message was an All Call message in step 7316, the algonthm continues through steps 7328 and 7350 to 7352 where the BORT performs the All Call function based on the message data in step 7352 The delay is calculated in step 7354 to stagger the BORT devices acknowledge messages and the ACK
  • Figures 74A and B depict the system initialization sequence, where Figure 74A shows a timeline of two system transceivers, both being received by a BORT device on the lines shown m Figure 74B Transceiver A and Transceiver B of Figure 74A are shown staggered to demonstrate this process and the blocks on each line depict a complete transmitted or received message, solid blocks representing message steps in the acquisition flow.
  • Each system transceiver continues to transmit sync messages 7402 and 7406 at a predefined system interval.
  • the BORT device on power-up or initialization remains active continually searching at 7408 looking for atrip.
  • the message is demodulated at times 7410, 7412 for a period so as to establish a good estimate of signal to noise ratio per system transceiver.
  • a running average of SNR is maintained for several transceivers. This process is continued until at least four sync messages are collected from at least one system transceiver.
  • the BORT device nominates its selection to the system controller at time 7414 which contains as data the transceiver ID and SNR for the best of up to three system transceivers evaluated. All system transceivers hearing the nomination receive it at 7413 , and 7415 and relay it to the system controller along with the SNR of receipt by the system transceivers.
  • the system controller now has the SNR measurements relative to the BORT device and all system transceivers able to hear the BORT device where a determination is made as to allocation.
  • the system controller allocates which system transceiver is associated with the BORT device and the chosen system controller relays this information to the BORT device at 7416.
  • the BORT device continues to receive all messages following its nomination at time 7414 awaiting the allocation assignment which comes in the form of a Point to Point message at time 7416 from the system controller assigned.
  • the BORT device receives the allocation Point to Point message at 7418 and acknowledges at time 7420 to complete the Point to Point exchange.
  • the BORT device now has its transceiver ID and timing to enter sleep mode and enter steady state operation.
  • the BORT device If the allocation message at 7416 does not arrive within a predetermined time-out interval 7422, the BORT device assumes its nomination was not heard and re-issues it. Alternatively, the BORT may sleep for an extended period of time and attempt a new initialization, which may be a reasonable strategy for non-critical systems to compensate for extended power outages or system failures while preserving valuable BORT battery life.
  • Figure 75 is a flowchart ofthe above-described procedure, where upon wake-up or initialization determination in step 7500 an array of sync counters is initialized in step 7502 to keep track of how many sync messages have been received from a few system transceivers.
  • the BORT device continues to search in step 7504 until a trip is found in step 7506 where the RF front-end section is re-energized in step 7508 and the message is captured and demodulated in step 7510.
  • the RF front-end section is placed in a reduced power state in step 7516 and the message is evaluated to see if it is a sync type (repetitive) message in step 7518.
  • step 7504 a running average is made for the SNR of each transceiver being evaluated and a counter is incremented in step 7524 counting the number of sync messages received from a specific transceiver. If none ofthe counts exceed a predetermined number as determined in step 7526 the BORT resumes search in step 7504.
  • step 7526 If any ofthe counts exceed a predetermined number as determined in step 7526 the three best transceivers are selected based on SNR in step 7528 and a BORT nomination message is sent containing the transceiver ID and SNR for the best three candidates as observed by the BORT 7530.
  • a response time-out is started in step 7532 and the BORT searches continually in step 7534 until a trip is received in step 7536, the trip may or may not be the response expected.
  • the RF front-end section is energized in step 7542 and the message is demodulated in step 7544 and considered in step 7546. If the message is not the expected response, the BORT device resumes search in step 7534. If the message is the response to the nomination, the allocated system transceiver ID is decoded from the data in step 7548 and stored for future reference in non-volatile memory.
  • a Point to Point ACK is formed in step 7550 and sent and the BORT device enters sleep mode in steps 7552 and 7554. If while the BORT is waiting for a response at 7536 and not found, a time-out is incremented in step 7538 and evaluated at step 7540. If the time-out expires before the response is received the process starts over step 7502 (or alternatively the
  • BORT device may enter an extended sleep interval to preserve battery conditions before resuming at step 7502).
  • a BORT device detects loss of sync, it enters a re-sync mode depicted in Figures 76A-C and 77.
  • Figure 76A depicts a first tier of re-sync where the BORT device initiates a negative acknowledge (NAK) exchange. If re-sync fails according to that method, the procedure according to Figure 76B is used as a second tier where the BORT device waits for the next sync message and resets. If re-sync fails according to that method, the procedure according to Figure 76C is used as a third and final tier where the BORT device eventually enters the initialization mode, discussed earlier.
  • NAK negative acknowledge
  • FIG 76 A the top line illustrates exemplary system transceiver activity at particular times such as sending sync messages 7602 and 7604, as shown.
  • the BORT device processes the sync message at time
  • the BORT device initiates a NAK message 7612 and begins to immediately listen at 7616 for a NAK Reply 7614. When the system transceiver hears the NAK it repeats the previous message sent at the sync interval as a NAK Reply 7614 which includes a time value to the next scheduled sync message.
  • the BORT device seeds the sleep mode timer and resumes normal processing at 7620.
  • the BORT device If the system controller fails to respond with the NAK Reply of 7614 or the BORT device cannot hear the NAK Reply, the BORT device continues to listen 7622 until the next sync message is heard at 7624 and normal processing resumes. If the BORT device fails to reacquire by either the NAK or waiting for sync, the BORT assumes the transceiver has failed, and enters an initialization mode 7630 following a predetermined time-out at 7628.
  • Figure 77 is a flow diagram ofthe re-sync process starting at step 7700.
  • a deterination is made that a re-sync is necessary (steps 7318 or 7320), thus initiating the re-sync process in step 7700, after which in step 7704, a wait time is calculated for generating a NAK message based on the BORT ID (or some number of bits of the BORT ID).
  • the wait time is necessary to compensate for the situation where a jammer jams reception ofthe sync message to several BORT devices at the same time. By staggering their reply, the reliability, at the system level, of re-acquiring sync improves.
  • the NAK is transmitted by the BORT device in step 7706 and a time-out interval is started in step 7708.
  • the BORT device continually searches in step 7710 and upon finding a trip event in step 7712 energizes the RF front-end at step 7718 and demodulates the message in step 7720.
  • the sleep timer is seeded with a value to wake up the BORT device in the next sync interval in step 7726 based on the time value passed in the NAK Reply.
  • the BORT system then enters a sleep mode in step 7728 and resumes normal operation. If the response received was not a NAK Reply, the response is evaluated to determine if the response is a standard steady state sync type message in step 7724. If so, the timer is set for a standard sync interval in step 7726 and the BORT device sleeps in step 7728.
  • the NAK time-out is incremented at step 7713 and evaluated at step 7714. While waiting for a NAK Reply in step 7712, the NAK time-out is incremented in step 7713 and evaluated in step
  • the BORT device enters the initialization mode 7716, 7500.
  • the mechanisms and processes set forth in the present description may also be implemented using a conventional general pu ⁇ ose microprocessor or digital signal processor (such as a TMS320C40, although, as discussed many of the inventive mechanisms and processes disclosed herein may be implemented in lower cost, lower performance processors) programmed according to the teachings in the present specification, as will be appreciated to those skilled in the relevant art(s).
  • Appropriate software coding can readily be prepared by skilled programmers based on the teachings ofthe present disclosure, as will also be apparent to those skilled in the relevant art(s).
  • the present invention thus also includes a computer-based product which may be hosted on a storage medium and include instructions which can be used to program a computer to perform a process in accordance with the present invention.
  • This storage medium can include, but is not limited to, any type of disk including floppy disks, optical disks, CD-ROMs, magneto-optical disks, ROMs, RAMs, EPROMs, EEPROMs, flash memory, magnetic or optical cards, or any type of media suitable for storing electronic instructions.
  • an exemplary single channel embodiment of a transceiver has been described as a first embodiment ofthe present invention (see e.g., Figures 9, 10, 11), and a multi-channel embodiment has also been described as a second embodiment (see, e.g., Figures 9, and 35-36), where features ofthe respective embodiments may be exchanged with one another, albeit for potential penalties of cost, performance and complexity, as has been discussed. Accordingly, the present invention is directed not only to the claims as individually described, but also directed to combinations of the claims and alternative mechanisms as discussed herein.
  • the multi-channel transceiver and single channel transceiver may both use a one- bit limited ADC or a multi-bit linear ADC.
  • the simplicity ofthe one-bit limited ADC does not require the
  • AGC function as discussed in reference to the multi-channel embodiment, and Figure 35 for example, but the single channel embodiment could also use the multi-bit linear ADC, with AGC as discussed herein, although requiring additional processing power.
  • both the digital offset approach discussed with respect to Figure 14, as well as the frequency offsetting of the first local oscillator, and cycling through various offsets may be employed in either the single channel or the multi-channel embodiment. Simultaneously computing all the offsets was an option discussed herein, such an option may be more suitable for use in a multi-channel embodiment or a hybrid embodiment between the multi-channel embodiment and single channel embodiment due to processing complexity and cost concerns. As with the other alternatives, penalties paid are in terms of cost and complexity. Similarly, the averaging approach discussed with regard to improving trip sensitivity and limiting decimation loss may also be employed in both the single channel and multi-channel embodiments, albeit for an increase in processing complexity.
  • the set-on channel filter approach was discussed with respect to the multi-channel embodiment, see e.g., Figure 39, although it may also be applicable in the single channel embodiment, albeit at a more expensive computation cost to improve sensitivity and process gain during demodulation.
  • the various fine search center of mass methods may be implemented in either the single channel or the multichannel embodiment.
  • Both the single channel and the multi-channel embodiments are directed to direct sequence spread spectrum transceivers, that may be used in a system or network and both using a PN code as previously been discussed.
  • the particular features of the PN code length discussed with respect to Table 3, for example, is applicable to both the single channel and multi-channel embodiments.
  • the selection ofthe PN code length is an enabling feature regarding partial decimation as well as FFT radix based on small prime numbers, implemented in both embodiments.
  • Figures 30A-F have been presented in the context of the first embodiment, however, these approaches may be employed in either single channel or multi-channel embodiment, albeit for increased computational complexity as discussed herein.
  • Figure 34 described a circuit for precharging a voltage controlled oscillator for fast settling acquisition, however, this circuit may also be used in the multi-channel embodiment as well, and any hybrid between the single channel embodiment and the multi-channel embodiment.
  • Figures 40-45 discussed various frequency domain code correlators, which were presented in the context ofthe multi-channel embodiment.
  • these approaches may also be implemented in the single channel embodiment so as to provide an FFT based down conversation despread and decimation operation subsequent decimation in die frequency domain may be used to expand or set the predetection bandwidth as necessary for system requirements.
  • the fast serial search approach discussed with respect to Figures 15A-B and 16, for example, are equally applicable in the multi-channel receiver implementation.
  • various power management features ofthe inventive transceiver, as discussed with respect to Figure 9, the battery pack of Figure 10, and that as discussed with respect to the BORT, are equally applicable in a single channel or multi-channel transceivers.
  • Figure 25 may be applicable to either the single channel or multi-channel transceivers that use the one-bit limited ADC.
  • the respective diversity approaches (antenna and frequency, for example, discussed with respect to Figures 9, 24-27, and Figures 68 (CDMA)), are applicable to both the single channel and multi-channel embodiment, and therefore are also applicable to hybrid embodiments.
  • the discussion regarding the BORT system and network (see e.g., Figures 67-77) are equally applicable to the single channel embodiment and the multi-channel embodiment, as either the single channel transceiver, multi-channel transceiver or a hybrid, may be employed in the BORT system network.

Abstract

A system employs a digital receiver (Fig. 9) (or transceiver) to receive, digitize and process a direct sequence spread spectrum signal using digital signal processing components. A radio front end portion (905) of the receiver receives and digitizes the signal (907), and a digital signal processing portion downconverts (909) and despreads (911) the signal by applying a pseudorandom noise (PN) code, used at a transmitter to spread a data signal contained in the direct sequence spread spectrum signal, to the received signal. A timing and state control mechanism (921) is included to provide time reference correction information to the signal processing components of the receiver for alignment of the PN code with the direct sequence spread spectrum signal, allowing the receiver to be compatible with transmitter using inaccurate frequency references which impart a significant frequency ambiguity in the received signal. Computer-based synchronization methods and mechanism suitable for use for low performance digital signal processors, and power management mechanisms (925) are employed to enable long-term operations using battery power, enabling utilization in network setting.

Description

TITLE OF THE INVENTION
DIRECT SEQUENCE SPREAD SPECTRUM METHOD, COMPUTER-BASED PRODUCT, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM TOLERANT TO FREQUENCY REFERENCE OFFSET
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Field of the Invention
The present invention is directed to communications-related systems, networks apparatuses and methods as well as computer-based digital signal processing mechanisms and methods used therein. More particularly, the invention is directed to the field of direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) communication that employ a DSSS transmitter and a DSSS receiver, or transceiver configured to convey a data signal in a transmitted DSSS signal by spreading the data signal on transmission and correlating on reception so as to "despread" the DSSS signal and recover the data signal. Discussion of the Background
Conventional narrowband (i.e., non-spread spectrum) radio communication devices transmit signals in frequency bandwidths that are roughly equivalent to a data signal bandwidth (or information bandwidth) .
These devices typically use a radio-frequency (RF) carrier derived from a frequency reference (i.e., a device that produce a precise frequency, although the accuracy of the frequency usually depends on the cost of the device) and modulate the data on the RF carrier. Common conventional data modulation methods such as frequency modulation (FM), phase modulation or amplitude modulation (AM) cause the RF carrier to occupy slightly larger bandwidth then the RF carrier alone, but the total bandwidth for the RF carrier and data is not much larger. As such, interference signals (e.g. jammers) that are transmitted in the same bandwidth as the RF carrier and data can effectively "jam" the signal and prevent a receiver from reproducing the data signal. Aside from jamming, disturbances in the communications path between the transmitter and receiver can interfere with reception. For example, fading due to multipath or atmospheric obstruction can attenuate the signal significantly. Also, shadowing becomes significant if the signal must pass through solid matter such as buildings, walls, floors or trees and vegetation.
Spread spectrum radio communication addresses the shortcomings of narrowband communications by mixing (i.e. applying) a wideband spreading signal to the data signal so as the "spread" the data signal. In these types of systems, the transmitter also modulates a RF carrier with data, as with the narrowband systems, but then adds one more modulation step by modulating the signal with a wideband, noise-like signal (e.g. a PN code). Consequently, the data signal is spread in frequency over a much larger bandwidth, typically several million Hertz (MHZ) . Common spread spectrum techniques include frequency hopping and DSSS. Frequency hopping systems move (i.e., "hop") the data modulated carrier to frequencies following a pseudo-random pattern defined by the PN code. DSSS mix a PN code with the data modulated carrier to create a DSSS signal which simultaneously occupies roughly the bandwidth of the pseudo noise signal.
Narrowband interference signals transmitted at same frequency as a portion ofthe spread signal, "jam" the spread signal by an amount proportional to the ratio of jammer bandwidth to pseudo-noise bandwidth. At a minimum, the interference signal will at least be attenuated by a "processing gain" ofthe spread spectrum signal, where processing gain is defined as a ratio of data signal bandwidth to spread signal bandwidth. For similar reasons, spread spectrum signals also offer some degree of immunity to channel fading and multipath loss.
DSSS systems have been used in the past to achieve low probability of intercept (LPI) for secure communication and thus are valuable in military applications or other scenarios requiring covert communications. DSSS is also used in places where multipath or fading is prevalent, such as satellite communication. For example, Global Positioning System (GPS) operates using DSSS techniques. However, as recognized by the present inventors, conventional DSSS systems are expensive (considering the transmitter and receiver) because relatively high performance frequency references and digital signal processing equipment is used. Accordingly, DSSS techniques are most commonly used in military and high-end consumer market, where component cost is less of a factor than with low-end consumer product. Conventional direct sequence spread spectrum transceivers are directed towards high-end systems (e.g. systems costing in the hundreds or thousands of dollars in 1997) that require advanced, if not state-of- the-art, digital signal processing equipment, and associated components. Past DSSS systems have avoided using lower cost components because conventional wisdom dictates that selectively high fidelity frequency references are required at the transmitter and receiver, as well as powerful digital signal processing equipment so to compensate for even minor frequency deviations between transmitter and receiver systems. Contrary to conventional DSSS design practice, the present inventors have identified that these conventional DSSS devices are not applicable for low-end, inexpensive, commercial use applicable for high-volume sale, nor are they well suited for small packages, that may be used in a variety of non-standard field uses, such as, for example, home security and fire systems, data telemetry, access control, remote meter reading as well as other applications.
As recognized by the present inventors, one factor that drives the cost of conventional systems is the use of lengthy PN codes that require substantial digital signal processing to be despread in a receiver. While there are many advantages to using a long code (such as with code division multiple access, CDMA, telephony which permits many users to transmit on a common channel at the same time) the present inventors have recognized that a shorter code, such as a 63 bit PN code, may enable the use of components applicable for lower cost applications. Figure 1 is a block diagram of a conventional receive system that of either a conventional receiver (either narrowband or DSSS receiver) The receive system includes a RF front end section 120, a first local oscillator (109, 112, 111, and 110, as will be discussed) section, an analog -to-digital conversion section 121, baseband mixing section (115, as will be discussed) and a baseband processing section 122, as shown The details of the conventional receiver are descπbed below, following a general overview description The RF section 120 performs the function of converting electromagnetic wave energy (including the transmitted signal) and outputtmg an analog signal The analog signal is maintained within a predetermined signal level range, as controlled by an automatic gain control circuit (AGC) as shown The output from the RF front end is provided to a first local oscillator section having a mixer 109, which translates the analog signal to a lower frequency by using a precise, and generally expensive, voltage controlled oscillator 110 By employing the precise voltage controlled oscillator 110, the position ofthe translated signal (I e , a down converted signal), is controlled to within a narrow predetermined frequency range
The downconverted signal is then passed to the intermediate frequency processing section 121, that adds appropriate gam pπor to a digitahzation process while filtering out-of-band images necessary for the digitization process, as will be discussed herein The output ofthe intermediate frequency section is passed to the analog to digital converter ADC shown as mixer 115 (as will be discussed), which converts the analog signal into a digital representation for subsequent processing in the baseband section 122
In this conventional architecture, the analog AGC's function is to keep the signal level applied to the ADC 115 within an operational range ofthe ADC Once digitized, the signal is passed to the baseband section 122, where digital signal processing operations are performed on the signal and the signal is detected and demodulated, resultmg in outputtmg the data signal originally transmitted from the transmitter (either in a spread or non-spread form)
In the special case of direct sequence spread spectrum receivers, the burden of performing the "inverse spreading" (despreading) operation on the signal usually falls on the digital signal processor 116 section 1 ofthe baseband processing section 122 In some cases, the despreading code is mixed in the RF front end 120, first LO or intermediate frequency (IF) sections ofthe receiver, but such analog architectures require significantly precise components or specialized compensation mechanisms Accordingly, conventional direct sequence spread spectrum receivers, require high performance digital signal processors or complicated analog sections m order to perform the despreading and correlation functions, as well as signal acquisition and demodulation processes As a corollary, a precise frequency reference at the DSSS transmitter is assumed to be present so little to no frequency ambiguity is presented into the signal received by the receiver Conventional digital receiver design wisdom is such that the loss in performance associated with using low cost, low power desirable and possible components does not justify their use in light ofthe fact that slightly more expensive components provide greater precision and processing power and therefore avoid performance problems associated with low-cost, inaccurate components As identified by the present mventors, the high performance digital signal processors, as well as high fidelity voltage controlled oscillators, are not conducive to low cost, low power applications, and that with proper compensation mechanisms, the adverse effects of low cost components can be justified
More particularly, Figure 1 depicts RF downconversion and signal conditioning components used to prepare a received analog signal for sampling Antenna 101 receives the RF signal sent from a transmitter and passes the signal through RF diversity switch 102 and on to a bandpass filter (BPF) 103
Alternatively, a controllable select mechanism 104 may select antenna 105 to receive the RF signal The antennas may be physically separated and/or of different polarizations so as to enable spatial or polarization diversity reception The BPF 103 rejects undesired frequencies prior to signal amplification by an amplifier 106 The RF signal is then filtered by BPF 107 and amplified by another amplifier 108 prior to downconversion in a mixer 109 The frequency of the downconversion tone applied to the mixer
109 is controlled by a voltage controlled oscillator (NCO) 110 The output ofthe VCO 110 is filtered by a BPF 111 and amplified by an amplifier 112
After downconversion, the downconverted signal is positioned at an intermediate frequency (IF) determined by the downconversion tone applied to the mixer 109, and additional gain is provided by an amplifier 113 A BPF 114 serves as an anti-aliasing filter pnor to a second downconversion operation that, as recognized by the present mventors, may be performed with the sampling ADC 115 After the second downconversion operation, the signal is positioned near baseband (l e near 0 Hz)
The digital signal processor (DSP) 116 performs vaπous operations including despreading the signal if it is a spread spectrum signal and then sends the baseband signal to a demodulation block 117 so as to extract the data originally added to the transmitted signal by the transmitter Frequency control of the DSP 116 is provided by an oscillator 118 and using the DSP 116 passes the frequency control to all relevant sections 110, 115 and 117 to compensate for mismatch m received signal frequency, and/or chip phase, though frequency mismatch is usually minimized by using accurate frequency references at the transmitter and receiver While Figure 1 depicts a smgle RF downconversion step, other downconversion steps may be added to properly center the received signal at the desired ADC IF frequency
Countering Channel Disturbances
Conventional receivers, and transceivers (which are receivers that also include a transmitter), employ vaπous types of diversity transmission and reception features so as to overcome disturbances in the communications channel (such as signal loss due to blockage by trees, buildings and other obstructions, for example, in a cellular telephone application) Various types of diversity techniques include frequency diversity, time diversity, spatial diversity and code diversity such as that employed m code division multiple access (CDMA) Diversity reception techniques, conventionally require some information being provided by the baseband digital signal processing section, so as to determine how to optimally employ the diversity features ofthe system For example, in the conventional system of Figure 1, two antennas, 101 and 105, may be controlled by an antenna select line, that connects with the baseband processing section 122, as shown The decision process for which the antenna to select, will draw additional processing resources from the digital signal processor 116, thereby further establishing a need for digital signal processor resources with substantial processing power The present inventors have identified that a need exists for integrating diversity reception techniques for receiving DSSS signals having relatively low signal processing gam m low-end products with minimal signal processing resources Techniques For Digitizing RF and IF Signals
Figures 2 and 3 show respective frequency plots of a signal of interest, before and after, respectively, being passed through a harmonic sampling operation, a technique that may be used to reduce signal processing complexity in digital receivers One special case of harmonic sampling is shown m Figures 4 and 5. where the harmonic sampling is performed using a "real", not complex or quadrature, harmonic sampling approach, as will be discussed Harmonic Sampling Harmonic sampling (also known as undersampling, bandpass sampling or Super-Nyquist sampling) is a technique that may be used to translate a signal at an RF or intermediate frequency (IF) to a resulting frequency near or at baseband
Figures 2 and 3 illustrate an example scenaπo where the sampling rate for the ADC is between 0 Hz (labeled as 204) and the maximum analog input frequency 214 (These specific frequencies are used to simplify the later discussion with respect to these present invention and should not be construed as a specific implementation of a prior art device) The signal of interest 210 exists at an IF frequency 212 of 10 8 MHZ, and the sample rate ofthe converter 206, as recognized by the present inventors and as will be discussed in the context of one ofthe preferred embodiments, is an integer multiple such as 4 times the chipping rate (l e , a rate at which chip ofthe PN sequence are produced) In the conventional oversampled application, with a sample rate (Fs) any signal that exists between 0 Hertz (Hz) 204 and Fs/2 205 (l e , the Nyquist bandwidth) is digitized and represented untranslated following digitization Thus, making it necessary to use an anti-alias lowpass filter to attenuate frequencies above the Nyquist frequency 205 However in harmonic (undersampled) applications such as that depicted in Figure 2, the anti-alias filter is a bandpass filter (208) The purpose ofthe filter remains unchanged, as all frequencies except the signal of interest must be attenuated to a point of insignificance
The sampling device operates as a discrete component whose sample event is set by a clock edge The signal is tracked until the sample edge occurs, and is then immediately held In an ideal sampling device, this track and hold system operates on an infinitesimally small time window (a clock edge) This time domain operation is an impulse function and can be expressed as a series of fundamental frequencies (tones) in the frequency domain separated by the frequency ofthe sampling clock Each of these tones is equal in magnitude and extend to infinity For sampling applications, these tones act as harmonics in an ideal mixer and the input signal is mixed against these harmonics, creating repetitive images in the digitized spectrum
Care must be taken to ensure that the relative frequency ofthe IF with respect to the harmonic tones do not create overlapped images, because the overlapping will degrade the dynamic range of the system The optimal frequency separation for the IF with respect to any given tone is one-fourth the sampling frequency because this translates the signal and all images to the center ofthe Nyquist bandwidth Accordingly, frequency error inherent in the system is therefore afforded the greatest guardband and usable dynamic range is maximized
Figure 3 depicts the resultant digitized spectrum after the signal is sampled at Fs = 4 8 MHZ and demonstrates a zero guardband system where the signal of interest occupies the entire Nyquist bandwidth 316 for a given sample rate The resulting images 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, and 323 are separated every Fs/2 m frequency Ideal IF center frequencies (Fc) will therefore exist at multiples ofthe sample rate ± VΛ ofthe sample rate The following equation may be used to select ideal IF frequencies for a given Fs
IF = Fs(N ± lA), where N is an integer harmonic sampling multiplicand For the example depicted m Figure 2, N = 2 and "+l/4Hιs selected Whenever the "-'//'option is selected, the downconverted image is "high side injected" and will be spectrally flipped (high frequencies at 0, and 0 at Fs/2) The actual IF frequency can exist at anv harmonic of the sample rate Although, practical limitations should be observed because the input frequency range 202 is limited primarily due to the limitations in the track and hold operator to adequately follow the signal without introducing distortion Any slew limiting or overshoot will introduce noise mto the system, which is true for limiting single-bit digitizers as well as multi-bit digitizers The effect of aperture jitter contπbutes to phase noise in the digitized signal, where aperture jitter is defined as a time difference present in a decision threshold for realizable sampling components Assuming the sample clock has zero phase noise (which seldom is true), the sampling component will observe the clock edge with some degree of time error based on the voltage companson window of edge recognition The error is often only a few picoseconds, yet, it is quantifiable and contπbutes negatively as phase noise As recognized by the present inventors, because the signal of interest is placed at higher IF frequencies, and therefore higher harmonic frequencies, the aperture jitter increases proportional to the harmonic multiplicand Real-only Sampling A way to achieve lower computational loading is to process the sampled data as real-only, thus discarding the quadrature processing altogether Figures 4 and 5 depict a signal IF spectrum prior to sampling and after real-only sampling In Figure 4, the analog input range 402 for the ADC is between 0 Hz and the maximum analog input frequency 414 The signal of interest 410 exists at an IF frequency 412 of 10 8 MHZ As previously discussed, the presently described frequencies were identified by the present inventor and presented in the pnor context only for the purposes of explaining real-only sampling
The sample rate 406 is shown to be 4 times the chipping rate, and the anti-alias lowpass filter 408 attenuates undesired frequencies The downsampled, digitized spectrum exists at 0 Hz, 519 (i e , baseband), and present in the Nyquist bandwidth 516 are two copies ofthe same spectrum flipped about 0 Hz All ofthe signal information is available now in the previous bandwidth of interest, but, 3 dB off orthogonal transmitter loss is present resultmg in degraded performance Repetitive images ofthe signal exist throughout the frequency spectrum and are depicted as items 518, and 520 through 522 Techniques for Processing Digital Signals Having High Sample Rates
A challenge with modern digital receivers is identifying how to convert radio frequency energy into digitized samples which occur at extremely high sampling rates (in most applications well over 1 MHZ) and providing enough digital signal processing power to process in real time the samples provided from the analog to digital converter A technique that has been used to lower the sample rate of digital signals is to low pass filter the digital signal samples, followed by decimating in time the respective samples Decimation in time is a process in which a set of adjacent samples are combined into a lesser number of samples so as to produce a lower sample rate This lesser number of samples is then more easily handled by digital signal processors Accordingly, decimation reduces signal processing demands in digital receivers by lowering sample rate For a general discussion of decimation and sample rate reduction techniques, see Frerking, M, "Digital Signal Processing and Communication Systems", Van Nostrand Rernhold, 1994, the contents of which is incorporated herem by reference, in particular pp 65-66, 193-199 Nonetheless, while decimation is an approach for reducing sample rate, conventional wisdom suggests that performance in digital receivers requires high performance digital signal processors that can operate at very fast clock rates In contrast, the present inventors have identified that the combination of decimation, downconversion, and judicial use of harmonic sampling, contnbutes to enabling the use of lower-end digital signal processor that performs adequately even when receiving a signal from a transmitter having an maccurate frequency reference Setting Detection Bandwidth
Receive systems typically contain cascaded filters to band-limit the received signal prior to detection The final filter prior to detection sets the predetection bandwidth ofthe system Typically, this predetection bandwidth is as narrow as possible so as to maximize receiver sensitivity The wider the filter, the more noise energy is present in the signal detection process Typical direct sequence systems set this final predetection bandwidth to be equal to the desired signal of interest, thus maximizing the receive sensitivity
As recognized by the present inventors, the conventional approach is only possible if the transmitter and receiver are perfectly aligned in frequency, either by tightly controlling the transmitter and receiver frequency references or by using a frequency acquisition and control loop to adjust the receiver reference to match the transmitter ' s reference Both approaches are expensive in component cost and/or complexity Poor frequency stability in transmitters and/or receivers may be accommodated by widening the receiver predetection bandwidth to compensate for frequency eπor in the data link, but at increased noise power and lower system performance Figure 6 depicts a probability distnbution function for noise versus signal plus noise in two predetection bandwidths For conventional systems having a bandwidth of 20 kHz, distnbution 605 depicts the probability distribution function of noise In contrast to conventional systems, Applicants have identified a need for receivers with a much wider detection bandwidth (1 15 KHz, versus 20 KHz) so as to capture the transmitted signal with a 115 kHz transmitter uncertainty bandwidth The distribution for a bandwidth of 115 KHz is shown as the element labeled 610
Distnbutions 630 and 625 are for a keyed, or "ON" signal of -110 dBm as detected in a 115 kHz and 20 kHz predetection bandwidth respectively As depicted, the signal to noise ratio (SNR) is greater for predetection bandwidth of 20 kHz (640) than for 115 kHz (645) SNR is measured as the difference in mean power for noise 615 , 620 and signal 635 Consequently, the present inventors have identified that a performance penalty is to be paid in the form of decreased SNR if low-cost, inaccurate frequency references are used for transmitting and receivmg a signal
Figure 6 further demonstrates that the wider predetection bandwidth of 115 KHz incurs a sensitivity loss relative to a narrower predetection bandwidth As the predetection bandwidth is allowed to grow wider, the noise distnbution function approaches the signal distnbution function actually overlapping it and inducing eπors on detection which corresponds to a reduction m sensitivity
Accordingly, the present inventors have identified that when constructing a system, a balance must be struck between the predetection bandwidth and frequency error budget accounting for reasonable performance degradation as well Code Chip Coarse Synchronization
Direct sequence transmission systems require that the receiver and the transmitter have aligned pseudorandom codes in order to properly despread the received signal. The receiver has the burden of aligning the receiver pseudorandom code with a transmitter pseudorandom code in order to properly despread the signal.
Direct sequence receivers must correlate the received signal in order to recover data. The correlation process can be described as either a serial or parallel process. Prior art has typically performed low cost correlation in a serial process wherein multiple bit intervals (or multiple code repetition intervals) of received data are used against successive relative chip phases ofthe receiver PN code to correlate data. High cost, high end systems typically achieve correlation much faster using a technique called parallel correlation. System which use parallel correlation use one or a few code periods of data to correlate against many phases ofthe PN code in parallel to produce a correlation function over one or a few code periods of data.
The present inventors have recognized that with either the slow serial search or the parallel search, the RF front end must remain active in order to continuously receive the signal, and thus, cannot be turned off during the computation ofthe correlation function, so as to conserve battery power.
For conventional systems that use a slow serial search, the burden is put on the transmitter to transmit a long preamble which allows the receiver to sequence through all possible combinations ofthe PN code for acquisition. Prior systems that use slow serial searches therefore require transmitters to transmit long preambles, shortening battery life and increasing power requirements. The present inventors have identified a need for a fast serial search method that would enable transmitters to optionally shorten their preamble period, and conserve battery power.
Conventional systems have been fielded with 92 code period preambles (i.e., preambles that repeat the entire code 92 times) so as to enable slow serial search receivers to acquire the 63 chip phases (63 candidate chip phases requiring a separate code period) with remaining code periods required for fine search and antenna diversity. The present inventors have realized that there is a need for new receivers that are backwards compatible with the existing transmitters that transmit 92 code periods in a preamble but can make better use ofthe long preamble, perhaps to employ additional diversity techniques to improve signal detection and demodulation, as well as reduce receive power. Fine Synchronization (Fine Sync)
For direct sequence receivers, a fine sync process , sometimes called a fine search process, further reduces correlation error following the coarse synchronization process (course sync, or coarse search process) . The coarse sync process terminates when a correlation result surpasses a predetermined threshold (i.e., a trip condition) indicating that the received signal is aligned to within +/- Vi of a code chip interval of the PN code. Ideally, however, the signal and the PN code should be perfectly aligned to provide optimum performance. So as to more closely align the signal with the PN sequence, a fine sync process is initiated after the coarse sync process so as to further reduce the relative chip interval between the received signal and the receiver PN code. Figure 7 illustrates results observed in an ideal receiver when attempting to align the PN code to the received signal through successive 1/4 chip fractional chips steps as part of a fine sync process. The circles in Figure 7 represent respective powers (i.e., coπelation results) received from the fine sync correlation process for relative 1/4 chip fractional offsets of a signal, absent noise, and the PN code. A perfect correlation yields the maximum process gain at zero chip phase error, as shown by the center circle. For a PN code of length 63, which the inventors have recognized is relevant to one PN code for the present invention, the maximum process gain is 18 dB. Also, chip enors that are greater than 1 chip width result in the loss of all system process gain, such that the received signal cannot be detected or demodulated.
Conventional systems typically use either a slow fine serial search process, parallel fine search process or code tracking loops to compute the correlation function for fine sync. Slow fine serial search systems typically require one code period of data per fractional chip step to compute the correlation power, followed by a process for determining the maximum correlation from those data samples. As depicted in Figure 7, computation for each of those coπelation powers will require 9 code periods to compute the correlation peak (i.e., +1, ±3/4, ±1/2, ±1/4, and 0). Alternatively, conventional systems may employ parallel processes where 1 code period of data is applied to 9 different coπelators, arranged in parallel, each with a distinct fractional PN code offset, so as to compute the coπelation peak simultaneously. The present inventors have recognized that the slow serial process requires more time to compute than the fast parallel process, but requires less computational processing power.
Fine search processes are used to initially acquire the spread spectrum signal and at predetermined time intervals through the data message in order to maintain correlation alignment. The term "reposition" or "repo" is a term used in spread spectrum systems, such as in transceiver systems designed by Axonn, to reposition the PN code and received signal while receiving a data message portion ofthe received signal. Drift Offset Between Transmit and Receive Frequency References
Typical direct sequence spread spectrum systems require very stable local frequency references for transmit and receive operations in order to maintain near coherent (i.e., in phase) operation. Ideally. transmitters and receivers will operate using a common frequency reference in order to maintain coπelation throughout the data message. An example of such a direct sequence system is the Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) system, which requires very accurate frequency references, typically Cesium based or other atomic standards. These precise, expensive frequency references provide adequate timing accuracy to virtually eliminate frequency and code phase drift between the received signal, as sent from the transmitter, and the downconversion tones and PN code generated in the receiver Additionally, the receiver must employ complex digital signal processing in order to resolve time difference of aπival between multiple direct sequence signals m order to derive a stable local time reference for use The direct sequence receiver must, therefore, measure and track frequency errors and code phase errors for transmitters in order to maintain reliable data communications
As recognized by the present inventors, conventional direct sequence spread spectrum systems have opted to virtually eliminate by frequency and code phase drift problems by employing reasonably accurate frequency references at the transmitters and receivers However, accurate frequency references are expensive for low-end commercial applications and draw more power than desired for battery powered applications (often because the frequency references will add heaters and other cuπent drawing devices to help stabilize the reference) Related to this observation, the present inventors recognized that, frequency dnft attributable to the transmitters frequency reference, a carrier frequency eπor will coπespond to a related chipping rate error present in the PN code generator because the inaccurate frequency reference taints both the carrier frequency and the chip phase Based on this observation, it is feasible that the receiver may employ methods to measure the frequency eπor and predict the code phase eπor
Provided that search and trip are successful (l e , the signal and PN code are aligned), frequency offset between the transmitter and the receiver may be measured to determine the magnitude and direction of the frequency uncertainty Frequency and /or phase detectors, as will be discussed, may be used to determine the magnitude and direction ofthe frequency uncertainty Once a frequency eπor is determined, a local oscillator (LO) downconversion tone is changed to compensate for the frequency eπor This method is the classic Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) loop The present inventors identified that a problem with this approach is that it requires the LO AFC loop to settle, often taking many code periods to complete For systems that have adequate time to implement a frequency locking loop, this may be an acceptable trade-off Also, as recognized by the present mventors, making the frequency correction in the
RF downconversion portion of the receiver, and not in the baseband processing section of the receiver, preserves the signal processing efficiency, thereby enabling the use of lower cost, lower performance digital signal processing components as compared with state-of-the-art signal processing components
In a receiver, a first LO is usually generated by a phase and/or frequency locked synthesizer A block diagram of an integrated circuit-based LO synthesizer, such as a National Semiconductor
LMX1501A, is given in Figure 8 Conventional phase lock frequency synthesizers are descnbed in Manassewitsch, V , "Frequency Synthesizers Theory and Design", John Wiley & Sons, 1987, pp 43-48, the contents of which is incorporated herein by reference The synthesizer of Figure 8 includes a stable reference frequency source 800 (such as a quartz crystal oscillator), a reference divider 805, a phase and/or frequency detector 810, a loop filter 820, a voltage controlled oscillator 830 and feedback dividers 840 and 850. An output 860 ofthe synthesizer is a signal at the desired frequency. The desired frequency is set by programming the moduli ofthe dividers 805, 840 and 850.
Making such an adjustment does correct for frequency error, however it does not adjust for code phase error or code phase drift over time. Traditional systems which employ frequency references, as depicted in Figure 8, typically use high power expensive components to set that reference very accurately. As will be discussed, the present inventors have identified a method to set the LO synthesizer very inexpensively, requiring a minimum of digital signal processing resources and subsequently track code drift throughout acquisition and demodulation without adjusting the receive local frequency reference. Decimation
Digital signal processing systems typically employ decimation as a way to lower a number of samples that need to be processed at various processing steps. The effect of decimation is to combine a number of samples into a lesser number of samples, or merely select a subset of samples within a block of adjacent samples for subsequent processing. Decimation is typically preceded by a filter whose characteristics often impact signal strength adversely, particularly because the decimation operation has a characteristic transfer function that preferentially passes signals occurring in a middle portion ofthe characteristic transfer function, but attenuating signal offset from the middle portion. The present inventors have identified methods for eliminating or limiting the effects of decimation loss while minimally impacting processing requirements. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Accordingly, one object ofthe present invention is to overcome the above identified limitations and excesses in conventional direct sequence spread spectrum systems that prohibit the use of low-cost, low-end frequency references and digital signal processing components for performing the substantive direct sequence spread spectrum transceiver operations. It is another object ofthe present invention to provide a method and apparatus for receiving a direct sequence spread spectrum signal sent from a transmitter having a relatively inaccurate frequency reference.
It is yet another object ofthe present invention to provide a method and apparatus for receiving and/or transmitting a direct sequence spread spectrum signal over a long period of time using only battery power as controlled by a power saving mechanism and or signaling protocol. It is still a further object ofthe present invention to provide a method and apparatus for receiving and/or transmitting a direct sequence spread spectrum signal with a device having a size (i.e., footprint) about equivalent to that of a conventional credit card.
Yet another object ofthe present invention to provide a method and apparatus for quickly acquiring a transmitted direct sequence spread spectrum signal. An aspect of this object is to provide a fast serial search method that offers the simplicity attributes of a conventional slow serial search method and efficiency attributes of a parallel coπelator, while also conserving battery power by disabling an RF front- end of a transceiver after receiving a portion ofthe signal and while attempting to acqire the direct sequence spread spectrum signal. Still a further obj ect ofthe present invention is to provide a receiver and/or transceiver architecture that includes a scalable sensitivity attribute that allows the sensitivity of the receiver/transceiver to be incrementally improved, at the expense of increasing computational loading.
It is still a further object of the present invention to provide a receiver and/or transceiver that includes a distributed decimation architecture that reduces computational load for baseband processing, while maintaining minimal decimation loss and reliable data communications.
It is another object of the present invention to provide a multi-channel direct sequence spread spectrum receiver and/or transceiver variant that offers increased sensitivity relative to a single channel receiver and/or transceiver, with provisions for improving system performance with enhanced automatic gain control (AGC) mechanisms, false trip avoidance mechanisms, direct current (DC) removal mechanisms, and predictive reposition mechanisms.
It is a further object of the present invention to provide a method and system for operating a receiver and/or transceiver in a direct sequence spread spectrum application using battery for power, with power management features.
It is still a further object of the present invention to provide a method and apparatus in a direct sequence spread spectrum communication system, with variable data rate option, by adjusting a relation of bit length to number of code chips per bit, using a relatively short pseudo-noise sequence length.
Another object of the present invention to provide a method for receiving OOK signals using a receiver and/or transceiver that employs a hard limited analog to digital converter.
Still another object ofthe present invention is to provide a direct sequence spread spectrum system/ network that establishes a communications protocol for saving battery power at various remote receiver/transceiver elements in the network.
It is another object ofthe present invention to provide a computer-based product including digital signal processing methods and data structures for efficiently implementing a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver/transceiver. It is another object of the present invention to provide a direct sequence spread spectrum transceiver, and system that uses the transceiver that may be adapted to improve performance by substituting higher performance transceiver mechanisms for less capable mechanisms, although more computationally demanding and generally at higher cost. These and other objects are provided by a method, apparatus, computer-based product and system that uses a receiver (or transceiver) to receive, digitize and process a direct sequence spread spectrum signal using efficient, low-cost digital signal processing components A radio front end, and/or analog to digital conversion (ADC) apparatus are mcluded to receive the direct spectrum signal and convert the received signal into a digitized signal Downconversion and decimation are performed on the digitized signal at an intermediate frequency prior to despreadmg and correlating the digitized signal with a pseudorandom noise (PN) code used at a transmitter to spread a data signal contained in the direct sequence spread spectrum signal Despreading and coπelating the signal with PN signal extracts the data signal portion ofthe direct sequence spread spectrum signal for subsequent processing In order to initially align, and maintain alignment of, the PN code ith the direct sequence spread spectrum signal, a timmg and state control mechanism is included and provides time reference coπection information to the signal processing components of the receiver and/or transceiver, without expressly modifying a locally generated time reference Additional features include synchronization algonthms, suitable for use for low performance digital signal processors, implemented in coarse search and fine search algorithms for acquiring the direct sequence spread spectrum signal, using mimmal processing resources
The receiver and transceiver, according to the present invention, employ power management mechanisms that, at least in selected embodiments, may be powered by small battenes that apply power only to those components necessary to maintain an operational state ofthe receiver and/or transceiver, based on a present operational state ofthe receiver and transceiver Using the power management features, the receiver and/or transceiver may communicate with other direct sequence spread spectrum transmitters and receivers as part of a communications network for multi-year penods of time
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
A more complete appreciation ofthe invention and many ofthe attendant advantages thereof will be readily obtained as the same becomes better understood by reference to the following detailed descnption when considered in connection with the accompanying drawings, wherein Figure 1 is a block diagram of a conventional Digital Signal Processor (DSP)-based receiver,
Figure 2 is a graph illustrating a signal spectrum before conventional harmonic sampling of an Intermediate Frequency (IF) signal when the IF signal is converted to "near baseband",
Figure 3 is graph illustrating a resulting frequency spectrum of conventional harmonic sampling ofthe Intermediate Frequency (IF) signal of Figure 2 when the IF signal is converted to "near baseband", Figure 4 is a graph illustrating the signal spectrum before conventional harmonic sampling of an
IF signal,
Figure 5 is graph illustrating a resulting frequency spectrum of conventional harmonic sampling ofthe IF signal of Figure 4 when the IF signal is brought directly to baseband,
Figure 6 is a graph that shows signal level distributions for 115 kHz and 20 kHz of noise bandwidth,
Figure 7 is a graph of a conventional coπelation function with associated power loss due to fractional chip eπor of spreading code alignment,
Figure 8 is a block diagram of a conventional local oscillator frequency synthesizer,
Figure 9 is a block diagram of a smgle channel transceiver ofthe first embodiment ofthe present invention,
Figure 10 is plan view ofthe single channel transceiver, and associated battery pack of the first embodiment,
Figure 11 is a block diagram of a digital signal processing portion ofthe single channel receiver portion ofthe transceiver of Figure 9, Figure 12 is a circuit diagram of a digital downconversion and decimation stage ofthe transceiver ofthe first embodiment, as realized by a table lookup process,
Figure 13 is a circuit diagram that shows an alternative digital downconversion and decimation stage, realized by Boolean logic,
Figure 14 is a graph that demonstrates (1) how decimation can reduce system performance, and (2) how this reduction in system performance can be avoided accordmg to the signal processing architecture ofthe first embodiment,
Figures 15A-B are graphs that illustrate a signal acquisition process ofthe first embodiment,
Figure 16 is a flow chart of a fast tune domam seπal search process ofthe first embodiment, Figure 17 is a graph that shows how the ideal correlation process of Figure 7 is adversely affected by noise;
Figure 18 is a graph that compares respective results of different inventive fine search methods;
Figure 19 is a flow chart of a Center of Mass fine search method; Figure 20 is a flow chart of a Center of Mass 9 method;
Figure 21 is a flow chart of a Center of Mass 5+ method;
Figure 22 is a flow chart of a Center of Mass 9' method;
Figure 23 is a flow chart of a top-level search process performed by the transceiver of the first embodiment ofthe present invention; Figure 24 is a graph that shows how antenna diversity can improve the received signal to noise ratio;
Figure 25 is a block diagram of a low-cost implementation of a frequency diversity transmitter portion ofthe transceiver of Figure 9;
Figures 26A-B are graphs showing the respective transmitted signals with frequency diversity disabled and enabled;
Figures 27A-D are timing diagrams showing how a transceiver ofthe first embodiment implements antenna and frequency diversity;
Figure 28 is a graph showing how averaging a signal in the first embodiment reduces an effects of noise; Figure 29 is a graph showing how averaging reduces a false alarm rate in the first embodiment;
Figures 30A-F are respective approaches for incrementally increasing data rate using partial sums ofthe coπelation function;
Figure 31 is block diagram of an alternative demodulator of the first embodiment showing a differential binary phase shift keying (DBPSK) demodulator, with scaleable bit rate; Figure 32 is a block diagram of an alterative embodiment of a receiver portion shown in Figure
9 for resolving frequency ambiguity between a remote transmitter and the receiver;
Figure 33 is a illustration of an approach for implementing a frequency detection portion ofthe receiver shown in Figure 32;
Figure 34 is a block diagram of an implementation ofthe digital-to-analog converter of Figure 32; Figure 35 is a block diagram ofthe digital downconversion, decimation, and removal of Analog-to-
Digital converter (ADC) DC offset of a multi-channel receiver portion of a second embodiment transceiver embodiment ofthe present invention;
Figure 36 is a block diagram of channel formation portion ofthe multichannel receiver shown in Figure 35, which reduces processing requirements for symmetric channel filters; Figure 37 is a block diagram of a center channel forming portion, having reduced processing requirement attributes, for a center channel filter ofthe multichannel receiver of Figure 35,
Figure 38 is a graph demonstrating how a reduction in decimation loss may be achieved m the multi-channel receiver ofthe second embodiment ofthe present invention, Figure 39 is a graph showmg how non-uniformly spaced frequency channels in the multi-channel receiver ofthe second embodiment limits system performance loss,
Figure 40 is a block diagram of a fast frequency domain code correlator portion of the second embodiment,
Figure 41 is a block diagram of a conventional coπelator, Figure 42 is a block diagram of a conventional circular coπelator,
Figure 43 is a block diagram of a conventional circular coπelator implemented with a convolution process,
Figure 44 is a block diagram of a conventional circular convolution correlator, operating in the frequency domain, Figure 45 is a illustrative flow diagram of an implementation of an inventive frequency domain code correlator ofthe second embodiment,
Figure 46 is a graph of signal conditions that can cause false tπps (I e , false coπelation detection indications),
Figure 47 is a graph that shows how the power of a received noise signal will be distnbuted among frequency channels in a multi-channel receiver,
Figure 48 is a graph that shows how the power of a received Carrier Wave (CW) jammer signal will be distributed among frequency channels in a multi-channel receiver,
Figure 49 is a graph that shows how the power of a received non-coπelated spread spectrum signal will be distnbuted among frequency channels m a multi-channel receiver, Figure 50 is a graph that shows how the power of a received correlated spread spectrum signal will be distributed among frequency channels m a multi-channel receiver,
Figure 51 is a flow chart of false trip avoidance method implementable in the multi-channel receiver,
Figure 52 is a graph illustrating results of a coπelation function of a single code penod of data in the multi-channel receiver embodiment,
Figure 53 is a graph similar to Figure 52, but mcludmg an averaging mechanism to reduce the effect of noise,
Figure 54 is another graph showing how averagmg reduces a false alarm rate m the multi-channel receiver, Figures 55-61 are flow charts of an Automatic Gain Control (AGC) method implementable in the multi-channel receiver ofthe second embodiment;
Figure 62 is a graph showing signal power loss in a multi-channel receiver of the second embodiment due to past frequency drift ofthe transmitter; Figure 63 is a graph showing received signal loss due to fast transmitter frequency drift;
Figure 64 is a flowchart of a process implementable in the multi-channel receiver to compensate for fast frequency drift in a signal transmitted by a transmitter;
Figure 65 is a graph showing a method for limiting noise contribution and corresponding to the process illustrated in Figure 64; Figures 66A-C are graphs of signal loss due to frequency error and how this loss may be reduced by implementing a code phase repositioning and predictive code phase repositioning process throughout the message;
Figure 67 is a block diagram of a system with multiple transmitters, and multiple receivers that are connected to a processor via a common bus in a network, according to a third embodiment of the present invention;
Figure 68 is a block diagram showing a battery operated remote transceiver (BORT) application ofthe network of Figure 67;
Figures 69A-B are graphs shows network timing, coπesponding to Figures 67 and 68;
Figures 70A-C jointly present a flow diagram of a process flow implemented in a BORT device of Figure 68;
Figures 71 A-B jointly present a flow diagram of a process flow of a system transceiver of Figure 68;
Figures 72A-C jointly present a timing diagrams showing the steady state communication exchanges between a system transceiver and a BORT device; Figures 73A-B jointly present a flow diagram showing the steady state operation of a BORT device;
Figure 74 is a timing diagram showing the initialization sequence of a BORT device in a BORT- based system, or network;
Figure 75 is a flow diagram showing a BORT initialization process; Figures 76A-C are timing diagrams showing the re-synchronization sequence of a BORT device in a BORT-based system, or network; and
Figure 77 is a flow diagram of a BORT re-synchronization process. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
Referring now to the drawings, and more particularly to Figures 9 and 10 thereof, there is illustrated a first embodiment of the present invention in the form of a credit card sized single channel transceiver (which includes a receiver and a transmitter, hence the term "transceiver"), that is included as part of a direct sequence spread spectrum network of transmitters, and receivers, which include transceivers. As will be discussed in reference to Figures 9-34, the present transceiver is of a sufficiently small size that it may be operated under battery control, and require low end, low performance digital signal processors in order to perform the digital receiver, transceiver and other control functions.
Figure 9 is a block diagram ofthe single channel transceiver that includes two antennas 901 and 903 that feed a radio frequency (RF) front end 905. A direct sequence spread spectrum signal, formed at a transmitter preferably with a 63 bit pseudorandom noise (PN) code at a transmitter, is coupled into the antennas 901 and 903 and to the RF front end 905. An output ofthe RF front end 905, provides, at an intermediate frequency (IF), the received signal to a single bit analog to digital converter (ADC) 907. The ADC 907 converts the analog signal into a series of digital samples, as a particular sample rate as will be discussed, which are then be processed in baseband processing section 908. The digital signal processing section 908 includes a low performance 16-bit digital signal processor, which operates at less than 20 MHZ clock. One example of such a digital signal processor is Model 893x1, available in the United States from Zilog.
More particularly, the digital samples from the ADC 907 are passed to a quadrature (i.e., inphase, I and quadrature, Q) downconversion mechanism 909 that further reduces the center frequency of the received signal to baseband, and decimates the digital signals. By downconverting and decimating the digital signal sample rate is reduced, which in turn reduces a digital signal processing load placed on the digital signal processing section 908. The output ofthe quadrature downconversion mechanism 909 is provided to a direct sequence despreading/coπelator mechanism 911. The despreading correlation mechanism 911 aligns the PN code, which is the same code as that used to spread a data signal at the transmitter but generated locally at the transceiver, to the incoming signal so as to correlate the received signal with the locally generated PN code. As a consequence (as will be explained), the despreading/correlating mechanism 911 further decimates the coπelated signal so as to further reduce the data rate and realize the 18 dB of processing gain (i.e., the gain associated with the PN spread spectrum signal) so that the signal may then later be passed to additional mechanisms for identifying when the signal is correlated, how well the signal was correlated, and ultimately for extracting the data from the coπelated signal.
The output of the direct sequence despread/coπelator 911 passes to a switch 913, preferably implemented as a state-driven digital process, under control of a timing and state control mechanism 921, as shown. The timing and state control mechanism 921 first throws the switch 913 so as to connect to a coarse search and trip mechanism 919 which performs initial signal acquisition, and acquisition detection respectively. Once the coarse search and trip mechanism 919 determines that the signal has been acquired, the timing and state control mechanism 921 throws the switch 913 into a middle position, as illustrated, so as to pass the output ofthe direct sequence despread/correlator 911 to a fine search mechanism 917.
The fine search mechanism adjusts the receive PN sequence to align within a small predetermined chip interval with respect to the transmitted PN sequence. In the prefeπed embodiment the fine search mechanism 917 positions the received PN sequence to less than 1/4 of a chip interval. Once within the 1/4 chip alignment, the timing and state control circuit 921 moves the switch 913 to the upper position, as illustrated, so as to pass the output of the direct sequence despread/coπelator 911 to the demodulation circuit 915 which extracts the data from the transmitted signal and passes the data to a data sink as shown.
The output of the demodulation mechanism 915 is also passed to the timing and state control mechanism 921 as a reposition signal to perform a reposition operation like that discussed in U.S. Patent 5,457,713, incorporated herein by reference. The time reference coπection mechanism 923 provides a time reference coπection signal to the
ADC 907, quadrature downconversion mechanism 909, and direct sequence despread/correlator mechanism 911, in order to compensate for time drift eπors induced by differences in transmitter and receiver time references (a time reference being a particular implementation of a frequency reference, and thus the two terms being used in a coπesponding sense herein), due to inherent inaccuracies in low-cost, low performance time references such as receiver time reference 927 as shown. The time reference coπection mechanism does not adjust the receiver time reference 927, as is done in convention receivers. Rather the time reference correction signal compensates for the inaccuracies induced by the time reference 927 in the various elements that employ an input from the receiver time reference 927.
The timing and state control mechanism 921 also includes an antenna select control signal which selects between antennas 901 and 903 when antenna diversity (such as for spatial or polarization diversity purposes) is employed. In addition, the select signal includes a frequency control select signal, illustrated by a dashed line, applied to the RF front end 905, so as to control frequency diversity reception when frequency diversity is employed in the transceiver of Figure 9, as will be discussed.
The transceiver of Figure 9 includes a power control mechanism 925 that is controlled by the states determined in the timing and state control mechanism 921 , so as to provide a power management function for the transceiver. More particularly, when the transceiver is operated in selected states, where not all of the components, such as the RF front end 905, are required for successful operation, the power control mechanism 925, places the selected components in a reduced power consumption mode of operation. Although not shown for clarity purposes in Figure 9, the power control mechanism 925 is operatively coupled to a battery pack 1003 (Figure 10) and to each of the active components in the transceiver illustrated in Figure 9. Consequently, the power control mechanism, can remove power from the RF front- end 905, transmitter 929 and the entire, or subsections of, the digital signal processing section 908. The transmitter 929 that is connected to a transmit antenna 931 , which may be a separate element, but preferably is the same as antenna 901 or 903 with an accompanying diplexer (not shown). The transmitter 929 is provided with an external data source as shown, and derives time and frequency information from the receiver time reference 927 such that transmissions by the transmitter 929 will also be subject to the timing uncertainties caused by low cost receiver time reference 927. The transmit feature associated with the transmitter 929, and the waveform produced therein are discussed in U.S. Patent
4,977,577, incorporated herein by reference.
Figure 10 is a plan view ofthe credit card outline transceiver 1000 as was discussed in Figure 9. The two dimensional footprint ofthe credit card outline transceiver 1000 includes a length in an X direction of about 3 A", and a width in a Y direction of about 2J" as shown. A thickness (not shown) is roughly A". The battery pack 1003 connects to the credit card outline transceiver 1000 via a connector 1002 as shown.
The battery pack 1003 , includes two external 3.6V lithium thionyl chloride (LiSOCL) cells (such as a LS- 14500 cell available from Faft Coφoration), which provide sufficient power to operate the transceiver, as discussed herein, for multiple years.
The data source and data sink on the credit card transceiver shown in Figure 9, is provided via bidirectional interface 1004 as shown in Figure 10. The connector includes a serial interface such as a
RS232C, pseudo RS232C (0-5 V RS232C) or other interfaces such as RS-485. In addition, other interfaces may also be suitable, such as universal serial bus USB, Fire Wire (IEEE 1394), and other data interfaces available in data communication equipment. Selecting Sequence Length Based on Prime Factors The process gain that a radio exhibits is driven by the length of the spreading sequence. The present invention uses the class of codes refeπed to as maximal length (ML) sequences, due to their coπelation properties, and preferably a 63-bit ML sequence.
ML sequences are always of length 2k-l, where k is any positive integer. The process gain associated with a particular spreading sequence is 201og(n), where n is the length ofthe spreading sequence. Longer spreading sequences allow for more process gain; but require more computational loading to achieve correlation . The present invention does not attempt to achieve the greatest possible processing gain (because too much processing power is required) but provides a reasonable amount of processing gain that can be realized with limited computational resources. For any given relative code phase alignment between the transmitter and receiver spreading codes, a single power value must ultimately be calculated, where the phrase "code phase" refers to an alignment ofthe code chips used to spread the signal relative to the code chips ofthe PN code generated locally at the transceiver The present invention uses decimation m the time domam and Founer transforms in the frequency domain to achieve this result The present invention utilizes partial decimation (1 e , multiple decimation stages distnbuted throughout the transceiver) and partial transformation techniques to reduce computational loading These techniques are enabled by selection of length ofthe spreading sequence that can be factored into pnme numbers In the preferred embodiment, a code length of 63 is selected and can be factored into prime numbers 3, 3, and 7 Table 3 depicts ML sequences of length 2k-l for k up to 13, as well as the number of prune factors for each length and a processing gain associated with each code length
Figure imgf000024_0001
Maximal Length Sequence Lengths Table 3 One example of computational savings resulting from selecting a code sequence that is factorable by multiple pnme factors is illustrated by companng a length-31 sequence (which is not factorable) and a length-63 sequence (factorable by three prime factors) The length-31 sequences have about 15dB process gain, which would generally be recognized as having an adequate process gam, without resorting to a longer code sequence However, smce 31 is a pnme number, a Fourier transform perfoπned on a signal that was spread with this code sequence would require 31 * 31 = 961 multiply-accumulate operations In contrast, the length-63 code sequence has prime factors 7, 3, and 3, and thus requires a Founer transform with only 63 * (7 + 3 + 3) = 819 multiply-accumulate operations Therefore, scaling from 31 to 63 provides 3 dB of additional process gain with no additional, actually a decrease, in computational loadmg
Another computational efficiency feature offered by a code sequence that is factorable by multiple pnme numbers is that increase flexibility is achieved in selectmg intermediate decimation factors This in turn enables flexibility m the number and position of decimation, filtering, and downconversion processes employed in the transceiver Single Channel Receiver Partial Decimation Method
The single channel embodiment of this invention employs a distributed (partial) decimation scheme configured to reduce the Nyquist bandwidth ofthe signal to equal the frequency uncertainty caused by inaccurate frequency references in the transmitter and receiver To this end, m this embodiment, the signal is sampled at 4 times the chip rate (l e , the number of chips per second applied in the despreading stage), downconverted and decimated by 4 immediately so as to drop the resultmg sample rate to 1 2 MHZ The signal is correlated (despread) and subsequently decimated again to drop the Nyquist bandwidth to ± 57 6 kHz, which m the preferred embodiment is the frequency uncertainty bandwidth (BW) The digital signal processing flow for the receiver portion ofthe transceiver shown in Figure 9 is depicted in Figure 11 In Figure 11, a signal of interest lies at an IF frequency of 49 2 MHZ and is applied to an input 1102 of a ADC 1104 at a sampling frequency of 4 8 MHZ (1106) The resultmg signal at the output 1108 ofthe ADC 1104 is at a near baseband frequency of 1 2 MHZ with a sampling of 4 8 MHZ A tone generator 1110, combined with phase delay element 1112 and mixers 11141 and 1114Q, combine to form a quadrature half mixer A first decimation stage is implemented with low pass filters 11161 and
1116Q and decimation blocks 11181 and 1118Q Code coπelation is performed as the signal from PN code generator 1120 is mixed in 11221 and 1122Q to generate correlated I and Q data streams This data is further filtered by low pass filters 11241 and 1124Q and then decimated by elements 11261 and 1126Q
The resulting I and Q data streams form a set of partial decimation sums, each sum being the coπelation of 42 processed samples The decimation from the sample rate with 252 points to 6 points reduces the effective Nyquist bandwidth for the signal and sets the predetection bandwidth to 115 kHz Finally, the magnitude ofthe resulting signal power is calculated by respective squaring mechanisms 1128 I and 1128 Q and summation blocks 11301, 1130Q, and 1132 The result is signal a 1134, which is a magnitude scalar value representative ofthe correlated signal power m a 115 kHz noise bandwidth The leftmost portion of Figure 11 performs the quadrature downconversion and partial decimation
The nght portion of Figure 11 performs the subsequent despreading and decimation required to limit the noise bandwidth and achieve maximum sensitivity, while spanning a frequency uncertainty of 115 kHz Alternating a decιmate-by-10 operation followed by a decιmate-by-11 operation, three times in succession, realizes the decιmate-by-10 5 block 1126 in Figure 11 The resultmg 6 data points of I and 6 data points of Q are squared, thus destroying their phase relationship pnor to final decimation which is performed as a summing function As the phase relationship is lost in the squaring block, further techniques for limiting noise bandwidth is prevented so that the subsequent summation yields a predetection noise bandwidth of 115 kHz Once again, the wide predetection noise bandwidth of 115 kHz, which is much larger than the approximately 19 2 kHz baseband signal is needed because the exact position ofthe baseband signal cannot be a pnoπ predicted with any degree of certainty, owing to the inaccuracy ofthe transmitters frequency reference The above-descnbed process is used to create a smgle channel receiver tolerant to vanous frequency uncertainties It is hmited only in the number of decimation end points and associated decimation bandwidth pnor to squaring Reducing the 63 data points to 5 (decιmate-by-13, 12J3J2J3) would result m a final noise bandwidth and frequency uncertainty of 96 3 kHz Similarly reducing the 63 data points to 4 (decimate-by- 16, 15J6J6) would result in a final noise bandwidth and frequency uncertainty of 77 1 kHz, 3 points (21.21,21) = 57 8 kHz, 2 points (32.31)=38 5 kHz Finally, decimating all the way to one point before squaring is the implementation of one of the channel filters used in the most sensitive embodiment that yields a single channel equal to the data bandwidth of 19 2 kHz Digital Downconversion at Fs/4 Centered IF Minimizes Computational Loading
Preferably the ADC 1104 is a 1-bit sampled luniter However, a multi-bit ADC may also, albeit at greater expense and possible requirement that an Automatic Gain Function (AGC) function be used to avoid applying the signal at a level that is outside ofthe multi-bit ACC's dynamic range
The overall noise contnbution due to IF slew limiting and aperture jitter is evaluated to ensure that remaming dynamic range supports signal processing requirements For the present invention, the dynamic range must be able to receive both noise and at least 18 dB (and preferably 36 dB) of signal Because the low-cost embodiment ofthe instant invention is a 1 -bit limited system, the dynamic range ofthe system is hmited to the process gam of 18 dB But since the system can also produce earner insertion for jamming signals, the theoretic process gain against a frequency coincident jamming signal is 36 dB
The resulting spectrum following digitization is centered at +'/4 Fs so as to maximize distance to the nearest image (as was discussed in reference to Figure 3) Additional images exist at -% Fs as well as - VA FS Because the signal is sampled real, the image is ideally centered m the Nyquist bandwidth prior to final downconversion as shown previously m Figure 3 The final conversion to baseband must be performed in quadrature to ensure that negative images do not overlap The digitized signal is downconverted to baseband using a half-mixer, as discussed m reference to the background art The present invention completes the signal downconversion operation by moving the quadrature signal centered at Fs/4 (1 e , 1 2 MHZ) to baseband (I e , 0 Hz), as performed with components 1110, 1112 and 1114
Figure 11 illustrates the sampled limiter (l e , ADC) 1104 as a mixer because the sampled miter
1004 is operating as a harmonic sampler and thus also downconverts the IF centered at 49 2 MHZ Several IF frequencies are preferred based on the availability of inexpensive surface acoustic wave (SAW) filters
Inexpensive bandpass SAW filters enable the harmonic sampling technique due to their sharp roll-off and excellent ultimate rejection characteristics 10 8 MHZ is very near the standard SAW frequency of 10 7
MHZ used widely as a communication IF 34 8 MHZ is ideal due to SAW filters that are present in many color televisions 49 2 MHZ, the prefeπed embodiment, is also ideal due to the volume of portable telephones using this frequency 70 MHZ SAW filters are also available, but the harmonic multiplicand
(and corresponding aperturejitter noise) increases and the slew limiting requirements ofthe samplmg device increase component cost The 10th harmonic multiplicand ofthe sample rate 1106 of 4 8 MHZ creates a mixing tone at 48 MHZ, the difference yielding the digitized downconverted image 1108 centered at 1 2
MHZ The half-mixer (1144) performs a complex translation ofthe real signal centered at 1 2 MHZ and completes the downconversion to the baseband signal at 0 Hz Signal processing efficiencies exist with under these special circumstances when the IF is centered in the Nyquist bandwidth Namely, the downconversion tone 1110 is realized digitally as a series of values of 1 2 MHZ as sampled at 4 8 MHZ, which in turn defines a 4 1 relationship between Fs and the IF center frequency (Fc) This 4 1 relationship enables a particularly efficient downconversion operation because a coefficient set for the I (In phase) data downconversion mixer may be represented as follows
I Coefficients [cos (kπ/2)] 1, 0, -1, 0, 1, 0, -1, 0, 1, 0, -1, 0 Similarly, the Q (Quadrature) coefficients related to I by 90 degrees become
Q Coefficients [sin (kπ/2)] 0, 1, 0, -1, 0, 1, 0, -1, 0, 1, 0, -1 for all k e {0, 1, 2, 3, } This relationship assumes an initial phase of 0 degrees for the coefficient set, but because the present invention does not provide coherent detection, an initial phase relationship is arbitrary Forcmg the initial phase to 0 degrees greatly simplifies the computational task for performing the quadrature downconversion because each mixer 11141 and 1114 Q need only perform half of the multiplies because one-half of the coefficient terms are zero The processmg efficiency is further simplified by recognizing that when a multiply is to be performed with a non-zero coefficient, the sampled data is either multiplied with a 1 or a -1, which conesponds to a sign inversion of the sample
Consequently, these samples are either left unchanged or simply inverted in sign by a sign inversion operation
Under the above-described conditions, the half-mixer multipliers 11141 and 1114Q become simple XOR gates for single-bit data A single XOR gate performs the same task for parallel ADC data provided the data is already in Gray code or other binary weighted format in which a smgle bit change creates a signed inversion of equal magnitude Marvin E Frerkmg teaches this technique for naπowband systems m his text entitled "Digital Signal Processing in Communication Systems", 1994, the contents of which is incorporated herein by reference As presently recognized, this technique is similarly applicable to a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver
The resulting complex signal 11131 and 1113Q at the input to the lowpass filters 11161 and 1116Q have a Nyquist bandwidth of 2 4 MHZ The time resolution provides 'Λ-chip steps for fine search by skippmg or reusing a data point The fine search algorithm uses this technique to coπelate the incoming signal against a fixed PN at %-chιp resolution Coarse search does not require '/4-chιp time resolution Rather, a reduction of data and coπespondmg computational loading is realized by decimating the complex signal to the chip rate Figure 11 performs this function in the lowpass filters 11161 and 1116Q and decrmators 11181 and 1118Q Decimation-in-time processes may be viewed as providmg mixmg and sampling operations Filters 11161 and 1116Q are used to reject unwanted images that exist in the digitized spectrum separated by the Nyquist bandwidth, m this case 2 4 MHZ A digitally implemented "boxcar-averaging" filter is used in the instant invention so as to minimize coπelation loss while rejecting image power below the tπp threshold
Decimate-by-four 11181 and 1118Q mechanisms follow the filters 11161 and 1116Q so as to lower the effective sample rate to 1 2 MHZ, shown as signals 1 1 191 and 1119Q The decimation process immediately following the half-mixer may be realized as a simple adder that adds every other sample, ignoring the products containing zero coefficients The combined downconversion decimation block is therefore optimized for minimized computation and signal processing load, reducing multipliers to single XOR gates and the decimators to simple adders
Alternatively, the entire downconversion decimation process is performed without any mathematical processmg operations being performed on samples originating from a one-bit ADC converter Specific signal processmg functions are avoided by using two 16-element lookup tables and indirect addressmg based on a serialized 4-bit nibble The 16-element lookup tables may be implemented in semiconductor memory or other mechanism for holding database entnes (such as boolean operators, as will be discussed) Data structures for the database entnes are shown m Tables 1 and 2, where respective fields of the respective data structures include decimated and downconverted data samples corresponding to particular sets of pre-decimated samples
Figure 12 depicts a digitizing system that would use this technique replacing the half mixer and decimate operators of Figure 11 In Figure 12, a signal of interest 1202 lies at an IF frequency of 49 2 MHZ and is sampled by the 1 bit ADC 1204 at a sampling frequency of 4 8 MHZ (1206) The resulting signal 1208 is at a near baseband frequency of 1 2 MHZ with a sampling rate of 4 8 MHZ Because the sampling rate is four times the code repetition rate, four samples represent a single code chip These four samples are converted into parallel by the senal-to-parallel converter 1210 and then passed to a database implemented as the lookup tables 1212 I and 1212 Q implemented as semiconductor memory The four parallel samples are used as the address input (address or database indica) of these lookup tables 12121 and 1212Q The four address bits are weighted accordmg to the I coefficients (1, 0, -1, 0) and the coπespondmg Q coefficients (0, 1, 0, -1) to produce the DO and D 1 output bits The divide-by-four device 1216 serves to clock latches 1214 I and 1214 Q to produce the output data streams 1218 1 and 1218 Q at one fourth the rate of the original sample stream The table lookup feature of Figure 12 takes full advantage ofthe 4 1 ratio of Fs to Fc Table 1 illustrates the content and data structure ofthe lookup tables that simultaneously perform this downconversion and decimation function In Table 1, downconversion coefficient values of A3-A0 are represented m parentheses, and all possible input patterns are presented Note that for the puφoses of coπelation, a J ' in the mput data coπesponds to a '+1 ' value and that a '0' in the mput data coπesponds to a '-T value These sampled data values are multiplied by the downconversion coefficient values, in parentheses, then summed to produce the binary weighted DO and Dl output values
The I data only uses alternating data points exclusive ofthe Q data (unused points are shaded gray in Table 1), and therefore, Table 1 collapses into two 4-element tables as shown m Table 2 Conversely, m systems where additional memory is available, the shift register 1210 can be expanded and the table appropnately increased in scale to perform a wide vanety of decimation ratios and downconversion tones For example, if the Fs to Fc ratio were 8 1 , eight samples ofthe data would be sufficient for multiplication
(mixing) with one period ofthe downconversion tone The shift register 1210 would be lengthened to 8, and the lookup table would have 256 values The data width of the output would be scaleable, and the quantization eπor would be predictable and programmed into the lookup table This quantization eπor is not a problem in the case of 4 1 ratios because the coefficients are integer Fractional coefficients. however, create a need to represent non-integer decimation results The output of the lookup table can represent the fractional results to whatever resolution is required by the system implementation at the cost of widening the datapath (e g , a bus)
Figure imgf000030_0001
Downconvert and Decimate Lookup Table
Table 1
Figure imgf000030_0002
Figure imgf000030_0003
Downconvert and Decimate Lookup Table
Table 2 The example in Figure 12 uses a 16-element table that holds the sum ofthe two valid samples in a two-bit result. Processors that have an abundance of memory and excellent memory access operations but do not have fast multiply-accumulators will benefit from this technique. This enables the class of general puφose microcontrollers to perform "DSP" functions without the need of fast multiply-accumulator operations. In another alternative, reference is made to data in Table 2, where the resulting I data and Q data are simplified into logical combinations ofthe input samples. The lookup table itself can be replaced with a few logic gates (serving as the database, which is a hardwired, preprogrammed alternative to the semiconductor database of Figure 12) implemented in the decimation stage. The Boolean logic expression for these is given by:
I [D0]= !(A3 XOR Al), I [Dl] = A3 AND !A1
Q [DO] = !(A2 XOR AO), Q [Dl] = A2 AND !A0, where " ! " denotes negation of Boolean term. A 2-bit sum for each I and Q data path is denoted as D 1 , DO where DO is the least significant bit. Figure 13 depicts the downconversion and decimation circuit that performs this function.
In Figure 13, a signal of interest 1302 lies at an IF frequency of 49.2 MHZ and is sampled by the 1 bit ADC 1304 at a sampling frequency of 4.8 MHZ (1306). A center ofthe resulting signal 1308 is above a baseband frequency by about 1.2 MHZ and represented with a stream of samples at a sampling rate of 4.8 MHZ. Because the sampling rate is four times the code repetition rate (i.e., a rate at which the PN code repeats itself), four samples correspond to a single code chip interval. These four samples are converted into a parallel representation by the serial-to-parallel converter 1310 and then passed to Boolean logic blocks 13121 and 1312Q. The combinatorial block 13121 performs the same function as the lookup table and produces a decimated, downconverted signal. A divide-by-four device 1316 serves to clock latches 13141 and 1314Q so to produce the decimated, downconverted output data samples as 13181 and 1318Q.
Coefficient-less Downconversion, Despread and Decimation in a DSP Processor
Another alternative approach for implementing the quadrature downconversion and decimation function uses a signal processing engine such as a DSP or other processor to perform this function as the data is read from the sampling device.
This approach will only be computationally efficient if the processor possesses the capability for sign inversion of the data without adding computational complexity. This is often true in commercial digital signal processors because the read function is highly pipelined into the execution process so as to maximize performance. Sign inversion can most simply be performed by adding or subtracting the value as read, requiring no multiply function at all. Provided this condition is met, the processor combines the 4:1 downconversion ratio efficiencies discussed previously with the data collection and decimation to perform the downconversion, despreading and decimation process without the need for storing any data coefficients . This is particularly useful for processors with limited RAM memory such as very inexpensive processors or a hardware state-machine implementation (as implemented in a programmable logic device--
PLD, application specific integrated circuit-ASIC, etc.). Coefficient-less decimation, downconversion and despreading as implemented in the present embodiment is based on the processor's ability to sign-accumulate data as read from the sampling device Two parallel interleaved processes are executed to compute the inphase and quadrature data streams
When avoiding the storage of coefficients to perform the downconvert, despread and decimate function, an in-line execution process is performed that adds/subtracts m the accumulation process to represent multiplication by 1 or -1 In this context, the in-line code itself serves as the database repository for the resulting downconverted, despread, and decimated samples So as to further illustrate to explain this technique, exemplary pseudo-code for the in-line code is listed below
LOAD A,PORT ,read data from port, seed the accumulator with value ACCUM A,PORT ,read data from port, accumulate value into register A
SUBTRACT A,PORT ,read data from port, subtract value from register A NOP ,perform no function, wait for next sample
A single processor can interleave the inphase and quadrature functions if there exists multiple accumulators or registers in the processor to hold intermediate values For the puφose of this example, the above instructions would be modified to replace the "A" register with a "B" register Either multiple accumulators, context switched register files or temporary storage of intermediate values performs this function
Provided that the processor is executing at a multiple ofthe sample rate, the downconversion and decimation algonthm may be encoded into the firmware without using any data store For example, if the processor executed four instructions per sample, the downconversion and decimation function becomes as follows
LOAD A,PORT ,1 read, seed accum (I virtual coefficient = 1 , Q = 0)
NOP ,waιt for new data
NOP ,waιt for new data
NOP ,waιt for new data
LOAD B,PORT ,Q read, seed accum (I virtual coefficient = 0, Q = 1)
NOP ,waιt for new data
NOP ,waιt for new data
NOP ,waιt for new data S SUUBBTTRRAACCTT AA.,PPOORRTT , read sample, accum (I virtual coefficient = -1, Q = 0)
STORE MEM,A ,save decimated I value for later processmg ,no need to wait for next sample smce it is a 0 coefficient NOP ,waιt for new data
NOP ,waιt for new data
SUBTRACT B,PORT , read sample, accum (I virtual coefficient = 0, Q = -1)
STORE MEM,B ,save decimated Q value for later processing
NOP ,waιt for new data
NOP ,waιt for new data
The above pseudo-code performs a quadrature downconversion and 4 1 decimation on an input data stream It is repeated as in-line code for however many iterations necessary to correspond with a symbol interval For concurrently run processes, the NOP instructions are replaced with instructions for performing concurrent processes, such as moving data or subsequent signal processmg
The above example is implemented m a loop structure when downconversion and decimation is the only function to be performed Alternatively, despreading could be combined with the method where the spreadmg code inverts the sign of accumulation on a chip by chip basis For chips where the spreadmg code is a "1", the above described process leaves the resultmg sample unchanged For chips where the spreading code is a "0", the above process sign inverts the decimated result pnor to performing the STORE operation, or alternatively the LOAD and SUBTRACT functions could be replaced with a LOAD NEGATIVE and ACCUM instruction where the data is sign inverted on the initial read and accumulated on the second sample instead of subtracted The code becomes an m-hne algonthm where the length ofthe algonthm extends to the encompass the received signal spreading code Because multiplication is an associative operation, the downconversion and decimation functions can be performed concurrently even if the downconversion and oversample ratios are different The downconversion ratio is given by the ratio of Fs to Fc which must be 4 1 for this process to function properly
An oversample ratio is given by a ratio of Fs to the frequency of chippmg rate, Fchιp which may be any integer number The present embodiment uses an oversample rate of 4 1, but a 5 1 is used m the multichannel embodunent (discussed later) Table 3 depicts how the associative property of multiplication allows for simultaneous downconvert and despread without the need for coefficient store
Figure imgf000033_0001
Figure imgf000034_0001
Coefficient -less Downconvert & Despread Table 3
As shown in Table 3, for the I data sample, an in-line coded series of accumulate and subtract operation performs the downconversion, despread and decimate function without using coefficients even in the case where the oversample ratio is 5 1
The decimation ratio becomes a straight-forward operation in that the accumulated sum may be stored as an intermediate partial decimation result at any integer number of samples This provides for intermediate decimation results for setting a predetection noise bandwidth similarly for the quadrature data For example, assuming the receiver is already PN aligned with the received signal and demodulating the signal, the 252 samples may be decimated by 42, 1 e . 42 successive samples accumulated and stored as intermediate values, setting the predetection bandwidth to +1- 51 6 kHz This technique has application for programmable processors or hardware state-driven engines where memory limitations prohibit access to enough coefficients (of the PN code) to encompass the received signal spreading code length For example, in a DSP processor with 128 memory locations available for coefficient storage, a spreadmg code length of 63 and an oversample ratio of 4 1, the number of data samples corresponding to a code repetition mterval is 252 Most processors are optimized for a one-to-one coπespondence of data sample to PN code coefficient With only 128 memory locations, there are too few locations to hold 252 coefficients Using this technique, the downconvert, despread and decimation function requires no memory locations for coefficient storage usmg the processing efficiency principles discussed herein
The sampled signal interval is initially decimated to a sampling rate equal to the chipping rate Durmg coarse search mode, before the signal is aligned with the PN code, the sampled data is mixed with the PN code at increments of 1-chιp steps For each spreading code phase position, the coπelation result is bandwidth limited down to the predetection bandwidth so as to determine if that particular spreading code position resulted in a high coπelation result, indicative of code alignment
Because decimation is similar to sampling, the effects of aliasing must be avoided, and therefore a decimation filter is included pnor to the decimation step to ensure that alias images do not destroy system performance Also, this filter should attenuate the desired signal to a mmimal extent because the signal may still contain mismatches in PN alignment In order to maximize correlation gam (process gain), a boxcar averaging filter is used as the decimation filter A boxcar averaging filter has a rectangular time domain window characteristic and therefore maximizes coπelation gain derived near the sample wmdow discontinuities
The boxcar averaging decimation filters implemented in the preferred embodiment are unitary scaled at the window discontinuities In the frequency domam, this is a sine function, which is characteristic of a transfer function of the decimation filter, having a roll-off that is a function of the decimation frequency Because the transfer function will have a rounded shape, signals that are not centered in the middle ofthe transfer function will be attenuated by an amount corresponding to a frequency offset error imparted on the transmit signal by the inaccurate frequency reference employed by the transmitter while forming and transmitting the signal
The present embodiment reduces the effects of decimation loss as a way to keep from incurring as much as 3 9 dB loss for transmitters that have a significant frequency offset error that place the transmitted signal at the edge ofthe detection bandwidth, Nyquist band edge Several approaches for addressing the decimation loss (due to a filtenng effect) are discussed below Digital Frequency Correction and Downconversion
Curve 1402 in Figure 14 represents how a frequency uncertainty eπor imparted on the received signal will reduce a signal power in an initial downconversion and decimation operation Suppose the frequency ofthe transmitted signal is close to the Nyquist band edge, (l e , at a left hand side or right hand side ofthe "transmitter frequency uncertainty range", as illustrated) the receiver will suffer a 3 9 dB loss in signal power, which, among other things, will inhibit the receiver's ability to align the signal After the alignment is performed and the frequency eπor is determined (as will be discussed), a coπection is then made to the downconversion tone so as to shift the frequency of the receiver by ± lA the frequency uncertainty As explained below, the effective signal loss ofthe transmitter will then be represented by either curve 1404 or 1406 depending on whether the signal is shifted up or down in frequency
Once the processor determines that the transmitter frequency eπor exceeds at least 50% of the decimation bandwidth, the downconversion tone is altered by ± 50% of the Nyquist bandwidth, which moves the desired signal from the center to 50% The resultmg effect is that depicted m Figure 14 of moving the decimation center by ± 50% where it can be seen that the worst case decimation loss is limited to 9 dB This shifting operation recovers 3 dB at band edge relative to usmg the center channel alone
The added step of altering the digital downconversion tone adds complexity to the receiver because the downconversion coefficients become a complex tone sampled at the ADC rate The sign ofthe tone is a function of whether the I component leads or lags the Q component Preferably, the tone should be 50% ofthe decimation bandwidth so as to limit loss to 9 dB However, a tone close to 9 dB will yield similar results and may improve computational efficiencies m performing the downconversion By choosing the tone to be evenly divisible into the data sample set, the coefficient set may be represented by only a portion ofthe cycle For example, 252 data samples would be collected if the sample rate were 4 tunes the chip rate for a 63 chip sequence The sample rate is approximately 4 8 MHZ, so a downconversion tone equal to Fs/4 would repeat every 4 samples, thus the coefficient set need only be 4 samples long Only lA cycle ofthe downconversion tone need be stored as coefficients smce the I and Q processes access the same coefficient set in offset sequence The order and the sign of coefficient retrieval completes the downconversion coefficient set with the only restriction being that the % cycle must divide into the data record by an integer
Frequency Offsetting the 1st Local Oscillator
A second approach for correcting the frequency of an incoming signal is to adjust the downconversion frequency in the 1st local oscillator This is accomplished by programming the conventional LO synthesizer of Figure 8 to a new frequency
Changing the Decimation Filter
Yet another method to reduce decimation loss is to increase the computational complexity ofthe digital signal processmg IF filter Rectangular window time averagmg is used up to the final decιmate-by-2 stage and m this stage a sine time response FIR filter is used which has no appreciable decimation loss On the other hand, the FIR filter approach mcreases the computational load and potentially requires a more costly, and more power consummg digital signal processor
Improving Trip Sensitivity to Overcome Band Edge Decimation Loss
The synchronization search process is modifiable m yet another method for reducing frequency uncertamty decimation loss In the previous discussion the digital or RF/IF frequency coπection was made following initial search and trip determination As demonstrated in Figure 14, there exists a significant loss of signal power at the frequency uncertainty band edge This loss also has an adverse impact for signal detection The previous discussion makes the assumption that the signal can first be detected and roughly located so an appropnate correction be made to limit the loss for demodulation It is often true that signal detectors are more sensitive than demodulators, yet it is prefeπed that the detection process have the same signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) advantage as the demodulation process The detection process is enhancable by incoφorating the techniques discussed above into the search process. One method for improving detection at band edge is to subdivide the frequency uncertainty band into a set of center frequencies which set the worst case loss for decimation loss at tolerable limits.
In the present invention as depicted in Figure 14, only two bands are necessary to maintain worst case loss to .9 dB. Lines 1404 and 1406 represent 2 center frequencies which will perform this task. The search process simply makes an adjustment, alternating between these two candidate frequencies. As before, frequency selection can be made either in the digital downconversion or in a RF/IF downconversion step.
The signal leader (or preamble, as will be discussed) or synchronization interval needs to have sufficient duration for all candidate frequencies to be evaluated. Alternatively, both lobes may be simultaneously performed, the two lobes being depicted in Figure
14. In this method, downconversion must be performed digitally to re-use the sampled data twice or however many times is necessary to limit the decimation loss to system requirements. This method trades off computational loading for sensitivity in that the initial decimation process and search function must be duplicated. Upon a trip (i.e., synchronization detection) in one ofthe redundant search processes, the other is suspended and data demodulation proceeds from the offset which produced the trip so as to save computational loading.
Another method for improving band edge sensitivity is averaging, which as discussed later herein, is a technique for improving sensitivity across the predetection bandwidth, including the frequency uncertainty band edge. Optimal sensitivity can be achieved using averaging, band limiting and frequency adjustments as discussed above at the cost of system complexity, transmitted duration and receive algorithmic loading.
In systems where sampled limiters are used, the signal amplitude information is stripped, and thus, except for signals which are at the same relative power as thermal noise, all signals appear in the final coπelation function at the same relative power level. Because of this, a simplified threshold mechanism searches only the maximum and compares it to an absolute threshold, thus skipping a noise estimation process.
Fast Serial Search
Following sampling, downconversion to baseband, and initial decimation, coπelation ofthe signal must be achieved. Coπelation could be accomplished in the first RF mixer by combining the downconversion tone with the PN code. However, this approach would prohibit the use ofthe fast search algorithms disclosed herein, and would require the RF front-end 905 to remain on. More preferably, the correlation (or despreading) task is performed in software at the minimum frequency possible, namely the chipping rate
Direct sequence receivers align the receiver PN code with the transmitter PN code (as represented in the received signal) in order to realize the process gain This search process can be performed senally by evaluating a sampled data set with respect to a given receiver code phase, stepping the code phase by one chip, and repeatmg the process until a power mcrease is noted Smce the information provided by the correlation function is relevant for only a 1 chip width ofthe PN code, the coπelation process must be repeated so as to cover each possible chip location Because the code length in the present embodiment is 63 chips long, a serial search approach would require as many as 63 steps before alignment is attained So as to assist in code alignment, the transmitter transmits, as a first part ofthe direct sequence spread spectrum signal, a leader which is a repeated copy ofthe PN code Figures 15A-B help illustrate this alignment process, where Figure 15A depicts the transmitter power over time For an ASK data modulation (such as on-off-keying for binary channel symbols), the transmitter keys-on at a time 1502, dwells for a time coπesponding to the leader, where the transmitter repeated sends copies ofthe PN code, and then transmits the ASK data at a time 1504
Figure 15B depicts the received power developed in the receiver corresponding to the transmitted signal An mcrease in transmitted power is detected at point 1506 Signal correlation is achieved at point 1508, which is the initial trip event Because the search process steps in one chip mcrements (or multiples thereof), the resultmg trip alignment up to point 1508 will be within Vi chip This degree of alignment is insufficient because a Vz chip offset error represents a 6 dB process gam loss Consequently, to improve performance by further limiting alignment loss, a fine search process follows the course search so as to resolve the code misalignment to within a small fraction of a chip, which is accomplished at a time 1510 Once fine search is performed, the receiver waits until a tune 1512 to begin receivmg the ASK data
Regarding the coarse search process, the present embodiment uses the fast serial search to achieve initial tπp This approach offers a preferred trade-off of performance versus computational complexitv in the first embodiment The fast senal search operates m the receiver in the tune domain by collecting and stoπng one code repetition interval (I e , one portion ofthe leader that corresponds m length to a PN code repetition) At the beginning ofthe coarse search process, the receiver initiates a real-tune clock and then sequentially steps the PN code in one-chip steps agamst the collected and stored data until the portion of received signal has been correlated with all 63 code positions At the end ofthe process, the maximum correlation power is determined along with the associated phase position ofthe PN code that generated the maxima For systems that use an ADC, the tπp condition would require that the maximum value exceed the average ofthe remaining values by a predetermined threshold For systems that use a sampled limiter, the tnp condition may optionally use a predetermined threshold because systems with a sampled limiter are amplitude indifferent The real-time timer is used during the process to count the passing of code intervals so the receiver can resume collecting data at the chip position which produced the maxima, thereby maintaining correlation for a subsequent sample
This fast serial search process has several key advantages for digital receivers as implemented in the present invention Because the receiver only collects one code repetition, the RF front-end may be powered down dunng the subsequent DSP search, savmg battery life Also, the physical collection of data as descnbed in the serial search consumes much ofthe processors computational bandwidth By halting the collection process, the computational bandwidth is recovered in the present invention Even with low- cost DSP processors, the search tune is reduced from 63 code periods to approximately 10 The transmitter leader can therefore be reduced, extending transmitter battery life
To be most effective, the fast senal search, or other search, is performed in less than 14 the time required to transmit the leader so as to ensure detection by the receiver Moreover, assuming that a first sampled bit was collected immediately before the key-on ofthe transmitter, I e , time 1502 m Figure 15A The receiver's search process will not report a tnp event because the receiver's locally generated PN code will be compared to an incomplete portion ofthe transmitters PN code contained in the leader Under these conditions, if the receiver spends more than 14 the leader transmit time performing the search, the next portion ofthe leader sampled by the receiver would he past a mid-point ofthe leader, and thus the receiver would once again fail to synchronize with the transmitted signal because the receiver would be attempting to correlate based on a portion ofthe transmitters PN sequence, contamed at the end ofthe leader, and a beginning portion ofthe ASK data contamed in the transmitted signal Moreover, the new search would extend into the data section of transmission and the receiver would not be ready to demodulate
Figure 16 is a flowchart explaining the steps performed in the fast serial search process The process beings in step 1605 and proceeds to step 1610, where a data record corresponding to a PN code length is captured and stored in memory The process proceeds to step 1615, where an initial PN sequence phase is set to zero The data sample is coπelated agamst the current PN sequence and the result is stored in step 1620, subsequently, the PN sequence phase is mcremented by one m step 1625 A decision block is performed in step 1630 wherem the process determines whether or not the data sample has been correlated agamst all possible PN sequence phase positions If the data sample has not been coπelatcd agamst all possible PN sequence phase positions, the process returns to step 1620 to correlate the data agamst the next PN phase position If the data sample has been correlated against all possible PN sequence phase positions, the process continues to step 1635 wherein the maximum value of the 63 coπelation calculations is determined The process proceeds to step 1640, where the two largest power values are ignored and an average power value is calculated from the remaining 61 values Step 1645 compares the maximum power value with the average power value If the maximum value exceeds the average value by the trip threshold, the process proceeds to step 1650 wherein a trip event is declared and the fine search and demodulation process begins. If the maximum value does not exceed the average value by the trip threshold, the process returns to step 1610 to sample and store another code period of data.
Searching over all 63 code phases prior to making a trip decision provides maximum sensitivity, minimizes the likelihood of failing to detect code alignment, and reporting false trip events . Also, alterative steps include stepping the PN code relative to the data, data relative to the PN code or both, because the relative phase positions is the relevant information sought in the coπelation process.
Fine Search
If the coarse search process yields a trip event, the degree of alignment will be within ± Yi chip of the optimum code phase alignment because the correlation peak is only one chip wide. (If the chip offset were greater than Yz chip, then the adjacent relative phase alignment would result in a higher coπelation result). However, as previously discussed, even fractional code misalignments can result in significant signal loss. For optimal performance, the receiver aligns the two spreading codes as closely as possible, therefore maximizing the signal strength ofthe received spread spectrum signal. So as to more closely align the two spreading codes, the receiver of the present embodiment initiates a fine search process wherein the receiver changes the spreading code by fractional chips and attempts to establish a better code alignment. The processor (ASIC, PLD, microprocessor, or other signal processing apparatus) slips or advances a single sample by 1/4 chip intervals. Because the processor executes several instructions per sample interval, a fraction ofthe 1/4 chip step is achieved by hesitating instruction intervals combined with slipping samples. In the prefeπed embodiment, the processor controls the sample clock to the ADC, so that the processor executes 4 instructions per sample. Therefore, the processor can affect a slip ofthe locally generated PN code relative to transmit PN code (as represented in the received portion ofthe leader) by 1/16 of a chip by inserting a single NOP instruction into the bit- time processing loop. Figure 17 shows a "real world" fine search process, to be contrasted with the ideal coπelation process discussed in reference to Figure 7. The solid triangular line 1705 represents the ideal correlation peak, and the vertical lines 1710 at each fractional chip phase position show the potential signal drift due to instantaneous noise. The dashed line 1720 shows an example of a fine search process in the presence of noise. Conventional fine search algorithms, correlate each relative code position with the data sample, and then choose the code position that generates the highest signal level. In Figure 17, such an algorithm will result in a % chip eπor, resulting in a mean 2.5 dB signal loss; the eπor will resulting from the process detecting that correlation occurred at position 1730 rather than 1725. The standard deviation ofthe noise becomes a significant factor in identifying the true correlation peak. More particularly, a larger standard deviation noise will cause the lengths of the vertical lines 1710 to increase causing greater numbers of coπelation eπors in the serial fine search process.
A conventional method to overcome the effects of instantaneous noise is to dwell on each fine search position for more than one code period and average the values. However, a disadvantage to this method, for battery operated applications, is that increased amounts of transmitter leader time is required to obtain enough samples to average.
A goal of the fine search algorithm in the present embodiment is to obtain the best possible spreading code correlation as quickly as possible. To do this, the receiver ofthe present embodiment dwells on each fractional spreading code position for only one code period, but does not select the strongest signal out ofthe data set. Rather, the present fine sync process uses both chip offset and correlation strength of the entire data set to determine the ideal code alignment. Preferably, application of a center of mass operation on this entire data set improves fine search accuracy. Alternative operations including least squares, curvefitting and convolution may be used, but are less computationally efficient in the present application. By employing the center of mass operation, artifacts of noise are suppressed without having to dwell on each chip position multiple bit times. The function employed in the center of mass operation is represented by:
Figure imgf000041_0001
where X is the x-coordinate ofthe center of mass, Xx is the x-coordinate ofthe relative chip position, and m is the linear signal strength (mass) at each relative chip position. Figure 18 shows the results of three different search processes evaluated over several hundred fine search passes on real data containing noise. These processes slip the phase position of the receiver despreading code by 1/5 chip steps, and seven discrete positions are used (-3/5, -2/5, -1/5, 0, +1/5, +2/5, and +3/5 ) . Because the initial trip can occur within 14 chip ofthe transmitted spreading code, the respective processes at least include data from -14 chip to +14 chip ofthe trip position. Also, the processes may utilize any fractional value, keeping in mind that smaller fractional positions may yield a better result but will require more data samples as well as require more computational power.
The "Peak 7" process searches the 7 different chip phase positions and selects the maximum signal value. The "Peak 7" line 1810 depicts the results when the maximum signal strength value is selected from the 7 chip positions. Note that even though the initial trip sometimes occurs at the best possible code alignment, the fine search process will, on the average, result in a 1.5 to 2.0 dB loss in received signal.
This process has been previously implemented. Inventive methods described as "CM 7" and "CM 7+" algorithms have an effect of averaging out the noise of 7 bit times without dwelling on each chip position for 7 bit times. The "CM 7" process calculates the center of mass ofthe 7 different chip positions and selects the chip value which coincides with the center of mass. This process works well if the initial trip is within 1/5 of a chip of the ideal relative code phase position. However, if the initial trip is greater than 1/5 of a chip from the ideal position, the coπelation loss becomes severe, as seen at the end points of curve 1820 of Figure 18. This shortcoming is addressed in the CM7+ process, explained below.
The "CM 7+" process is a conditional two-step process. If the initial trip and subsequent center of mass calculation results in a fine search adjustment of less than 1/5 chip, then the condition is satisfied. If, however, the center of mass calculation shows that the initial trip error was greater than 1/5 chip, then the process moves the trip location by 2/5 chips, collects new data points out to 1 chip from the initial trip position, and re-calculates the center of mass, by re-using 5 ofthe first correlation sums. The fine search error results in less than a .75 dB loss, as seen on curve 1830 of Figure 18.
Steps in the "CM 7+" algorithm are explained with reference to Figure 19 where the method begins in steps 1905 and then 1910, where an initial PN sequence phase is set to the initial trip phase minus 3/5 of a chip. The process proceeds to step 1915, where one code period of data is taken and stored. The data sample is correlated against the current PN sequence and stored in step 1920; subsequently, the PN sequence phase is incremented by 1/5 of a chip in step 1925. A decision block is performed in step 1930 wherein the process determines whether or not the data sample has been coπelated against all seven fractional phase positions . If the data sample has not been coπelated against all fractional code chip phase positions, the process returns to step 1920 to coπelate the data against the next phase position. If the data sample has been correlated against all fractional phase positions, the process continues to step 1935 wherein the center of mass calculation is performed. The process proceeds to step 1940, where the center of mass result is compared against the initial trip value. If the center of mass indicates that the fine search position is within 1/5 of a chip ofthe coarse search position, then the algorithm proceeds to step 1945 to begin the demodulation process. If the center of mass indicates that the fine search position is more than 1/5 of a chip away from the coarse search position, then the algorithm proceeds to step 1950, where the algorithm recenters the trip location by 2/5 of a chip, collects new data points, and recomputes the center of mass. As stated earlier, other algorithms such as least squares, curve fitting, and convolution can also be used to implement this fine search technique. Center of Mass 9
A variant ofthe fine sync process uses the decimation process to acquire a minimum of data points and gives a reasonable trade-off between accuracy and computational loading Upon an initial trip event identified from the coarse search process, the initial code phase will be withm 14 chip of the ideal code phase position The process, as descnbed below, uses a sample rate (Fs) at 4x the chippmg rate
Once a data sample is acquired, it can be coπelated agamst different phases ofthe spreadmg code, and, if not decimated, the data sample can be coπelated agamst all fractional code phase positions, provided that a fractional resolution of the spreadmg code equals the sampling rate of the data This approach requires storage of a single data sample with a duration equal to the code repetition The initial downconversion and decimation process is performed prior to despreading and the result is a data set containing one element for each chip of the spreading sequence This data set is used m coarse search where all possible combinations ofthe phase of the spreadmg code are used to determine if a trip event occurs, and thus the coarse search step resolution is in integer chip steps
The receiver ofthe present embodiment re-uses the decimation process in the fine search process Multiple data samples are taken at fractional phase offsets so as to calculate the correlation power over the correlation peak This center of mass 9 process is explamed with reference to the flowchart of Figure 20 The process begins in step 2005 and then block 2010 where a first data sample is acquired at a 4 1 multiple ofthe chip rate and then decimated to the chip rate This data sample is coπelated three times in block 2011 with the spreadmg code at - 1 , 0, and + 1 chip offsets from the initial tnp position In step 2012, the spreading code is adjusted by +14 chip from the initial tnp phase position In block 2020 a second data sample is acquired and then decimated to the chip rate This data sample is coπelated twice m block 2021 with the spreadmg code at -% and +14 chip offsets from the initial tπp position In step 2022, the spreadmg code is adjusted by +14 chip from the previously sampled phase position In block 2030 a third data sample is acquired and then decimated to the chip rate This data sample is coπelated twice in block 2031 with the spreading code at -14- and +14 chip offsets from the initial trip position In step 2032, the spreading code is adjusted by +54 chip from the previously sampled phase position In block 2040 a fourth data sample is acquired and then decimated to the chip rate This data sample is coπelated twice in block 2041 with the spreading code at -14 and +% chip offsets from the initial tπp position
In block 2050, the center of mass calculation is performed on the coπelation results from the -1, -VA, -YI, -54, 0, +54, +54, +%, and +1 code phase offsets This calculation is used m step 2051 to establish the code position to receive and demodulate data m block 2052
An alternative process that does not use initial decimation, but rather stores the entire data sample array This method is explamed with reference to the flowchart of Figure 21 where the algonthm beg s in step 2105 and then 2110 where a data record is acquired at a multiple ofthe chip rate and stored for re- use The process continues in step 2111 where this data is despread and power measurement determined for five relative code chip offsets of-1 -, -14, 0, -+14, +14 chips where the 0 chip offset equals the initial trip phase In step 2112, the center of mass is calculated on the coπelation results from the -14, -14, 0, +54 and +14 chip phase offset power measurements From block 2115, if the initial center of mass calculation is within 14 chip from the initial tnp position, the process proceeds to block 2140 wherein the relative phase ofthe receiver code generator is adjusted to the center of mass value From block 2120, if the center of mass calculation yields a miss distance greater than -14 chip from the initial trip position, the algonthm proceeds to block 2121 where the onginal data signal is despread and power measured for -% and -1 chip offset In block 2122, the center of mass is calculated on the coπelation results from the -1, -%, -54, -54 and 0 chip phase offset power measurements The process then proceeds to block 2140 where the relative phase ofthe receiver code generator is adjusted to the center of mass value From block 2130, if the center of mass calculation yields a miss distance greater than +54 chip from the initial tnp position, the algonthm proceeds to block 2131 where the data signal is despread and power measured for +% and +1 chip offset In block 2132, the center of mass is calculated on the correlation results from the 0, +54, +14, +34 and +1 chip phase offset power measurements The process then proceeds to block 2140 where the relative phase ofthe receiver code generator is adjusted to the center of mass value
In some applications it is beneficial to simplify the processes, either due to memory restrictions for holding code or to take advantage of a processor's pipelined architecture Thus, alternatively, steps 2115, 2120, and 2130 may be removed from the process, although m this vanant all possible data pomts must now be calculated This alternative process is explained with reference to Figure 22 where the process begms in step 2205 and then 2210 where a data record is acquired at said multiple ofthe chip rate and stored for re-use The algonthm proceeds to block 2211 where the data is despread and power measured determined for mne relative code chip offsets of -1, -%, -14, -54, 0, +14, +14, +% and +1 chips where the 0 chip offset equals the initial trip phase In block 2212, the center of mass is calculated on the coπelation results from the -1, -34, -14, -14, 0, +14, +14, +% and +1 code phase offset power measurements The process then proceeds to block 2240 where the relative phase ofthe receiver code generator is adjusted to the center of mass value
Receiving OOK Data in a Hard-Limiting DSSS Receiver.
On / Off Keyed (OOK) systems, a subset of ASK modulation systems, use OOK modulation to format transmitted messages, and rely on an ability ofthe receiver to detect the presence or absence of energy coincident with particular bit (or symbol) times This is the extreme case for amplitude modulation where data is encoded linearly or at discrete amplitude steps relative to a peak value Hard-limited receivers are not typically used for ASK systems because hard-limited receivers use a detection mechanism that inherently strips the amplitude information from the signal. Thus, hard-limited systems are mostly used in phase or frequency modulated systems, where the data information is encoded in the phase of a carrier. Nonetheless, because ofthe hard limiting receiver's wide dynamic range, it is desirable to use it in a low-cost receiver to receive transmission from an OOK transmitter.
A transmitter feature of the present embodiment implements on-off-keying by imposing a requirement to not only amplitude attenuate the signals during a "0" state, but also suspend the PN code generator used to spread the transmitted signal as shown in Figure 25, 2510, 2552. In turn, the receiver that uses a hard-limiter will not notice the amplitude key but it will be able to use the code on / code off aspect to make a determination between correlation sum and no coπelation sum. The bit state determination is therefore a function ofthe ability to produce process gain in the receiver.
Because the receiver is relatively indifferent to amplitude changes, it may seem reasonable to modulate only by employing code on / code off, but not varying a power. However, it is presently identified that systems operating near power per unit bandwidth restrictions should not use this approach because removal ofthe code will cause the transmitted naπow band signal to have a higher peak power roughly equal to the process gain. Otherwise, a combination of amplitude and code keying is desired to create a OOK transmitter which operates at controlled power spectral density.
Scalable Signal Acquisition and Synchronization
The present invention has scaleable embodiments that allow for increased system improvement for increase processing power and, perhaps, battery power. Accordingly, the several approaches discussed herein, in some instances, are specialized algorithms to acquire, synchronize, detect a trip condition and subsequently demodulate data using the least amount of computational resources. Processes that appear to be equivalent in function must be compared based on their computational efficiency, and related power draw for a particular application. To this end some processes disclosed herein may appear to be less elegant than known algorithms, but, as is often the case, these known, conventional algorithms presuppose that a certain amount of processing resources and power is available.
Top Level Receive Algorithm
Figure 23 is a flow chart of a top level receiver signal acquisition process, which is applicable to a battery mode of operation where "time to search" is triggered by a wake-up interval timer. The process of Figure 23 is also applicable to continuous search receivers that stay on line continuously where "time to search" merely is a start point in a continuous loop. The process begins in step 2305 arid then step 2310 where the receiver samples and stores one code period of data. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step 2315 where the antenna and/or frequency settings are selected for the subsequent search to allow for settling in the VCO, as will be discussed in reference to Figure 27. Alternatively, if averaging is used, these steps may be delayed until the last sample is taken so as to complete the average. The decision to perform antenna or frequency selection is an optional step and depends on the specific system requirements and architecture. The process continues at step 2325, where a coarse search process is performed. Coarse search may be any of the fast search methods discussed previously, or any known methods.
If time-averaging is used, the process continues to step 2330 through branch 2331 and then branch 2333 is taken, where the steps of 2310 and 2325 are repeated until the proper amount of data has been sampled, stored, and averaged. Averaging is implemented on a single antenna and frequency setting; therefore, step 2315 is not repeated in the averaging algorithm. When sufficient data samples have been taken, control is passed through branch 2332 to decision block 2335 where a trip decision is made based on the process depicted in Figure 28 . If a trip is detected, then the receiver performs the fine search and demodulation processes in step 2340, where the fine search operation uses a center of mass algorithm discussed previously or other known methods. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step 2345, where the process decides whether or not to enter into sleep mode, based upon the receiver type. If the receiver is battery powered, the receiver will either go into sleep mode in step 2350, or return to step 2305 to repeat the signal acquisition process. If the receiver is externally powered, the receiver returns to step 2305. If in step 2335 a trip is not achieved, the process proceeds to step 2355 where the receiver verifies that the acquisition process has been performed for all possible antennas and frequencies. If not, the process returns to step 2310 to collect new data and select another antenna (if necessary) or another frequency (if necessary) 2315. From step 2355, the process proceeds to the sleep decision step 2345 only if all possible antennas and frequency values have been searched. Many possibilities exist for a specific path followed in process of Figure 23, depending on system requirements, transmitter leader length and averaging options. Nonetheless, the flexibility afforded by the scaleable approach for acquisition, trip and demodulation based on system requirements is evident.
Spatial Diversity (Antenna Diversity)
The present transceiver includes redundant receive antennas 901, 903 (Figure 9) so as to offer recourse in overcoming signal fading or shadowing by allowing the antennas 901, 903 to be physically separated and or orthogonally polarized. The receiver utilizes the antennas 901 , 903 in acquisition to select the channel with greatest power for demodulation. Figure 24 depicts the antenna selection process, assuming the coarse search process has already been performed. The fine search process is complete with an optimal phase position calculated at time 2405 and verified at time 2410, all of which being performed using the same antenna. At time 2415 , the alternate antenna is evaluated for reception, using the same PN phase that was selected at the end ofthe fine search process. If the received power on the alternate antenna port (i.e., the opposite port to the primary port on which trip was determined) is greater than that ofthe primary port, the alternate port is selected and demodulation begins during interval 2430. The process is also repeated at various points throughout the data collection during bit periods where known symbols are expected.
Frequency Diversity
To maximize data throughput, transmitters and receivers must overcome the effects of jammers. Many systems use time diversity, or data redundancy, to overcome the effects of instantaneous jammers.
Continuous jammers, or jammers which maintain the same frequency output over long periods of time, are unaffected by time diversity tactics and must be circumvented by other techniques. Systems that use frequency diversity by way of frequency hopping exist, but require the additional components, control, cost and power associated with an agile frequency synthesizer. As will be discussed below, the transceiver ofthe present embodiment uses a frequency diversity scheme in an economical manner that does not force the requirement of a frequency synthesizer in a compatible transmit-only or transceiver device.
Transmitter and Frequency Diversity
Figure 25 is a block diagram of a DSSS transmitter that may be used to communicate with the receiver ofthe first embodiment or may be in the transmitter portion of a transceiver according to the first embodiment. In Figure 25, the transmitter includes a frequency reference source 2502, which is low cost crystal having accuracy of 50 ppm (parts per million) eπor. This example shows one frequency reference for the entire transmitter, clock divider circuit 2504 produces a code clock signal 2506 for a data generator
2508 and a PN generator 2510. The data generator 2508 is implemented by a microprocessor, external source or other data source. The PN generator 2510 is also implemented, although it does not have to be, by the same device as data generator 2508. A Clock divider circuit 2512 produces a diversity clock signal
2514, which is an integer multiple ofthe code clock 2506. The frequency diversity enable signal 2516 controls switch 2518 (implemented as an AND gate), either producing a logic "0" (2520 with diversity disabled) or passing the diversity clock signal (2522 with diversity enabled). The data generator 2508 generates a binary data stream 2524 at baseband and is combined with the PN code 2526 in the XOR gate 2528 so as to produce a waveform spectrum 2530, also at baseband. With frequency diversity enabled, the baseband signal is mixed in a second XOR gate 2532 with diversity enable signal 2522 and low-pass filtered 2534 to produce a signal with spectrum 2538. With frequency diversity disabled and signal 2520 held at a logic "0", the second XOR gate 2532 and LPF 2534 serve as a buffer, producing a signal with spectrum 2536, which is identical to the signal with spectrum 2530. The output of frequency source 2502 is upconverted in upconverstion circuit 2540 to produce an
RF caπier 2542 with a center frequency of about 915 MHZ (plus the frequency error of 2502 multiplied by the upconversion factor of 2540). With diversity disabled, the signal with spectrum 2536 is combined with the caπier 2542 in mixer 2544. This product is band-pass filtered in 2546 to produce a signal with single sine spectrum 2548 with a center frequency of about 915 MHZ. This signal is amplified at 2552 and transmitted from antenna 2554.
With diversity enabled, the signal with spectrum 2538 is combined with the carrier 2542 in mixer
2544. This product is band-pass filtered in 2546 to produce a signal with dual sine spectrum 2550 with a center frequency of about 915 MHZ. This signal is amplified at 2552 and broadcast on antenna 2554.
If frequency diversity is enabled, the generated signal will be as depicted in Figure 26B, with dual images 2601 and 2602 centered at about 915 MHZ. The signal power of either lobe of this signal is 3dB down from the power output ofthe signal from Figure 26A, because the signal power is now distributed in twice the bandwidth as the signal in Figure 26A. With frequency diversity enabled, the receiver may select from either of two frequency components from which to retrieve the data signal. As an alternative, the receiver performs signal searches at all three frequency values, using the algorithm from Figure 27 to cycle through all possible frequency settings. This approach assumes a transmitter that alternates, or coexists with other transmitters, between diversity (Figure 26B) and no diversity (Figure 26 A).
The present receiver includes a select mechanism for selecting one of several receive frequencies. This mechanism is provided for two primary modes of operation. In the first mode, the receiver is tasked to use one of the available frequencies to select transmitters using that frequency band. This allows the receiver to be compatible with pools of transmitters separated by frequency to be selected through receive frequency tasking. The time to switch between frequencies is typically not critical in this mode of operation.
The second mode of operation is intended to capture a transmitter pool (i.e., a group of one or more transmitters) that transmit simultaneously at different frequencies using the previously discussed frequency diversity process. Such transmitters use this diversity technique where the signal is split and separated in frequency by a fixed amount. The receiver must monitor the two (or three) frequencies as part of the acquisition process. Because the frequency selection is integrated into the acquisition process, a timely transition between selection helps minimize transmitter leader time. This mode of operation adds diversity in frequency to increase the probability of data throughput in the presence of intentional or unintentional interference and multipath propagation. If a static interference signal and/or a fade exists at one ofthe transmitted frequencies, the other frequency may be used to demodulate the data. The receiver of the present embodiment uses this technique to improve throughput, quickly alternating search frequencies while processing a previous captured bit interval. By pipelining the process, the frequency transition time can be absorbed thus minimizing the impact on search time.
Figures 27A-D depicts this receive acquisition schedule which includes the antenna and frequency diversity processes discussed above. Figure 27D depicts a transmitted signal and Figures 27A-C depict the receiver process used to acquire the signal. Figure 27A represents different candidate frequencies on which the receiver attempts to acquire the signal; Figure 27B represents the antennas on which the receiver attempts to acquire the signal; Figure 27C represents different samples obtained by the receiver and used by the receiver to determine if the transmitter is presently transmitting.
As shown in Figure 27D, the transmitter presents a leader (i.e., preamble) signal prior to data, where the leader is of sufficient duration to allow the receiver to evaluate all combinations of diversity provided for in the system architecture. As shown in Figure 27C, the receiver samples data at times 2735 for one code period then processes the data using the fast serial search process for a duration 2737, lasting several code periods. The leader is of sufficient length that allows for the receiver to perform successive searches which coincide with all diversity combinations used in the system.
By using the fast search algorithms taught, it is possible that a change in diversity at the transmitter will occur while the receiver is attempting to acquire the signal. Changes to the frequency or antenna may be made and a settling time for frequency change (shown at time 2715) therefore must be absorbed into the receiver's signal acquisition process, as will be discussed.
Time Domain Averaging to improve Coarse Search Sensitivity
Figure 28 depicts the benefit of averaging over successive coπelation processes to improve acquisition sensitivity. Each coarse search 2812, 2814, 2816, 2818 produces a cross correlation of the received signal and the PN code embedded in the receive coefficients, with 2810 being the average value over the previous N multiple searches. This process requires that subsequent samples are phase coherent to each other, meaning that the time relationship of the first sampled data point in each code period is identical. This phase coherency is obtained using a timer and/or counted state processes to ensure zero relative code phase alignment. Only the frequency reference drift is left uncompensated, but this drift is low relative to the time interval of search.
The averaging is performed as a box-car or finite impulse response (FIR) filter structure where the last N symbols are averaged, or the averaging may be performed in an exponential or Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) averaging process where the previous results are decayed and added to a fraction of the current sample. In the present embodiment, an exponential averaging process is used so as to minimize memory requirements because only the cuπent sample plus one decaying average need be maintained. The weight "N", as shown in Figure 28, is 6 where the previous average is multiplied by 5/6 to decay the previous result, the current sample is multiplied by 1/6 and summed to the previous product. The result is stored for future decay and then passed to the trip decision process.
Figure 29 depicts the reduction in false alarm rate for averaging 6 samples in the present single channel receiver embodiment. Curves 2910 and 2920 show the power distribution of noise in a 115 kHz noise bandwidth with and without averaging, respectively. Curves 2930 and 2940 show the power distribution of a -110 dBm signal in 115 kHz noise bandwidth with and without averaging, respectively. Improvement is visualized by comparing a minimized overlap of distributions (2920 and 2940, and 2910 and 2930) which is a measure of false alarm rate and degradation in bit error rate. The mean power for the noise and signal plus noise distributions remain unchanged, yet the deviations are reduced creating a greater miss distance between the minimum "On" and the maximum "Off' distributions.
Averaging is only useful if coordinated with the leader length ofthe transmitter, and in the case of the present signal channel receiver embodiment, each coarse search operation takes less than 12 PN code intervals. Accordingly, averaging over 6 searches produces a maximum benefit after 72 code intervals. Because the leader length is 92 code intervals on the transmitter, this leaves 20 code intervals for fine search, AGC and overhead. In systems where the leader length must be reduced, the averaging time-base may be reduced accordingly. There is an asymptotic diminishing return on investment for averaging. Averaging two noise samples together reduces the noise deviations by 3 dB. To gain another 3 dB, the number of samples must be doubled to 4. Each significant reduction of noise deviations requires a doubling of time. The most effective average is, therefore, the first average and subsequent averages, while helpful, provide diminishing returns. Also, the improvement cannot exceed the mean signal to noise ratio (SNR) at the output ofthe bandpass filter preceding the magnitude computation. While averaging can improve trip sensitivity to overcome the greatest portion ofthe 3.9 dB loss at maximum frequency ambiguity due to decimation loss, the system performance and cost is at odds according to a trade off of sensitivity for leader length in the transmitter and power/computation loading in the receiver.
Increased Data Rate Using Partial Code Correlation A "scalable" feature ofthe present invention is an adjustable data rate . Data rate may be increased in the receiver while using partial decimation coupled with data modulation transitions in the transmitter that occur at fractional PN code boundaries. A standard modulation method for transmitting data in the present inventive system is OOK where a data value "1" is represented by the presence of signal for a repetition ofthe PN code and a data value "0" is represented by the absence of signal for the same interval
An alternative data modulation method is BPSK data where the signal is present for both "1" and "0" data symbols, yet the earner phase is inverted 180 degrees to delineate the data state In this data modulation method, the correlation sum will either sum positively or negatively depending on the arbitrary earner relationship at acquisition The data " 1 " is assigned the state dunng the preamble (leader) so that the PN sequence will be transmitted "in the clear" A Costas loop or other techmque for translating the received phase normal to that ofthe phase detector is used to create a maximum data miss distance and therefore maximize SNR
Alternatively, data is differentially encoded (DBPSK)whιch simplifies the mcoherent reception problem In a differentially encoded signal, the phase mversion event marks a data state where the absence of inversion marks the alternate bit state
In either OOK, BPSK or DBPSK system, the data rate can be increased by creatmg artificial symbol boundanes within the PN code The present transceiver system uses a 63 chip PN code length to represent a standard symbol, and therefore provides a data symbol (or data bit) rate of approximately 19 2
Kbits/second The data rate can be effectively doubled by arbitrarily assigning the first 31 5 chips to one data symbol, and the second 31 5 chips to the second The transmitter must perform the BPSK or DPSK phase inversion at the 31 5 chip boundary or amplitude key the signal, and the receiver must perform the correlation process by parts (I e , treatmg the first 31 5 chips separate from the subsequent 31 5 chips)
Boundary conditions are relatively arbitrary and data rates may be mcreased at any fractional code interval provided the rate divides evenly mto the code repeat rate or a multiple ofthe code repeat rate For example, it may be desirable to send three symbols over two code repeat intervals The transmitter and receiver need only have a synchronization method, or other prearranged agreement, to know when to expect phase mversion or keying ofthe earner
Regulatory restnctions (such as Federal Communication Commission, FCC, restnctions) may place a practical limit to this techmque, because the regulations require a mimmum process gain for systems to operate as a spread spectrum systems, which are allowed to use special signal bands However, the process gam is typically specified at the data symbol rate, and thus, by dividing the 63 chip PN code by 2 effectively loses 3 dB of process gam for each symbol, and if the PN code is further divided, the system may no longer be entitled to "spread spectrum" status Furthermore, the effect of the system process gam on other facets ofthe system also bear on mcreasing the data rate, including coπelation loss due to filteπng, sampled limiting or noise bandwidth Figures 30A-F depict a PN code repetition interval and the 63 chips collected at 4 times the chip rate, and respective symbol intervals at predetermined fractions ofthe 63 chips. A total of 252 samples represent the data collected for one PN pattern generated in the present invention. Assuming the data is coπelated with the receiver PN code, Figure 30A depicts the maximum process gain available for a symbol rate equal to the code repeat rate resulting in 17.99 dB of process gain at a 19.2 kbits/sec data rate. Figure
30B depicts the maximum process gain per symbol for a symbol rate equal to twice the code repeat rate. This effectively doubles the data rate to 38.4 kbits/sec with a coπesponding process gain maximum of 14.98 dB. Figure 30C depicts three symbols per code interval yielding a data rate of 57.6 kbits/sec with a maximum process gain of 13.22 dB. Figure 30D depicts four symbols per code interval yielding a data rate of 76.8 kbits/sec with a maximum process gain of 11.97 dB. Figure 30E depicts five symbols per code interval yielding a data rate of 96.0 kbits/sec with a maximum process gain of 10.97 dB. Figure 30E depicts six symbols per code interval yielding a data rate of 115.2 kbits/sec with a maximum process gain of 10.21 dB.
Beyond 6 symbols per code interval the process gains drops below 10 dB which is the minimum allowable process gain for spread spectrum systems operating in the 902-928 MHZ band per FCC regulations. However, aside from the FCC regulation, more that 6 symbols may be achieved, or even a composite of different symbol lengths may be used for certain applications or users that require greater data rates/or symbol rates. Similarly, adaptations to the receiver mechanisms may be made so that multiple PN codes may be used to lower data rate, but increase processing gain, and therefore, robustness of selected transmitted signals.
Frequency Tracking during Data Demodulation
Data demodulation may proceed after acquiring spreading code synchronization ofthe receiver to the transmitter. If the transmitter derives its spreading code sequence from the same frequency reference as its RF carrier, it is sufficient for the receiver to track the transmitter carrier so as to maintain spreading code synchronization throughout data demodulation. Also, to demodulate a phase modulated signal, it is prefeπed to remove the effect ofthe carrier frequency eπor between transmitter and receiver.
One way to remove the effect ofthe carrier frequency eπor between transmitter and receiver is to use conventional DBPSK demodulation augmented with frequency error coπection. According to this approach, assume the received signal is despread, downconverted to baseband and decimated to a bandwidth greater than or equal to the frequency eπor as previously discussed. This is shown as 3100 in
Figure 31 with 6 output samples C(n') 3105 per code period. Choi, Z. Y, Lee, Y. H, "Compensating Frequency Drift in DPSK Systems via Baseband Signal Processing", IEEE Transactions on Communications Vol. 45 No. 8, August 1997, pp 921-924, the contents of which is incoφorated herein by reference, discusses this techmque using one sample per code period as unduly limiting the frequency range that can be coπected A conventional DBPSK demodulator 3110 as taught in Frerkmg, M , "Digital Signal Processing and Communications Systems", Van Nostrand Remhold, 1994, pp 433-435, 448-450, is shown in Figure 31 The bit rate being scaleable by the parameter L in the DBPSK demodulator 3110 R (kbit/s) L
19 2 6
38 4 3
57 6 2
115 2 1 In reference to Figure 31, a product of the present bit samples C(n') 3105 are multiplied by a complex conjugate of the previous bit samples and decimated to one sample C(n) 3115 in the DBPSK demodulator so as to convert the frequency error to a static phase eπor θ The complex sample Cθ(n) 3125, whose angle is the static phase error θ, averaged over the previous M bits, is estimated in a decision feedback loop 3120 The static phase eπor θ is canceled before making the demodulated data bit decision bιt(n) 3130 as shown m Figure 31 , and is accomplished by multiplying C(n) by the complex conjugate of
Cθ(n) and taking the sign ofthe real part ofthe product to make the bit decision bιt(n) 3130 The Cθ(n) average is updated with C(n) multiplied by the sign of bιt(n) This approach enables the conventional DBPSK demodulator to work in the presence of frequency eπor The computational burden is low and does not increase the cost ofthe DSP over that required for an ASK data demodulator An alternative way to remove the effect ofthe caπier frequency eπor between transmitter and receiver is to null the error with an automatic frequency control (AFC) loop Off-the-shelf components that implement the digital signal processor 3280, such as a DSP integrated circuit (IC), a general puφose micro-controller (uC) IC, general puφose digital logic, or a custom digital IC or any combination of these, can be adapted with appropriate software to implement the phase and/or frequency detector and loop filter A block diagram of a LO synthesizer usmg the DSP 3280 is shown in Figure 32 With the switch
3205 in position 1, the synthesizer includes a stable reference frequency source (such as a quartz crystal oscillator) which is the master clock for the DSP 3280, a downconvert despread and decimate function 3210 as previously disclosed, a frequency detector 3220, a loop filter 3230, a voltage controlled oscillator 3250 and feedback divider 3255 The output 3260 ofthe synthesizer is a signal at the desired frequency A digital to analog converter (DAC) 3240 is placed between the loop filter 3230 and the VCO 3250 to provide an analog control signal to the VCO 3250 Low cost DACs 3240 are available in a dual 8-bit converter package where fine converter steps are set to 1/64 ofthe coarse converter steps The loop filter algonthm 3230 first adjusts the coarse converter to the coarse frequency error 3232 and then the fine converter to the fine frequency error 3233 dunng frequency control loop settling After the LO is locked to the receiver frequency reference, the receiver is reconfigured by changing the switch 3205 to position 2 in Figure 32. The receive antenna 3201 feeds the conventional analog RF front end 3203 which includes an analog to digital converter (ADC) at its output. The downconvert coefficients in block 3210 are the computationally efficient Fs/4 set, as previously discussed, and thus a computational burden is minimal and may be shared by other receiver functions. The frequency locked loop drives the coarse and fine frequency eπors 3232, 3233 between the transmitter and receiver and hence the decimation loss to zero.
Figure 33 illustrates part of a frequency detector implementation as was shown as the decimating frequency detector 3220 in Figure 32, and preferably uses the output of the digital down conversion operation, decimated to 12 samples per spreading code period. The formula
_ Λ _ IQ - QI is the well-known result that signal frequency is the first derivative of signal phase with respect to time. (The over dot signifies first derivative with respect to time.) The continuous time first derivative is approximated by the discrete time first difference 3320 as is known in the DSP art. For the frequency detector to function without error, a group delay of the first difference must be independent of frequency and must equal a group delay ofthe decimated I and
Q samples. This is accomplished by the structure 3310 shown in Figure 33, where the values In are the I samples from block 3210. The 12 1 and Q samples per code period are initially decimated by 2 as shown by the "+" sign in brackets combining adjacent In samples. Figure 33 is also representative of a similar structure for the Q samples. The computations may done as the I and Q samples are acquired so as to conserve DSP memory. When the frequency detector is preceded by a sampled limiter, the denominator term 1 2 + Q 2, which is the signal power, is constant and can be set to one without loss of functionality. The formula
ω = ∑ (IQ - QI)
computes the frequency computation ω and the decimation by combining the intermediate results of 3310 summing over a code period. This causes the frequency detector to have the same noise performance as the data demodulators previously discussed.
Figure 34 is a block diagram of a very low cost DAC that includes a coarse 3401 charge pump and a fine 3403 charge pump (controlled current source) driving a capacitive voltage divider 3405. In this DAC the output voltage is proportional to the charge on the capacitors The "Charge Control" logic 3410 turns on a charge pump for a predetermined time interval required to deposit or remove a particular charge on the capacitors 3405 This produces an output voltage proportional to the frequency eπor 3415 computed by the loop filter The charge estimate logic 3420 keeps track ofthe charge on the capacitors To conserve power m a battery operated device, the power to the synthesizer is cycled on and off Dunng a power-off event, the estimated charge on the capacitors is saved in non-volatile memory During a power-on event, the estimated charge is retπeved from non-volatile memory and used, as will be discussed, to replace the charge on the capacitors that was present pnor to the power-off event The recharge to estimate logic 3430 and the charge control logic 3410 restore the charge on the capacitors by driving the respective current sources 3401 and 3403 for predetermined periods of time corresponding with the estimated charge values stored m memory Then the frequency locked loop is activated while minimizing the power-on settling time ofthe LO synthesizer because the charges where restored prior to the frequency locked loop becoming activated
A third way to remove the effect ofthe caπier frequency error between transmitter and receiver is to control the first LO VCO 3250 (Figure 32) in a Costas earner recovery loop for BPSK demodulation
This is shown in Figure 32 where the Costas phase error detector is substituted for the frequency detector 3220 The downconvert coefficients are the computationally efficient Fs/4 set The computational burden is minimal and some ofthe diagram blocks in Figure 32 may be shared by other receiver functions
A fourth way to remove the effect ofthe earner frequency eπor between transmitter and receiver uses the Costas earner recovery loop for BPSK demodulation This shown m Figure 32 with the frequency detector 3220 replaced with a Costas phase eπor detector The digital down conversion coefficients in conjunction with the downconvert and decimate function 3210 previously discussed in reference to Figure 32, form a numeric controlled oscillator (NCO) The DAC 3240 is fed a constant frequency setting and the loop filter 3230 outputs 3232, 3233 control the down conversion coefficients Some ofthe diagram blocks in Figure 32 may be shared by other receiver functions According to this approach the NCO must generate arbitrary frequencies for the downconvert tone so the computational efficiencies discussed previously may not be as prevalent
A fifth way to remove the effect ofthe earner frequency eπor between transmitter and receiver is to measure the frequency error using the frequency detector 3220 shown in Figure 32 An additional computation downconverts the decimated I and Q signals from downconvert and despread and decimate block 3210 to zero frequency error in a feedforward aπangement prior to DBPSK demodulation These steps add computational complexity Multi Channel Receiver
A second embodiment ofthe present mvention is directed to a multi channel transceiver, having a receiver and transmitter that provides enhanced system sensitivity and performance relative to the single channel transceiver ofthe first embodiment, although requmng additional digital signal processing power than the smgle channel transceiver ofthe first embodiment
The multi channel transceiver contains several common components with the single channel transceiver ofthe first embodiment In particular, the multi-channel transceiver includes the antennas 901, 903, RF front end 905, transmitter 929, associated antenna 931, and low performance receiver time reference 927 of the single channel receiver, as discussed in Figure 9 Differences, however, will be descnbed with respect to the digital signal processmg section 908 ofthe single channel receiver m Figure
9, and these differences, as well as other functions for enhancing performance, are discussed below
As discussed, the smgle channel receiver compensates for a frequency ambiguity ofthe transmitted signal by using a 115 kHz predetection bandwidth so as to be assured of capturing the transmitted signal therein However, as discussed previously, the wider bandwidth caused a sensitivity loss, as compared with a conventional receiver that does not attempt to compensate for transmitter frequency uncertainty and therefore uses a detection bandwidth that is commensurate in size to a signal bandwidth Like the single channel embodiment, the multi-channel receiver (actually transceiver, but for simplicity referred to as a receiver) includes a baseband processmg stage that is sufficiently wide to account for the transmitter frequency uncertamty range, although the multi-channel receiver offers improved sensitivity by further subdividing the frequency ambiguity bandwidth mto smaller overlapping bandwidths, each of which match the bandwidth ofthe desired signal
In order to determine which ofthe channels actually contains the signal, the multi-channel receiver mcludes a channel selection mechanism that selects one of a plurality of smaller bandwidths in order to acquire the spread spectrum signal and demodulate the data contained therein The multi channel receiver, therefore, offers slightly better performance than the single channel receiver of the first embodiment because at least one ofthe channels will capture the signal, and that channel will have a bandwidth that more closely approximates a bandwidth ofthe signal
The multi channel receiver uses a multi-bit ADC 3504 that serves the same function as the single bit converter in the single channel receiver, in that it digitizes the analog signal mto a series of digital samples, however the ADC 3504 represents the digital samples in multi bit words for subsequent processing in the baseband processor Because the ADC 3504 has hmited dynamic range (I e , a range from lowest signal representable by the ADC 3504 to the highest signal representable by the ADC 3504), an automatic gain control AGC mechanism 3502, as depicted on Figure 35, is used to adjust the incoming signal from the RF front end (similar to the RF front end 905 of Figure 9) to fall within the dynamic range ofthe ADC 3504 Keeping the received signal within the dynamic range of the ADC 3504 prevents the signal from being "clipped" (l e , causing the ADC to perform a non-hnear operation on the signal) if the signal is too high, and prevents the signal from bemg "swamped" by quantization noise generated by the ADC 3504, if the received signal is too low The AGC mechanism 3502 is shown as an adjustable attenuator having an AGC control input that is controlled by a processor
Figure 35 also shows a quadrature downconvert and decimate operator similar to 909 in Figure 9, although processor 3530 depicts the mechanisms used for creating the downconversion and decimation coefficients used m the multi-channel receiver Tone generator 3532 generates a tone at frequency (Fc) equal to an IF center frequency (Fc) ofthe received signal The tone generator 3532 feeds phase shifter
3534 so as to impart a 90 degree phase shift and thus provide a quadrature tone These m-phase and quadrature tones serve as I and Q downconversion tones for the incoming signal sampled by the ADC 3504 Each downconversion tone is mixed with the PN code generator 3536, which has been spectrally compressed with a filter 3538 and mixed m mixers 3540 and 3542 so as to create a downconversion and despreading coefficient table that is precalculated and stored in semiconductor memory m the DSP processor
Mixers 3512 and 3522 perform the downconversion and despread process using the signal from the ADC 3504 and the quadrature downconversion despreading signal from the precalculated look-up table stored in memory The resulting signal is a quadrature, baseband, despread signal passed to low pass filters 3514 and 3524 and decimated in downsampling operators 3516 and 3526 to lower the signal sample rate pnor to DC (0 Hz) removal in DC removal mechanisms 3518 and 3528 The resulting signal is a despread downconverted and decimated representation of the sample signal received at the input of the quadrature downconversion, despread and decimation process
The signal processmg mechanism depicted in Figure 35 has sufficient processmg power to perform either a slow senal search, or a fast senal search, as long as the data record for one code repetition interval is stored in memory and correlated agamst all possible combinations ofthe PN code generated locally m PN code generator 3536 To this end, the decimation efficiencies previously discussed may also be employed herem
As shown in Figure 35, the sample rate (Fs) ofthe ADC is 6 0 MHZ which differs from the single channel sample rate of 4 8 MHZ The prefeπed over sample rate ofthe multi-channel receiver is a 5 1 ratio relative to the chipping rate of 1 2 MHZ which sets the sample rate at a slightly higher frequency The over sample ratio is immaterial to the operation ofthe device and only sets the requirements for the anti-aliasing filter preceding to the ADC Accordingly, a subsequent descnption for the multi-channel receiver will be based on a 5 1 over sample ratio The present mventors have identified that by precalculating the hybrid coefficients, a coefficient lookup table may enable the downconvert, despread and decimate process to be implemented m very modest DSP components that are presently available
The final process step depicted m Figure 35 is DC removal, and is performed by DC removal mechanisms 3518 and 3528 that remove undesirable effects of a voltage bias introduced at an analog signal side ofthe ADC 3504 By canceling this DC component, as discussed below, the present multi-channel receiver may use a low precision voltage reference at the ADC 3504, compensating in real-time in firmware This further reduces hardware complexity and cost in realizable systems at a very small computational loading cost
Analog to Digital Converter DC Removal
ADC devices typically have an AC coupled input with a voltage reference set by precision resistors and active components Dπft in the resistors due to agmg and temperature will vary the reference voltage and center point, creating a DC bias in the incoming data stream ADC bias on the signal will be mteφreted as a CW jammer in the system, exactly centered in the IF, and will be translated to the Nyquist extremes (0 and Fs/2) This creates an elevated noise floor and will decrease radio sensitivity if left uncoπected
Traditional DC removal techniques are implemented in firmware and calculate a mean of the sampled data and subtract the mean from each data sample This process works adequately, yet requires that each data sample be acted on by a math function prior to any signal processmg This roughly doubles the computational loading for processing a data sample
The present multi-channel receiver performs DC removal at a later point in the signal processing, removing the need to perform the math function at the sample rate In reference to Figure 35 , DC removal is performed in operators 3518 I and 3528 Q, not at pomt 3508, and thus performs DC removal on downconverted, decimated and despread samples The multi-channel receiver performs a despread-and- decimate function on the raw data, reducing the number of samples by the decimation ratio of decimators
3516 and 3526 as shown in Figure 35
The incoming data is preferably sampled at 5 times the chip rate such that 315 (315 = 63 x 5) samples per bit interval are collected and are subjected to DC compensation The signal is decimated by 21 to produce 15 quadrature samples per bit period, yielding a Nyquist-bandwidth frequency uncertamty of 288 kHz, of which only 120 kHz is of interest Removing the DC component from the input data following the decimation reduces the loading from 315 math operations to 30 ( 15 I terms and 15 Q terms) Decimation often implements an averagmg function, but instead of averaging, the decimation process can instead compute the sum This introduces an eπor factor that will be proportional to 1/N where N is the decimation ratio. For low-end processors, ignoring the divide-by-N to compute a true average may result in an overflow in the processor, but this can be avoided by judiciously scaling coefficients, or incoming data, or using sufficient bits in the accumulation process to hold the worst case sum. The decimation (summing) process can be expressed as 15 multiply-accumulate processes against independent data and coefficient sets. Each decimation block / can be expressed as:
21
DECOUT, = ∑ D, (n) C, (n) n=1 where D,(n) represents 21 ADC data words and C,(n) represents the corresponding 21 coefficient words. The result is a scalar value representing one of 15 downsampled data points per I and Q processor. Because a DC offset value is present in the samples, the term D,(n) contains the sampled data plus a constant, A, added to each data point.
Figure imgf000059_0001
The decimation scalar is distorted by this constant, A, expressed as:
21
DECOUT, = Σ [D, (n) + A] C, (n) n=1
Because the coefficients are unchanging (stored in ROM), they can be treated as constants and the following simplification is possible:
DECOUT , = Σ [D, (n) C , (n) + AC , (n)]
21 21
DECOUT = ∑ D (n) C (n) + A Σ C. (n) n=1 1 ' n=1 *
21
DECOUT, = AK, + Σ D, (n) q (n)
DC Despread/Despread
Removal Block
The new constant K, represents the sum of the coefficients for the decimation block. As the decimation block boundary is arbitrary, a non-zero mean for the decimation block acts as a multiplier for DC offset if a correction is not performed. The product AK, must be compensated within each decimation block if the computation is to be coπect.
Each I and Q decimation block therefore has an independent K scalar multiplier that magnifies DC. A mean measure ofthe DC component is needed so as to complete the decimation coπection. To this end, a number of random sampled data points are averaged for each bit interval to produce an estimate ofthe mean. More particularly, in the present embodiment, 16 random ADC data points per code period are averaged to compute a mean. The "code period" mean is then time-averaged over an the most recent 8 code periods to calculate a running approximation of A.
The summation of each decimation coefficient block (K,) is computed at a compile time and provided as a lookup table. The time-averaged mean (A) is multiplied with each ofthe I and Q coefficient sums (K,) to create 30 DC removal products (AK,) which are subtracted from their respective I and Q decimation results.
Optimization of Coefficients and Implementation for Channelized Receivers
A final bandwidth in a receiver must match the information bandwidth to achieve maximum sensitivity. The present multi-channel receiver embodiment uses overlapped channel filters to achieve an optimal signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). The data sampled at the ADC 3504 is despread and partially decimated to a point where the decimated signal bandwidth is at least as great as the frequency uncertainty of the transmitter (greater to reduce decimation loss at band edge, as was discussed). The receiver next sends the partially decimated data into a bank of channel filters to complete the decimation process and make the decimation bandwidth equal to the signal bandwidth.
The channel filters may be implemented using a fast Fourier transform (FFT) or discrete Fourier transform (DFT), finite impulse response (FIR) filter or infinite impulse response (IIR) filter or other similar transform that band-limits the data signal. Figure 39 depicts the channel implementation method where channel filters are implemented using a DFT. By spacing the channel filters non-uniformly, the between- channel roll-off intercept can all be made to be equal in absolute power to achieve better performance across the entire frequency uncertainty of interest. Moreover, aπanging the respective channel filters in the frequency uncertainty bandwidth in a way that the intercept points between any two channels is limited to a fixed number, say 1.5, dB, then there will be a lowered risk that the signal may be missed because it occuπed in a "gap" between adjacent channels. For this reason, a DFT is prefeπed over an FFT because an FFT provides uniform channel spacing that is equal to the channel bandwidths. If an FFT is used, the between-channel roll-off adds 3.9 dB of loss to the decimation loss.
Signal processing efficiencies are realizable by using channel filters that are symmetrically spaced about 0 Hz. Because each channel filter is implemented as a complex vector multiplication, the negative channel can be implemented using intermediate components of the positive channel, as will be expressed using complex (real and imaginary numbers) expressions. The input data stream may be represented as:
Data = A +jB, where "A" and "B" represent vector components of sampled data. In this case, the vector holds 1 code period of sampled data partially decimated down to a sampling rate greater than 2 times the frequency uncertainty. The channel filter coefficient is atone represented by the complex vector C + jD. The positive channel filter becomes the product of these two tones.
+CF = (A + jB) * (C + jD) = (AC - BD) + j(BC + AD) The negative channel filter has the same offset frequency about 0 Hz as the positive channel filter. It therefore has the same coefficients as the positive filter, but the imaginary term is sign reversed represented as C - jD, and so the negative channel filter becomes the product of these two tones. -CF =(A + jB) * (C - jD) = (AC + BD) + j(BC - AD) While calculating each channel filter, the intermediate product terms AC, BD, BC and AD are temporarily saved. In the case ofthe 15-point channel filters implemented in the channelized embodiment, each product term represents 15 multiply-accumulate instructions . The total channel filter therefore takes
60 multiply-accumulate instructions, plus 2 add or subtract operations to complete a complex vector result. The negative channel filter need only perform the 2 add or subtract operations, thus saving the 60 multiply- accumulate instructions. The prefeπed embodiment employs this technique to maximize the number of usable overlapped channels . Adding more channels reduces the between-channel losses and more efficiently utilizes processor computational bandwidth. This technique enables the realization of many channels in a very modest digital signal processor.
Figure 36 depicts a signal processing mechanism that implements the above-described symmetrical channel filter efficiencies, for realizing a single pair of channel filters, symmetric about 0 Hz. Other mechanisms are used for calculating the other symmetrical channel filter pairs. As seen in Figure 36, signals 3602 and 3604 represent the I and Q decimated data streams of a baseband signal. A frequency generator 3606 and delay element 3608 (i.e., a phase shifter) generate the frequency offset for both the positive and negative frequency channels. Multiply operators 36M1 through 36M4 generate the product terms 36P1 through 36P4 respectively by multiplying signals 3602 and 3604 with inphase and quadrature frequency offsets produced by frequency generator 3606 and delay element 3608, as shown. The product terms 36P1-36P4 are decimated by lowpass filters 36F1 through 36F4 and then decimated by 15 in the downsampling elements 36D 1 through 36D4 so as to produce the signals AC, BD, BC, and AD. The signals AC, BD, BC, and AD are then either added or subtracted in elements 36A1 through 36A4 to produce the intermediate values that will be used to determine the signal power in the respective symmetric channel filters. These intermediate values are squared in squaring operators 36S1 through 36S4 and then combined in adders 3614 and 3616 to produce both the positive and negative channel filter outputs for a particular frequency offset.
Similarly, computational efficiencies are realized in the implementation ofthe center channel filter (i.e., 0 Hz offset). The center channel filter is the most straight forward to implement because it may be noted that for a 0 Hz frequency offset, as noted in Figure 36, the quadrature component ofthe sinusoidal transform may be constant 0 while the in-phase component may be constant 1. Thus, half of the product terms go to 0 while the other product term is the data itself (multiplied by 1). The 0 Hz channel filter therefore becomes the sum ofthe squares ofthe decimated in-phase and quadrature data.
Figure 37 illustrates a center frequency channel determination mechanism that receives the I and Q decimated data streams, 3702 and 3704 respectively, and applies the same to lowpass filters 37F1 and
37F2 and decimation blocks 37D1 and 37D2 so as to produce single data points. These single data points are squared in squaring operators 37S1 and 37S2 and then added in adder 3706 to produce the center channel output.
The puφose for employing the decimation filter is to attenuate image frequencies that exist above the Nyquist frequency. According to the filter roll-off, these image frequencies are rejected by at least 13 dB. However, the decimation loss with regard to transmitter frequency error is the loss across the center ofthe main lobe ofthe sine function. Figure 38 is a graph illustrating an amount of decimation loss for the transmitter frequency uncertainty range as a function of percent of Nyquist bandwidth. When a signal of interest 3803 approaches the band edge of the Nyquist bandwidth 3802 or 3804, up to 3.9 dB of decimation loss can be expected, as shown.
The multi-channel receiver performs decimation to reduce the data rate prior to channel filter implementation. For a channelized radio, the optimal decimation would bring the Nyquist bandwidth down to equal the transmitter frequency uncertainty at a cost of significant decimation loss. Maximizing decimation means that each channel filter performs its function on the minimum of data points. Relaxing the decimation increases the channel filter computational loading, yet provides relief against decimation loss.
For channelized digital receivers, the sampled data is processed to create overlapping filters that span the frequency uncertainty. The sensitivity of each channel filter is set by the bandwidth ofthe channel filter and the total decimation loss. The ideal channel filter would be performed at the maximum data rate, thus suffering no decimation loss. This is not practical, in systems having limited computational resources, as is the case with the present multi-channel receiver. Accordingly, the realization ofthe present multichannel receiver performs a partial initial decimation, lowering the effective bandwidth and associated data rate prior to channelization. Thus, when scaling the multi-channel receiver to provide a most sensitive performance, samples are made at 5 times the chipping rate, and decimated by 21 so as to achieve a pre- channel filter Nyquist Bandwidth of ± 144 kHz Subsequent overlapping channel filters continue the decimation process so that the noise bandwidth ideally matches the signal bandwidth The initial decimation brings the uncertainty down only far enough to make it feasible to implement enough channel filters to span the frequency uncertainty of interest The non-uniform overlapped channel filters shown in Figure 39 span the transmitter frequency uncertainty of Figure 38, shown between pomts 3806 and 3808 Because the individual filters have non- uniform spacing (I e , non-uniform with respect to the channel centers) the between-channel loss can be controlled to create a worst case system loss of 1 4 dB (as illustrated by the dashed line 3903) at cross- point 3908 inclusive of decimation and between-channel loss The curve 3902 of Figure 39 represents the signal loss due to initial decimation ofthe signal from 6 MHZ to 288 kHz and is the same as line 3801 as depicted m Figure 38 Curve 3902 coπesponds to the top of lme 3801 (Figure 38) between points 3806 and 3808 Channel filter 3904 is shown offset from the center channel by -59 65 kHz and represents the negative-most channel spanning the transmitter frequency uncertamty If the signal of interest is located in the center of this channel filter 3904. the power loss of the signal at 3906 is entirely due to initial decimation However, if the transmitted signal is located close to the intercept point 3908, the additional signal loss is due to between-channel roll-off
Alternatively, a set-on channel filter may be used to further reduce system loss due to filter shape Set-on channel filter 3910 is used to eliminate or reduce the effects of between-channel loss, where the set- on channel filter has vanable center frequency that may be moved to be centered overtop of a signal, once the signal is detected Following a tnp event m one ofthe static channels, the processor implements an inteφolation mechanism that inteφolates a power m two adjacent channel filters so as to determine a best estimate of actual frequency offset The set-on channel filter is subsequently steered to exactly match the desired signal center frequency, thus removing any channel filter roll-off Total system loss is therefore hmited to the decimation loss Figure 39 depicts the set-on filter as a dashed line 3910 which recovers the roll-off loss between two fixed channels
Fast Search in Multi-Channel Receiver
The pnnciples taught for fast senal search in the single channel receiver embodiment work equally well for the present multi-channel receiver embodunent In addition, the present mventors have developed frequency domain algorithms for computing a fast correlation function as will be discussed
Fast Frequency Domain Coarse Search
An alternative search method uses a frequency domam parallel coπelator 4000 shown in Figure 40 Correlation is performed by calculating the Woodward radar ambiguity function Aχγ(τ,v) = ∑ (n-τ)x(n)eJ2 π vn
N
The ambiguity function is the received signal energy as a function of spreading code phase τ and carrier frequency shift v between transmitter and receiver. The receiver is adjusted by the code phase and carrier frequency shift that results in greatest received signal energy so as to acquire synchronization with the transmitted signal. A size ofthe phase step in the search method is one code chip and a size of the frequency shift step is the frequency ofthe code repetition.
When the number of frequency shift steps is smaller than the number of phase steps to be covered, a frequency domain technique is computationally efficient. This is illustrated in Figure 40 for 7 frequency shift steps and 63 phase steps. The process steps are as follows:
Step 1. A real input fast Fourier transform (FFT) 4010 is performed on an input record 4005 of one period ofthe reference code. The 63 output (frequency) points centered on 0 Hz are saved in memory and the remaining output points are zeroed, which results in a reference code 4014 being filtered by an ideal low pass transfer function 4012. This computation is perfoπned only once.
Step 2. The received signal is preferably sampled at the rate of 5 samples per spreading code chip (or 4 may be used as well). A real input fast Fourier transform (FFT) 4020 is performed on an input record 4015 one code period long.
Step 3. A circular indexing shift operation of v -fs/44030 is performed on the output points 4024 so as to downconvert from the IF to baseband, and the resulting 63 output (frequency) points 4034 centered on 0 Hz are saved. The remaining output points are then zeroed, which results in an ideal low pass filtered baseband received signal at a frequency shift v.
Step 4. These 63 frequency points 4034 are multiplied in a multiplier 4040 by the complex conjugate 4045 ofthe 63 reference code frequency points 4014. An inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) operation 4050 is performed on the product, and the result is a slice of the ambiguity function at one frequency shift v.
Step 5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated for each frequency shift so as to complete the computation of an ambiguity function 4060, and from this result the receiver can be synchronized using the methods disclosed elsewhere herein. This algorithm is exemplified with a 63 chip spreading sequence, although parameters of the algorithm may be changed to accommodate other spreading sequence lengths, intermediate frequencies, and sampling rates. Fast Frequency Domain Fine Search After resolving the caπier frequency shift v between transmitter and receiver, it is preferable to resolve the spreading code phase τ to 54 of a chip. This is preferably accomplished by repeating step 3 with v set for greatest received signal energy. See Figure 40.
The 63 frequency points 4034 are multiplied in the multiplier 4040 by the complex conjugate 4045 ofthe 63 reference code frequency points 4014. The 63 point product is zero padded to 252 points (i.e., add points having zero value) in zero pad operator 4070, and perform an inverse fast Fourier transform
(IFFT) 4080 on the zero padded product. The result is a slice of an ambiguity function 4090 at the optimum frequency shift v with a phase resolution of 54 of a chip, from which the receiver can be synchronized to within ± 1/8 of a chip using the methods discussed herein.
This method is exemplified with a 63 chip spreading sequence, but parameters ofthe algorithm may be changed so as to accommodate other spreading sequence lengths, intermediate frequencies, and sampling rates. Fast Frequency-Domain Search Implementations
The puφose of this algorithm is to synchronize the PN code ofthe receiver to that ofthe transmit signal. Two parameters need to be resolved in order to achieve this end: transmitter-receiver frequency offset and code-delay τ. By evaluating the receive signal energy at every (τ, v^-pair, the processor can chose the best parameters for synchronization. This 2-dimensional coπelation function over code-delay and frequency is called the Ambiguity function A(τ, v). Assuming a strong-enough signal is indeed being transmitted, the (τ, i^-pair that best aligns with the transmit signal will have the strongest Ambiguity function value. See Figures 41 through 45. When each chip is oversampled in the spreading sequence by some integer amount Q, and if the spreading sequence has M chips, N=Q*M samples are taken. The synchronization process would then resolve τ to 1/Qth chip. However, in an effort to hasten the acquisition time, the present alternative synchronization process trades 7/ -h-chip resolution at slower speeds for single-chip resolution search at higher speeds, and reduces its processing load by band-limiting the receive signal. However, this will not be apparent until later in the procedure. Note that lower search resolution will cause a sensitivity loss.
Figure 41 illustrates the conventional process of evaluating the Ambiguity function at a specific ( Figure 41 shows N samples over atime span of one code period, dfnj 4101 and N coefficients of one code period, afnj 4102. Both enter a correlator 4103 and the correlation between the two signals 4104 is the Ambiguity function evaluated at (τ, v). Figure 42 illustrates a conventional process where a slice of the Ambiguity function 4201 is evaluated for all delays τ using a circular correlation operator 4202 with the same inputs.
Figure 43 illustrates a conventional circular coπelation process that is very similar to a process known as circular convolution. Reversing one input sequence a[n] 4301 produces a sequence b[n] 4302, as shown and thus the circular convolution operator 4303 can be used as part ofthe circular coπelation operator 4304 to produce the ambiguity function.
A conventional circular convolution process is shown in Figure 44 and is based on an understanding that convolution in the time domain is equivalent to multiplication operator 4401 in the frequency domain. Sequences 4402 and 4403 entering the circular convolver are reformatted into a frequency representation using the DFT operators 4404 and 4405, and combined in the multiplication operator 4401 an output as product 4406. The product 4406 is reformatted into a time-domain representation 4407 using an Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform operator (IDFT) 4408. Without the frequency transformations, a circular convolution requires N2 multiply-accumulate operations, that, at first glance may seem inefficient, but in fact is not so inefficient when considering the possible computational savings offered by an FFT-based implementation (as is discussed below, after the discussion of Figure 45).
Figure 45 illustrates an inventive fast-frequency search process employed in the multi-channel receiver embodiment, which is relatively more computationally intensive than any search process employed in the single-channel receiver ofthe first embodiment, but uses bandpass filtering, and decimation-in-time as a way to reduce processing load. CfnJ 4501 is an extracted M-length frequency-domain subsequence from BfnJ 4502 centered around/74, where B[n] 4502 is a product of an N-point DFT performed on time domain representations (a[n] ... b[n]) ofthe spreading sequence, as generated by the receiver. Likewise, E[n] 4503 is an extracted M-length frequency-domain sub-sequence from D[n] 4504 centered around (f/4) + v, where D[n] 4504 is an N-point result of a DFT operation performed on N time domain samples, d[n] ofthe received signal. These data extractions C[n] and E[nJ are equivalent to ideal band-pass filtering in the frequency domain and decimating in the time domain. DfnJ 4504 are stored in RAM so that DfnJ
4504 can re-extract E[n] 4505 as the process steps through values of vto fill in the Ambiguity function, as shown in the graph portion of Figure 45. A gray region of Figure 45 represents precalculated values stored in ROM. A data structure of the stored data includes a field configured to hold the M points coπesponding to the portion of the code spectrum centered around fs/4. The product F[n] 4505 is transformed back to the time domain sequence f[n] 4506 before being put into the Ambiguity aπay 4507, as shown in Figure 45.
The DFT and its Inverse can be calculated using the Fast Fourier Transform process. Ordinarily the DFT (or the IDFT) takes N2 multiply-accumulate operations, just as many as circular convolution. The FFT, on the other hand, relies on the number of prime factors of N, which results in computational efficiencies If N is the product of q prime numbers Ph P2, Pq„ then a number of multiply-accumulate operations becomes N*(P, + P2 + + Pg), assuming all ofthe prime numbers are greater than or equal to 2, noting that P1 + P2 + + PJ < (P1 * P2 * * Pq) = N for all prime mtegers P. > 2 The more pnme factors for N, the faster the FFT algonthm can compute the DFT However, a savings exists over the straightforward circular convolution method only when 2(P1 + P2+ + PJ <N For the prefeπed 63 chip spreadmg code, 63 is evenly divisible by pnme factors 7, 3, and 3, and thus 2(7 + 3 + 3) = 26 < 63, which means the prefeπed chip spreadmg code enables the realization of these computational efficiencies
The FFT algonthm breaks the large DFT into smaller DFT's Depending on the target architecture and the prime factors, the Winograd DFT method may be used as a substitute for the smaller prime DFTs Winograd 's method minimizes the number of multiply operations for certain prime DFTs but also incurs higher indexing complexity Most effective digital signal processing devices will perform multiply operations as efficiently as addition operations, and may have provisions for successive and modulo indexing Winograd' s method will not be as advantageous in such processors as it could be with a processor that does not have smgle-instruction multiply operations Preferably the Winograd method is not used m the present embodiment for the indivisible DFTs because digital signal processing devices are generally more efficient m the N2 calculation in general In addition, 3 and 7 are relative low number pnmes and thus N2 is somewhat small Because of these computational efficiencies, prime factors should also play a role selecting a spreading sequence, as they are in the preferred case of 63 chip spreading sequence
False Trip Avoidance in a Multi-Channel Receiver
Identifying valid trip events is a challenge in multichannel receivers because there are several false signals, such as impulsive jammers, undesired signals, and signals or noise that will occasionally give the appearance of false synchronization detection However, by employing false synchronization avoidance mechamsms, the multi-channel receiver ofthe present embodiment offers relatively fast signal acquisition and reduced transmitter preamble time
False tnps events are received power fluctuations at an eπoneous code phase that are sufficient to cause the receiver to dwell at that code phase and evaluate the incoming signal to determine if correlation has, in fact, been obtained Sources of received RF signals include ambient noise, keyed earner wave (CW) jammers, non-coπelated spread spectrum signals, and coπelated spread spectrum signals Νon-coπelated spread spectrum signals are signals that may properly be decoded by the receiver, provided that the receiver can eventually obtain code phase coherence with the received signal, a correlated spread spectrum signal is one m which spreadmg code phase coherence has already been achieved A tnp event occurs when there is a measurable increase in received signal power over successive penods of time, however, this increase may be due to several sources and, perhaps, many of these increases will not result in a legitimate, true tnp event signifying that the received signal should be demodulated The presently descnbed inventive process is aπanged to reduce the instances of reporting a tnp event on a keyed CW jammer or a non-correlated spread spectrum signal Figure 46 is a graph of time versus signal power, where power 4605 represents a background noise floor and power 4610 represents an observed power mcrease owing to a CW jammer beginning to transmit a CW signal Because the CW jammer may modulate the signal by frequency hopping, or "keying" for "mark" symbols or "not keying" for "space" symbols, signals received from these CW jammers may appear to turn-on and turn-off However, a marked increase m signal power will also occur whenever a transmitter of interest initially begins transmitting as shown by the power 4620 in Figure 46, resulting in a non- correlated signal Another increase m signal power occurs when the receiver has achieved spreading code coherency with the transmitter, resultmg in a correlated signal power 4625, the mcrease being due to the process gain provided by the spreading code It is this third increase in signal power that is of interest for identifying a trip event, however a legitimate tnp event may occur with no appreciable increase in received signal power 4635 Thus, simply observing raw power levels, which is the technique employed by existing systems, will result in numerous false trips or missed tπps
In the present multi-channel embodiment, tnp event decisions are made after the signals have been despread and after the signal has been separated mto vanous frequency bins, where a highest performance is obtained by usmg 11 overlappmg frequency bms (channels) The aforementioned signal types will have unique power distnbution charactenstics (e g , signal "signatures") as cumulatively viewed in the frequency bins Figures 47-50 depict the power levels of these signals distributed throughout the bins Figure 47 represents random noise and m Figures 48-50, a center frequency of a received signal is depicted as bemg coincident with the center frequency 4805, 4905, 5005 (l e , in bm 5) ofthe channel filters in the respective figures In Figures 48 and 49, the signals have similar characteristics, even though Figure 48 depicts an undesired CW jammer while Figure 49 depicts a desired signal at an uncoπelated relative code phase The power level ofthe frequency bms 4805, 4905 is lower than the power level in the suπoundmg bins due to code carrier suppression
Figure 50 illustrates the power distnbution in the respective bins when the coπelated spread spectrum signal is present Frequency b 5 (5005) holds the center frequency ofthe transmitted signal as depicted by the maximum signal level Because the frequency bins overlap, some ofthe energy present in bm 5 will also be in bins 4 (5004) and 6 (5006), but powers in the remaining bins begins to drop off shaφly after that, as set by the attenuation provided by each channel filter (1 e , because much, or all, of the signal energy falls outside ofthe filter passband) Steps in the false tπp avoidance process are explained with reference to Figure 51 where the method begins in step 5105 , where the power level is measured in each channel filter The process proceeds to step 5110 where the frequency bin with the maximum signal strength is determined and designated as maxl Subsequently, step 5120 ignores the frequency bins that are adjacent to maxl providing for channel overlap Step 5120 calculates the average value ofthe signal strength values m the remaining frequency bms and designate this value as avg A decision is performed in step 5125 wherein if maxl is greater than avg by a predetermined threshold, process control is passed to step 5140, where the fine search process is initiated If block 5125 determines that maxl is not greater than avg by a predetermined threshold, process control is passed to step 5150, where the coarse search process is continued Figure 51 also illustrates an alternative method where the method begins m step 5105, where the power level is measured in each channel filter The process proceeds to step 5110 where the frequency bm with the maximum signal strength is determined and designated as maxl Subsequently, step 5130 ignores the frequency bins that are adjacent to maxl providmg for channel overlap Out ofthe remaining frequency bins, step 5130 will then locate the bin with the maximum signal strength and designate that frequency bin as max2 A decision is performed m process 5135 wherein if maxl is greater than max 2 by a predetermined threshold, process control is passed to step 5140, where the fine search process is initiated If block 5125 determines that maxl is not greater than max2 by a predetermined threshold, process control is passed to step 5150, where the coarse search process is continued
Figure 51 also illustrates another process that uses the approach discussed earlier for the 1-bit ADC for the single chaimel embodiment In particular, the process begms m step 5105, as previously discussed, and proceeds to step 5110, as previously discussed If the 1-bit ADC process is employed, the process flows to step 5141, where a stored predetermined threshold is retπeved from memory and, in step 5145 is compared with maxl obtained in step 5110 If the response to the inquiry in step 5145 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step 5140, where the fine search process is initiated However, if the response to the inquiry m step 5145 is negative, the process proceeds to step 5150, where the course search process continues by returning to step 5105 Enhancing Coarse Search
Averagmg similarly improves signal acquisition performance in the present multi-channel recerv er embodiment, as was the case for the single channel receiver embodiment However, in the multi-channel receiver, where the final decision bandwidth equals the signal bandwidth and multiple channels are spaced apart so as to span the frequency uncertainty range, the averaging process is a different m several respects For example, instead ofthe correlation data being represented as vectors, for each sampled code penod, the coπelation data exists m another dimension as well, so as to be aπanged in a plane of information, each data pomt being described by three axes coordmates frequency channel, code phase and power Figure 52 depicts a sample data set from one code period (i.e., no averaging), while Figure 53 shows the collection of several data sets, appropriately averaged. A most noticeable result of averaging is a suppression of background noise, as is evident from a comparison of noise floors 5220 and 5320 in Figures 52 and 53, respectively. As discussed with respect to the single channel embodiment, averaging may be performed as a boxcar or FIR structure where the last N symbols are averaged. Alternatively, averaging may be performed in an exponential or IIR averaging process where the previous results are decayed and added to a fraction of a present sample.
Figures 52 and 53 depict the desired signal coπelation peak at points 5210 and 5310, respectively, in a plane of frequency channel versus correlation code phase. The prefeπed multi-channel receiver embodiment employs 11 frequency channels and 63 code chips, although the number of channels and chips may be varied in accordance with the discussion of trade-offs as presented herein.
Figure 54 is a histogram of power versus occurrences that illustrates a reduction in false alarm rate achieved by averaging 6 samples in the multi-channel receiver embodiment. Curves 5410 and 5420 show the power distribution of a 20 kHz noise bandwidth with and without averaging respectively. Curves 5430 and 5440 show the power distribution of a -110 dBm signal in 20 kHz noise bandwidth with and without averaging respectively. The mean power for the noise and signal plus noise distributions remain unchanged, yet the deviations are reduced creating a greater distance between the minimum "On" and the maximum "Off". Consequently, extending the distance between the minimum "On" and the maximum "Off" corresponds directly with decreasing the probability of reporting a false trip condition.
Frequency domain averaging is identical to the multi-channel case depicted in Figure 45, where the result ofthe fast frequency coarse search is a plane of power versus frequency and code phase. This process, however, uses different mathematical operations to achieve the same result, yet the result may be averaged as in the channelized time domain coarse search to achieve better SNR. Applying the method for reducing false trips for impulsive interference following averaging provides the maximum sensitivity achievable, under the presently described circumstances. Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
As previously discussed, AGC is used to adjust a signal level of a received signal to fall within an instantaneous dynamic range of the ADC. At times this is a challenge, because the receiver may be exposed to signals of varying strengths. For example, a receiver placed within a few feet of a transmitter will be exposed to a very strong signal level, but a receiver located far from the transmitter will be exposed to a very weak signal level. AGC allows the received signal, in either case, to be adjusted to within a predetermined range, prior to being applied to the ADC. One factor considered in the AGC mechanism, is a level of a received noise floor and thus the AGC mechanism monitors the received noise floor, attempting to keep it within an operable range ofthe ADC However, as the noise floor nses, there is a nsk that the AGC mechanism will not act to lower the signal level applied to the ADC and will result in clipping an intended signal, as a result of madequate "headroom", which has profound adverse affects on signal correlation and reception Accordmgly, if the AGC mechanism detects that the noise level has risen too much, the AGC mechanism will act to attenuate the received signal (and noise) to a lower level, ensuring that the received signal will remain withm the ADC's dynamic range
The AGC process is implemented in software and is executed once per code period while the search process is attempting to correlate If an attenuation change is deemed necessary by the AGC process determining that the sample values are above a predetermined threshold, for example, the search process is interrupted while AGC adjusts the receiver gam, over several code periods, which m turn adjusts the coπesponding signal strength ofthe received signal Decisions made by the AGC process are based on the measured noise floor (where the measurement may be made with a discrete level detector or by digital analysis on the received sample stream) and serves to keep the noise floor within the operable region ofthe ADC The AGC process may be augmented with tune constant mechanisms to offset the effect of impulsive interference, and averaging mechamsms that combme several sample sets so as to avoid invokmg an AGC adjustment if short-term perturbances in the noise floor are observed Similarly, the AGC process may be adapted to operate off of the strongest received signal, so as to avoid dnvmg the ADC outside of the ADC's dynamic range by the strong signal, whether the strong signal is the intended signal or not
Attenuation ofthe received signal is set with two controls, implemented m hardware, although other software or firmware driven control may be used as well The signal level may be adjusted (preferably attenuated) in the attenuator 3502 by a maximum of 75 dB usmg a step and digital attenuator that operates under the control ofthe AGC signal (as shown in Figure 35) A 4-bit digital attenuator located in the attenuator 3502 is positioned prior to the ADC and provides attenuation in 3 dB steps up to a maximum of 45 dB attenuation A coarse 30 dB step attenuator may optionally be applied in front ofthe first RF amplifier, thus protecting the mixer from very strong signals and related lntermodulation products created by excessively strong signals being applied to the mixer
A related problem caused by excessively strong signals is that the signals may result in the digital signal processmg operations performed on the signals to enter an overflow state For example, the digital signal processor used to compute the coπelation sum on the received signal also implements the decimation process concuπently therewith In an implementation of the multi-channel receiver a digital signal processor that computes this correlation sum has the undesirable attribute of failing to retam an indication of intermediate overflow This means that m the decimation process, should an accumulator m the digital signal processor overflow at some intermediate point, there may be no report ofthe overflow condition after the decimation process is complete Even though a digital signal processor may retam an overflow condition immediately following a mathematical instruction, the digital signal processor may reset the overflow flag on the next mathematical instruction A similar problem exists if the decimation process were fabπcated using discrete components such as adders and accumulators
It is possible to prevent overflow from ever occuπing provided the accumulator has enough resolution for all worst case summations, but digital signal processors with such attributes are relatively expensive and otherwise not suitable for use in low-end applications An alternative method scales the signal or coefficients used m the digital signal processing operation such that an overflow will never occur in a given number of accumulator bits However, both techniques require the hardware to be more complex than minimally necessary as extendmg the accumulator adds hardware expense and complexity and attenuating the signal loses fidelity and resolution in signal quantization
Accordingly, the overflow concern is easily avoidable by using modern digital signal processors having sufficient processing capability, overflow indication mechanisms, and/or large accumulators However, because it is prefeπed to minimize cost by using a low-end processor in the present receiver, identifying the source of the problem and solution to the problem requires innovative processes and mechanisms The present multi-channel receiver uses a small accumulator while managing the possibility of overflow by integrating signal scaling mto the AGC process To more completely understand the problem identified by the mventors and the solution therefor, a discussion on the failure mechanism and how it impacts data integrity is presented below
Provided that an overflow condition may occur for strong signals at a given AGC setting, the receiver's processes and mechanisms must be able to detect the presence of strong or weak signals and act accordmgly, making adjustments in the attenuator 3502 (Figure 32) to keep the signal m the desired received power band Weak signals do not create a problem, because the signal power drops monotonically with signal attenuation, and a low threshold near the minimum coπelation limit triggers a signal drop event
A problem anses when the signal is greater than that which can be supported in the resolution of a signal data word (e g , 16-bit word) because the end decimation result becomes non-monotomc due to clipping ofthe signal (by inadequately representmg the full size ofthe signal power in a given data word) So as to prevent the signal from being clipped, the present multi-channel receiver uses a threshold set near the maximum coπelation limit ofthe accumulator so as to create a value dπven overflow condition The threshold is effective in determinmg a need for AGC (e g , provides a warning signal), yet the value reported is not used because it becomes non-monotomc
The AGC process addresses this unreliable reporting of an overflow condition by searching backward, keeping a range of untrustworthy samples (l e , perhaps tainted by an unreported overflow condition) shadowed in previous evaluation ranges where the power can be trusted As will be explamed, the range of ambiguity can be eliminated by asserting first maximum attenuation and then subsequently stepping through progressively less attenuation.
When first initiated, the AGC process starts by asserting maximum attenuation (so as to produce a minimum signal level applied to the ADC) and then progressively lowering the amount of attenuation in roughly 9 dB steps (or other suitable step sizes), through 7 coarse acquisition steps. By first applying maximum attenuation, there is no ambiguity regarding whether the data samples have been caused an overflow condition during the decimation process. When the noise level detected in one of these steps is near optimal (i.e., at a prefeπed level within the ADC's instantaneous dynamic range), the AGC process causes a fine attenuation step to be executed so as to place the received noise floor within 3 dB of the desired level. Subsequently, the AGC process terminates and the normal correlation (search function) resumes.
The AGC process as implemented in the present embodiment accounts for a three-code period delay set by pipeline processing. Thus, when the AGC process causes an AGC attenuation change, the next two code periods are already being processed. The third code period, following a setting operation, will hold data that reflects the change. For this reason, the AGC acquisition process is heavily pipelined to minimize waiting for data. Figures 55 through 65 depict the state process implemented in the AGC process and mechanism. The following description details the steps used in the most sensitive exemplary embodiment ofthe multi-channel receiver.
The AGC process flow shown in Figure 55 begins in step 5501 and then to step 5502 where a Boolean flag is maintained. An inquiry is made so the AGC process recalls, between program calls, whether the AGC process is cuπently acquiring a signal. If the response to the inquiry is affirmative, the process proceeds to step 5506 so as to determine where the AGC process is in the acquisition cycle. If AGC is not acquiring, the process continues by computing a time averaged noise floor in step 5503 using the last 8 code periods for smoothing the instantaneous noise. A counter (code interval timer) is decremented and tested in steps 5504 and 5505 so as to add hysterisis to the AGC process. If the counter has expired, the AGC algorithm is enabled to begin an acquisition if necessary by proceeding to step 5507 where the instantaneous noise floor is monitored so as to determine if there exists enough headroom in the ADC and decimation process to support a coπelation operation. If the noise level is too high, and there exists more attenuation as inquired in step 5508 for use, the process proceeds to step 5506 so as to initiate the acquisition process . However, if the instantaneous noise value requires attenuation but there is not any additional attenuation available, the process proceeds to step 5511, where the process aborts. If the instantaneous noise level is not too high, the process continues at 5509 where the time averaged noise floor is evaluated as being too low. If the time averaged noise floor is too low, and attenuation can be removed from the cuπent setting 5510, an acquisition is necessary, so the process proceeds to step 5506 to properly set the lower attenuation level If the time averaged noise level is too low, but no further attenuation can be removed, the algonthm aborts m step 5511
Figure 56 is a flowchart of a decision tree for determining where the AGC algonthm is in the AGC acquisition cycle Step 5601 continues from step 5506 as shown on Figure 35 After step 5601 the process proceeds to step 5602 where an inquiry is made regarding the AGC processing state, which is determmed by checking a state vanable Depending on the value of the state vanable, the process continues to respective of steps 5603 through 5613, as will be explained below with respect to Figures 57-61
Figure 57 is a flowchart of four ofthe decision tree branches depicted in the flowchart of Figure 56 Step 5701 is the continuation of step 5603, Step 5704 is the continuation of step 5604 Step 5711 is the continuation of step 5605 Step 5714 is the continuation of step 5606 When the acquisition process begins m step 5701, the maximum attenuation (mimmum sensitivity) is applied m step 5702 Subsequently, the state vanable is advanced to step 5703 and the AGC process terminates in step 5710 and waits for a new code period of data However, on the next code interval, the process flow resumes to step 5704 where a recheck of the previous decision to perform AGC is performed in step 5705 If the test of the instantaneous noise floor results in a decision not to need AGC, the noise value has crept up to the decision threshold and only a small adjustment is needed Thus, to determine the magnitude ofthe adjustment, the last two noise samples are averaged in step 5706 and a small adjustment is made step 5707 If m step 5705 the test for AGC shows the receiver remains saturated, the attenuation is set at maximum in step 5708, the state is advanced in step 5709 and the process waits for a new code interval of data in step 5710 On the next code interval, the process flow resumes through step 5711 and then to step 5712 where attenuation is lowered pnor to beginning the search process As previously discussed, this attenuation setting will not be available for next 3 code intervals due to the pipelining ofthe DSP process, so the state variable is advanced in step 5713 and the process waits for a new code mterval of data m step 5717
On the next code interval, the process flow resumes through step 5714 and then in step 5715, attenuation is lowered to continue the search process Subsequently, the state vanable is advanced in step
5716 and the process waits for a new code mterval of data in step 5717
Figures 58, 59 and 60 are flowcharts of six ofthe decision tree branches depicted m Figure 56 Step 5801 is the continuation of step 5607 Step 5810 is the continuation of step 5608 Step 5901 is the contmuation of step 5609 Step 5910 is the continuation of step 5610 Step 6001 is the continuation of step 5611 Step 6010 is the contmuation of step 5612 The processes depicted in Figures 58, 59 and 60 demonstrate the evaluation ofthe attenuation levels set 3 code intervals previous (due to pipeline delay)
In reference to Figure 58, the first evaluation step 5801 the instantaneous noise level is evaluated in step 5802 If the noise level is too high, the optimum pomt has already been passed, and thus a blmd 9 dB is added in step 5806 before the AGC process terminates in step 5807, instructing the calling module that it has completed acquisition However, if the noise level as determined in step 5802 is not too high, the noise level is tested for being too low m step 5803 indicating the attenuation is still to great Subsequently, the next attenuation step is applied m step 5804, the state is advanced in step 5805 and the process is suspended in step 5809, waiting for the next code mterval of data If the test performed in step
5803 indicates the noise value is between the low and high thresholds, the search only needs a fine step and the process flow resumes at step 5808
On the subsequent code intervals the evaluation steps 5810, 5901, 5910, 6001, 6010 evaluate the instantaneous noise level 5811, 5902, 5911, 6002, 6011, respectively If the noise level is too high, the optimum pomt has already been passed, and a blmd 9 dB is added in steps 5815, 5906, 5915, 6006, 6015 respectively before the AGC process terminates in steps 5816, 5907, 5916, 6007, 6016 respectively, instructing the calling module that it has completed acquisition If the noise level of steps 5811, 5902, 5911, 6002, 6011 is not too high, the noise level is tested for being too low m steps 5812, 5903, 5912, 6003, 6012 indicating the attenuation is still to great The next attenuation step is applied in steps 5813, 5904, 5913, 6004, 6013, the state is advanced in steps 5814, 5905, 5914, 6005, 6014, and the routine suspends in steps 5818, 5909, 5918, 6009, 6018 and waits for the next code mterval of data If the test of steps 5812, 5903, 5912, 6003, 6012 indicates the noise value is between the low and high thresholds, the search only needs a fine step and algoπthπuc flow resumes at steps 5817, 5908, 5917, 6008, 6017
Figure 61 is a flowchart ofthe last evaluation step and the small step algonthm process flow The last attenuation step is evaluated if the search thus far has not found a solution Step 6101 is the contmuation of step 5613 depicted m Figure 56 Step 6109 is the contmuation of steps 5707, 5808, 5817, 5908, 5917, 6008, 6017 or 6108 The attenuation is set to a minimum three bit code intervals previous, so the cuπent data represents the maximum sensitivity setting The noise level is tested m step 6102 and if the noise level is too high, the optimum pomt has already been passed, and a blmd 9 dB is added in step 6106 The algonthm suspends operation in step 6107, instructing the calling module that the AGC process is finished If the noise value measured in step 6102 is not too high, it is evaluated as being too low step 6103 If too low, there are no further steps to minimize attenuation so the attenuation is set to a minimum in step 6104, the state vanable is set to indicate the AGC is not acqumng m step 6105 and the process suspends operation in step 6107, instructing the calling module that the AGC process is finished However, if the noise power is between the upper and lower thresholds, a small adjustment is needed and the process continues through 6108 to 6109 Once one ofthe evaluation steps determines the measured noise value to be between upper and lower thresholds, the process proceeds to step 6109 and subsequently to step 6110 where the measured instantaneous noise power is subtracted from the desired power and the difference is used to adjust the cuπent attenuation setting to optimum Then, in step 6111, an inquiry is made to determine if the result is different from the passed attenuation value If the small adjustment test determines the attenuation setting should be changed, the attenuation is adjusted in step 6112 and the process terminates in step 6113, instructing the calling module that the AGC process is finished Reception of Data Transmission with Fast Frequency Drift Multi-channel receiver systems enjoy excellent sensitivity, as compared with receiver systems that use detection bandwidths that are appreciatively wider than the data bandwidth Ideal systems exactly match the channel bandwidth to the data bandwidths, because SNR (and hence communication quality) is maximized when the received, despread signal exactly matches in frequency one of the channels in the channelized receiver and the receiver detects and momtors the signal from the smgle channel of coincidence Problems exists when the ideal channelized system attempts to demodulate a signal from a specific channel and the transmitter fails to maintain frequency fidelity dunng data transmission Factors leadmg to the frequency error include the transmitter frequency pulling, or receiver local frequency reference pulling, each of which may occur if the respective frequency reference is in some way subjected to environmental changes, such as supply power vanation All contnbute to short term, intra-message frequency instability which degrade the ability of a channelized receiver to optimally demodulate a signal, because the received signal "drifts" between adjacent channels
The conventional approach has been to avoid drift problems altogether by ensuring the transmitter and receiver reference components not experience frequency drift, primarily by using crystal controlled or direct digital synthesis frequency references Cost efficient transmitters often have frequency references which are sensitive to changes in power supply voltage or electro-mechamcal mterference, even self interference This is especially true for OOK transmitters which often enable and disable amplification stages to modulate data which can effect local frequency references such as voltage controlled oscillators In other words, the combination of an OOK transmitters with an inaccurate frequency references causes particular challenges for a low-cost receiver that has available only minimal processmg capacity In contrast to conventional practice, the present invention employs cost efficient components and combines them so as to be used in systems havmg transmitters that transmit messages with, perhaps, significant frequency drift and offset Conventional practice accommodates the sizable transmitter frequency dnft by quantifying the total frequency error budget, for all ofthe relevant system components, and expanding the channel bandwidths in the receiver to exactly match the worst case frequency dnft The wider receiver bandwidth de-sensitizes the receiver because the mcreased channel bandwidth degrades SNR
(and hence performance) by the increase of noise bandwidth
At the expense of increased computational complexity, the present multi-channel receiver embodiment uses several channels, each matching the data bandwidth, so as to track frequency drift throughout a message Figure 62 depicts a bank of channel filters where a specific filter matched to the data bandwidth has shape 6200 A signal exactly aligned in channel 6203 transmitting a " 1 " would have a measured mean power denoted as 6201 in Figure 62 Because the channel filters have independent roll- off charactenstics, a signal adjacent to the desired channel will be attenuated according to the shape ofthe filter 6200 As such, there exists a between-channel loss (l e , because the signal falls in between to channels) denoted by point 6202, signifying a worst case system sensitivity for signals which have no frequency drift A signal exactly centered between two channel filters would be measured in either filter with a mean power as denoted at 6202 For this reason, it is most beneficial to overlap the channel filters to limit the between channel loss The system loss budget can then be specified using this worst case estimation The above description remains valid as long as the transmitters do not exhibit frequency dnft during transmission of a message But, if the transmitters do exhibit frequency dnft beyond the between- channel frequency, the signal will continue to roll off, until the dnft becomes so pronounced the signal is ultimately completely rejected by the selected channel filter
In Figure 62, the Curve 6204 depicts the ideal signal 6203 which has been pulled off frequency beyond the between-channel point 6202 to a high attenuation pomt 6205 Under these conditions, if the receiver was demodulating, the signal from the initial channel 6200 would progressively drop power, durmg bit interval, because the dnft would cause signal to move away from the center ofthe channel and toward an edge ofthe channel If the transmitter dnft was constramed between the frequency excursions shown as curves 6203 and 6204, the signal power will fluctuate between pomts 6201 and 6206 (heavy line 6206) The present multi-channel receiver uses several channel filters to track frequency fluctuations during data demodulation The total frequency excursion must be quantified for the transmitters in question and system application The techmque is most feasible for coπecting small scale frequency dnft on the order ofthe data bandwidth Wide scale frequency drift could be corrected in the transmitter
As long as the frequency drift is relatively small, overlapping only a few channels in the system at worst, and provided the steady state condition can be measured, the frequency dnft loss can be recovered usmg the adjacent channels and a process descnbed below The steady state condition is defined as the restmg frequency of the transmitter Typically frequency dnft is caused by changes m the transmitter power structures, most typically caused by keymg an OOK transmitter As such, it is common for the frequency to have error coincident with a change m amplitude key state The steady state condition is therefore measured when there is a run of same state values while the transmitter is keyed, perhaps in a preamble or initiation sequence ofthe signal data structure
In the graph of Figure 63, the lines 6301 represent the respective powers measured m a smgle channel filter over a sequence of bit intervals Vanation between the heights ofthe lmes indicates that there is a time vanable power vanation Explaining the power vanation m the depicted example, the transmitter exhibits signal loss dunng a 0 to 1 transition state shown as line 6303 After a penod of time while transmitting a series of 1 s, the power is recovered by the bit interval coπesponding with the line 6304 This recovery coincides with the transmitter dnft coπection over tune The loss in power when the sequence of Is is transmitted effects the bit error rate, and may influence the decision threshold mechanism to call the bit a "0" (l e , a bit eπor) in cases where there is low SNR, l e , where the noise floor 6302 approaches the Is level (6303)
A method for using alternate channels to overcome the frequency dnft is explained with respect to Figure 64 Assuming the drift direction and relative magnitude may be determined, where the direction may be bi-directional or um-directional depending on the design and nature of failure m the transmitter, the trip determination step 6400 may be any ofthe processes discussed herein or any other determination of signal activity Following a tnp event, the pnmary channel determination is determined in step 6401 where the pnmary channel is determined as the channel which most closely aligns with the steady state power of the transmitter, while the transmitter is transmitting a preamble portion ofthe signal The pnmary channel is the channel with the largest measured mean power dunng a run of Is in the preamble ofthe transmitted message Subsequently, the process proceeds to step 6402 when an initial primary OOK decision threshold for determining a 1 or a 0 is set This may be static based on the measured amplitude of a 1, a zero or combination thereof, or it may be dynamic and change to track with the message as received An alternate channel threshold is then set in step 6403 so as to track with the pnmary channel threshold The value of this alternate channel threshold must be equal to or greater than the pnmary channel threshold as explamed below to keep from adversely affecting the bit eπor rate ofthe receiver
Data demodulation commences following initialization, and at each new bit interval collected step 6404, the received signal power is measured m each ofthe candidate channels in step 6405 where the signal may deviate The power in the primary channel is compared to the primary OOK decision threshold in step 6406 If the power exceeds the threshold,, a Is determination is made in step 6408 and the next bit is processed If the power is below the pnmary OOK decision threshold, the alternate channels are evaluated in step 6407 usmg the alternate decision threshold If any ofthe alternate channels exceed the alternate decision threshold, a Is decision is made in step 6408 and the next bit is processed If none of the alternate channels exceed the alternate decision threshold, a 0's determination is made in step 6409 and the next bit is processed The difference between the pnmary and alternate channel decision threshold effects the bit eπor rate (BER) The alternate decision threshold must be at least equal to the pnmary decision threshold and preferably larger so as to minimally impact the receiver BER Figure 65 depicts noise versus signal plus noise graphs, where it is seen that a 1/0 decision threshold 6503 may be set such that the BER contnbution from the pnmary channel zero determination equals the percentage of noise to the nght of the decision threshold 6505 If the same decision threshold were used for each of the alternative channels, then the system BER would be increased to include the total of all the percentages to the right of each decision threshold for zeros determination This is true due the fact that noise is generally uniform in distribution (for spread signals), and each channel filter will have a noise distribution as depicted by 6500 The likelihood that noise power m each channel exceeds any arbitrary value withm the distnbution is identical
This distorts the combined channel noise distnbution adversely weighmg it toward the signal plus noise distribution and increasing BER
A second threshold is used for the alternate channels which is set such that the combined zeros determination BER contribution for the alternate channels is small relative to the primary zeros BER The overall system BER is not adversely affected and the benefit of using the alternate channels is achieved
Exact placement for decision thresholds and separation for primary and alternate decision thresholds is determined based on system requirements for signal detection and data integπty Predictive Code Reposition
Once a receiver has achieved coarse and fine search, the time references, e g , crystals in the transmitter and receiver will dnft (relative to each other) over time, particularly if low-cost components are used If the drift is too large, the receiver will begin to lose process gam, and gets progressively worse for longer messages U S PatentNo 5,457,713 (Sanderford, et al) discusses a method to maintain spreadmg code coherency between a transmitter and receiver for long messages At predetermined points in a message, the transmitter will transmit an expected symbol The receiver uses this symbol to perform an additional fine search process to re-ahgn the receiver spreadmg code This method maintains code coherency at the expense of added overhead m the transmitted message
The present receiver embodiments use the results ofthe initial search process to predict the rate of time base drift This method requires that the transmitter use one time base to control the RF frequency as well as to generate the code chip rate Conversely, the receiver must use one time base to generate the downconversion tones as well as generate its code chip rate This method also requires that the receiver be able to quantify the frequency error so that the spreadmg code phase drift can be predicted In the multichannel receiver embodiment, one of the eleven channels will be selected as the candidate filter by the coarse search process The receiver then uses the channel mdex (e g , channel number) relative to 0 frequency error to predict the tune base drift as follows Figure 39 shows the spacing and center frequencies ofthe frequency channels (as has previously been discussed) If the transmission frequency is 915 MHZ and the frequency channel at 37 4 kHz is chosen as the candidate filter, this means that the crystal dnft between transmitter and receiver is 37 kHz / 915 MHZ = 40 4 ppm eπor This ppm eπor also affects the spreading code chip rate For example, over a period of 100 bit times, the error associated with this crystal dnft is
100 bits x 63 chips/bit x 40 4 ppm = 25 chip eπor, which results in a 2 5 dB loss of signal coπelation If the system specification requires that the receiver stay withm a certain code phase distance of the transmitter throughout the duration ofthe message, the receiver must peπodically adjust its spreadmg code phase, under the present conditions The frequency at which this adjustment is made is driven by the resolution ofthe spreadmg code generator, the ppm ofthe transmitted signal, and the system requirements The present embodunent acquires 5 data samples per code chip, and executes 3 instructions per sample mterval By optionally inserting an additional instruction, the computer is able to achieve a despreading code adjustment resolution of 1/15th of a chip
This technique, while helping to maintain spreading code coherency, has a limitation in that each channel filter is 20 kHz wide, and thus the eπor ofthe predictive value is given by
20 kHz / 915 MHZ = 21 8 ppm which means that over time, this predictive repositioning techmque will not necessarily adequately correct spreading code alignment error Techniques such as frequency and/or phase discnmination provide frequency resolution that is even naπower that the 20 kHz channel filter, and the optional use of these techniques will reduce the error ofthe prediction reposition process Dependmg on system requirements, the predictive reposition method may be sufficient to maintain code coherence over a message duration without the use ofthe standard reposition method The effects of reposition are explamed m Figures 66 A, 66B, and 66C wherein points 6610, 6620, and 6630 represent the signal level after the coarse and fine search algoπthms have been performed After the duration ofthe message 6611, the signal strength ofthe message will have decreased to points 6615, 6625, and 6635 due to crystal dnft Item 6613 shows the signal strength of an ideal message with no loss of process gain Items 6626 and 6636 show the signal recovery provided by the use of the standard reposition method The repetition rate 6624 ofthe standard reposition algonthm is pre-determined by the positioning ofthe reposition symbols within the transmitted message
The feature 6627 shows a signal recovery provided by the predictive reposition method An amount of signal recovery 6628 is determmed by the system's ability to discern the frequency error ofthe received RF signal The repetition rate 6634 ofthe predictive reposition method is set by the worst-case system loss requirement and the amount of signal recovery 6628 that can be achieved
Alternatively, the two reposition methods can be used together to provide enhanced performance Feature 6638 shows the combination ofthe two methods as providing better results (signal levels) than either method working alone Elimination of Redundant Data in a Multi-Drop Network
In some RF installations, physical obstacles will cause the performance ofthe system to degrade due to fading In reference to Figure 67, a network with multiple transmitters 6710 through 6715 and multiple receivers 6720 through 6724 are installed in vanous locations and each of which may be required to assure adequate coverage In many installations it is desirable to connect all of the receivers to a common processor 6740 with some type of shared medium 6730, such as a multi-drop bus, such as an RS- 485 bus, a local area network, USB, FireWire, etc Once havmg received a message, the respective receivers would then relay data to the processor 6740 in some pre-determined fashion Poll-response, Ethernet, and token-ring protocols are just three of many methods that would serve this puφose, and would be used whenever some type of data collection and/or processmg is to be performed at a central location
(such as secunty alarm applications, tracking systems, etc )
As shown in Figure 67, multiple receivers R2, R3, and R4 (which may be transceivers) may, or may not, receive the same transmitted message 6717 from transmitter T4 Each of these receivers would then attempt to forward the message to the application processor 6740 Present network systems allow the bus penpherals (the receivers) to forward all messages to the common processor 6740, forcing the processor 6740 to detect and eliminate redundant messages However, this technique increases bus traffic and forces the processor to perform extra processmg to detect and eliminate redundant data messages The present invention eliminates this extra bus traffic by requiπng that the receivers monitor the bus 6730 for redundant data messages Whenever a data message is received, the receiver will store the message m a queue until it is time for that receiver to relay the messages to the common processor 6740 Smce the receiver is attached to a multi-drop network, the receiver is able to momtor all messages transmitted on the bus 6730 Whenever a receiver is not transmitting data to the common processor 6740, that receiver will monitor the bus 6730, reading all data messages transferred to the processor 6740 Each data message will have some type of umque identification such as a property code, system code, transmitter ID tag, Cyclical Redundancy Check
(CRC), CDMA channel, or the like The waiting receiver will compare each data message on the bus with the messages stored in its local message queue Whenever the waitmg receiver detects that another receiver is transmitting a message to the processor 6740 that is identical to a message in its local queue, that waiting receiver will delete the message from its local queue Each waitmg receiver will attempt to eliminate as many messages from its local queue pnor to relaying the messages to the common processor, thereby reducmg bus traffic and reducing the processmg requirements ofthe common processor
Figure 67 shows that transceivers and/or receivers on the same hard-wired interface communicate with all remote transmitters and transceivers withm a defined proxmuty Further, the present network embodunent uses the same CDMA and system property code for all devices associated with a particular hard-wired line This method allows redundancy and the ability of the system to eliminate redundant messages
Battery Operation
Another embodiment of the present mvention is a very small, battery operated transceiver that incoφorates combinations of features ofthe single-channel and multi-channel transceiver embodiments
An advantage of being small and low cost is that the transceiver can be installed in places and in quantities that are not possible or practical for larger devices For example, an attribute of being small is that the transceiver may operate for long periods of time off of battery power, and thus may be used in remote locations where commercial power service (e g , electncal wall outlets) are not available (e g , on top of flagpoles, buildings, and mobile platforms, such as cars, aiφlanes, etc ) Such applications might include two-way smoke detection, strobe light and/or sounder control, two-way keypad, two-way thermostate, remote auto-dialer, remote sensor/controller, two-way remote meter reading/power cut-off, and process control/energy management
Using a battery operated remote transceiver (BORT) creates problems with feasibility of use and battery life Conserving battery life is a challenge for battery operated transceivers that may be located in accessible locations where it is difficult to replace the batteries Conventional transmitters conserve power by operatmg in sleep modes where the transmitter alternately sleeps, wakes up, transmits, and then returns to sleep These transmitters are not restncted to transmit on any particular schedule and thus do not care when they transmit, because these transmitters assume that a receiver is continuously available (powered on)
So as to maximize battery life m the BORT, the BORT will go mto alternate sleep and active cycles, which m turn creates an additional difficulty when the BORT is used in a network setting As will be discussed, to maintain network coherency, the transceivers must be active dunng predetermined windows of time (l e , scheduled events) Otherwise, one device m the network may transmit while the would-be receive devices are m sleep mode, resultmg m lost data messages To maintain this network coherency, a
'system' transceiver (or alternatively, multiple system transceivers) will be active all ofthe time and will be powered by a contmuous external power supply and will periodically generate a network synchronization message The maximum period between these synchronization message transmissions is adjustable, but is set accordmg to the frequency drifts ofthe system transceiver and the respective BORT devices Dunng normal operation a BORT device will communicate with a smgle system transceiver Over successive communication periods, the BORT device can naπow the frequency ambiguity between itself and its assigned system transceiver This techmque will allow the BORT device to increase its receiver sensitivity and increase its process gain (and provide additional isolation from transmitters) For efficient power consumption, each BORT device turns off its RF front-end (905 in Figure 9) and signal processmg sections (907, 909, 911, 913, 915, 917, and 919, m Figure 9) when not in use Upon a wake-up event and once a full power-up condition is completed, the BORT device will pause until the analog components m the RF section have had time to settle The BORT device then samples only enough data to make network synchronization and tnp decisions, and then disables power to the RF front-end 905
If the tnp threshold decision is made, the BORT device will re-apply power to the RF front-end 905, use the data to determine code phase coherency, and then re-acquire the data signal This acquisition process uses a fast search process as previously described, but if no signal is detected, the BORT device must reacquire system timmg, which it does by remainmg active and continuing to acquire data samples until a network synchronization pulse is detected Alternatively, the BORT device can query the system transceiver, by transmitting a query message, requesting network timing information
Figure 68 depicts a BORT application where several system transceivers 6811-6813 maintain communication with a plurality of BORT devices 6801-6803 A system controller 6820 maintains supervision ofthe system transceivers via multi-drop bus 6825, such as an RS-485 bus or the like The transceivers 6811-6813 and BORT devices 6801 -6803 have access to 6 code-division multiple access (CDMA) channels, based on 6 umque PN sequences The network uses CDMA channel 1 for ALOHA-type transmissions 6832, 6833, and the system transceivers use CDMA channel 2 to broadcast system synchronization messages 6830 A phase ofthe PN sequence will be random throughout the system transceivers, so as to allow all transceivers to broadcast the synchronization message simultaneously This method allows fast signal acquisition without undue destructive self-interference due to the fact that the correlation function is only one chip wide The respective BORT devices 6801 -6803 will then acquire the transmitted signals that, m all likelihood, are the first to produce a Trip event CDMA channels 2 and/or 3 are used by the system transceivers 6811-6813 to broadcast commands 6831 to the BORT devices 6801 - 6803 Figures 69A-B depict the signal timing ofthe BORT network The system transceivers 6811-6813
(Figure 68) issue synchromzation messages 6901, 6902 every 5 seconds Due to a 100 parts per million (ppm) inaccuracy ofthe crystals and a 7 8 ms maccuracy ofthe sleep timer circuit on the BORT device, the synchromzation (sync) message must be at least 8 3 ms long Alternatively, a sleep tuner circuit with no maccuracy allows this value to be reduced to 500 μs to cover only the timing ambiguity ofthe crystal dnft, less if the drift is tracked using a delay-lock loop (DLL)
Withm this synchronization window, the BORT device will power up at a tune 6910 (Figure 69B) from a low-power sleep mode After device initialization, the BORT device will sample one code penod of data at time 6911 and then go off-line at time 6912 After performing the fast search and fine search algoπthms, the BORT device will reacquire the signal at time 6914 and wait until the end of the synchromzation signal 6916 The BORT device will measure and store the duration of the received synchronization signal By keeping a running log ofthe signal duration, the BORT can determine if its wake-up timer is moving relative to the system synchromzation timing If so, the BORT device can then make coπections to its wake-up tuner so as to better maintain system coherency The system transceivers 6811 -6813 have multiple options after the completion ofthe sync message at time 6916 If no commands need to be transmitted to the BORT devices 6801 -6803, the transceivers 6811 -6813 will key-off their transmitters (1 e , stop transmitting) If commands need to be transmitted to the BORT devices 6801 -6803, the system transceivers 6811-6813 will transmit the command immediately following the synchronization message 6904 If one of the BORT devices 6801 -6803 is actively tracking the synchronization message and then fails to detect a spread spectrum signal at this time, that BORT device will decide that no commands are pending After performing system housekeeping duties, the BORT device will go immediately mto sleep mode at time 6917 However, if the BORT device is tracking the synchronization message and detects the beginning of a command message 6918, the BORT device remains active to receive the command and carry out the system command 6920 After completion ofthe task, the BORT device may optionally transmit an acknowledge (ACK) message 6922 via an ALOHA messaging protocol, and then after performing system housekeeping duties, the BORT device will enter a sleep mode at tune 6924
Other signaling protocols may be used so as to avoid synchronization message collisions from other system elements that can fill in the ASK key-off wmdow and force a needless command search To eliminate this needless command search, commands are transmitted on CDMA channel 3 After the completion ofthe synchronization message 6916 on CDMA channel 2, the BORT device will switch to CDMA channel 3 and sample one code penod of data The BORT device will then perform a fast search as before If a signal is detected on CDMA channel 3, the BORT device will perform fine search and receive and process the command as before If no signal is detected on CDMA channel 3, then the BORT device will enter sleep mode This alternative is preferred if the network modulation convention is ASK
So as to have adequate time for the BORT device to perform the search algoπthms on the initial CDMA 3 transmission, the transceiver pauses for 700 ms pnor to transmitting command message 6904
Alternatively, the system transceivers 6811-6813 can maintain code phase coherence when changing from CDMA channel 2 to CDMA channel 3 In this manner, the BORT devices 6801 -6803 may achieve instant spreading code synchromzation with CDMA channel 3 codes smce there will be no code phase ambiguity
Alternatively, protocol messages may also be used to mamtam system coherency If one ofthe the BORT devices 6801-6803 wakes up and does not detect a system sync message on CDMA channel 2, then that BORT device may send a 'not acknowledge' (NAK) message to the system transceivers 6811-6813 on CDMA channel 1 Upon receipt ofthe NAK message, the closest ofthe system transceivers 6811-6813 will transmit a timing coπection message to the BORT device on CDMA channel 1 The BORT device will adjust its sleep timer accordmgly, and may or may not reply to the transceiver with an ACK message on CDMA channel 1 The BORT device will then go mto sleep mode and wake up during the next available system sync message
From the following expression it is clear that the impact of system synchronization loading on ALOHA availability is minimal
(8 3 ms/5 sec) * 100% = 17% vs (500 us/5 sec) * 100% = 01%
The system controller 6820 can send commands to the system transceiver of the system transceivers 6811-6813 nearest the desired BORT device of the BORT devices 6801-6803 at any time
This command will be queued and sent behind the next sync pulse, the system controller 6820 creates the timing and gives the command to initiate the sync pulse
Some destructive interference occurs due to multiple system transceivers sending simultaneous sync pulses, although simultaneous transmission is nonetheless used so as to reduce loss of ALOHA air time This approach is preferred over an alternative approach of assigning each system transceiver 6811-6813 an independent time slot
The BORT system, or network, includes two types of devices, namely the BORT devices 6801- 6803 and the system transceivers 6811-6813, each of which may include the single channel or the multichannel transceivers ofthe first and second embodiments, respectively A flowchart explaining the control process implemented m respective processors m the BORT devices 6801 -6803 begms in Figure 70A The process begms m step 7001, where one ofthe BORT devices 6801-6803 is in a low-power sleep state, and then the process contmues to step 7002, where the BORT device powers up mto an active state based upon a wake-up signal provided by a wake-up timer that is preferably contained m the BORT device In step 7003, the BORT device executes a coarse search process on CDMA channel 2, where the steps for this coarse search routine begin m step 7070, continuing in step 7071 where the device powers up the RF section on the CDMA channel provided by the calling routine The BORT device will then acquire a data sample in step 7072 and power down its RF front-end in step 7073 The BORT device will then perform a fast senal search in step 7074 and return to the calling routme in step 7075
Subsequent to the coarse search m step 7003, the BORT device makes a tnp event decision in step 7004 If m step 7004 it was decided that a tπp event occurred, the process proceeds to step 7005 where the BORT device powers up its RF front-end for reception on CDMA channel 2 and demodulates the data message m step 7006 In step 7007, the BORT device determines whether or not the BORT device acquired a synchromzation message If a synchromzation message was present, the BORT device performs an additional coarse search on CDMA 3 (m steps 7008 and 7009) and then searches for an additional data message m step 7020, which is continued m Figure 70B If the respective condition of either step 7004 or step 7007 is not met, the BORT device has become active and has not detected a valid synchronization message, and so control is then passed to step 7010
If the BORT device is receive only, the BORT device remains active, repeating steps 7003 through 7006 until a subsequent synchronization message is detected, satisfying the condition of step 7007 From step 7010, if the device has transmit capability, then the device has the option to power up its RF section m step 7011 m preparation for transmitting a handshaking message The process then proceeds to step 7012 where the BORT device initiates a handshaking protocol with a system transceiver on CDMA channel 1 to acquire system timing information and then proceeds to step 7060, which is the beginning of a shutdown routme
This shutdown process is explained m reference to Figure 70B where the shutdown routine begins m step 7060 and continues to step 7061, where the RF front-end is powered down Subsequently, in step 7062, the BORT device sets the low-power sleep timer correctly so that the BORT device will awaken during the next network synchronization penod Other tasks are performed as necessary to minimize sleep cuπent loading and to assist the BORT device in its subsequent wake-up interval Finally, the shutdown process proceeds to step 7063 where the BORT device enters a low-power sleep state
Step 7020, shown in Figure 70B, initiates a data message search process which occurs after the BORT device has performed a coarse search, as was discussed in reference to step 7007 in Figure 70A If atrip condition is met in step 7021, the BORT device starts a message tuner m step 7022 and receives and demodulates the message m step 7023 Next, m step 7024 the BORT device veπfies that the mcommg message was mtended for that device If that BORT device was the mtended recipient ofthe message, the process contmues to step 7025 where the BORT device verifies that the incommg message was valid If the message was valid, then the process continues to step 7026 where the BORT device transmits an acknowledgment on CDMA channel 1 and then in step 7027 responds to any commands that were embedded within the message The process then proceeds to step 7028, where BORT device determines if there are any outgoing messages to be transmitted to the system transceivers 6811-6813 From step 7021 , if the BORT device does not detect any incommg messages from the system transceiver, then process flow also passes to step 7028 Also from step 7024, if the BORT device determines that it was not the intended recipient of any incoming messages, then the process proceeds to step 7028, where the BORT device determines if there are any outgomg messages that are to be transmitted to the system transceivers
6811-6813 If not, the process continues to step 7060, which initiates the shutdown procedure If there are one or more messages to be transmitted to the system transceivers 6811-6813, the BORT device will initiate preparations for transmission m step 7029 From step 7026, if the received message had an error, the process proceeds to step 7032 where the device determines if the message timer has expired If the tuner has expired, then the BORT device will quit (e g , time out) and pass control to step 7028 If the timer has not expired, the BORT will send a "not acknowledge" command on CDMA 1 (step 7033) The process then proceeds to step 7034 where the device performs a coarse search on CDMA channel 1 In step 7035, if no tnp condition is met, then the device performs the steps of 7033 and 7034 until either a trip condition is met or the timer expires If a trip condition is met m 7035, the process proceeds to step 7036 where the BORT device will apply power to its RF front-end on CDMA channel 1 and demodulate the message in step 7037
In step 7038 the BORT device veπfies that the mcommg message was mtended for that device If the BORT device was the mtended recipient ofthe message, the process continues to step 7039 where the BORT device verifies that the commg message was valid If the message was valid, the process contmues to step 7026 where the BORT device transmits an acknowledgment on CDMA channel 1 If the conditions of either steps 7038 or 7039 are not met, then process control is returned to step 7032
From step 7029, the device will power down its RF front-end and then seed a random timer as shown m step 7030 After the timer determines the time coπesponding to the seed expires in step 7031, the process continues in step 7040, as will be discussed m reference to Figure 70C The process continues in step 7042, where the BORT device powers up its RF front-end with channel CDMA 1 settings as its default settings The BORT device is configured so that an external event (step 7080) can cause the device to awaken from sleep mode (step 7041 ) and power up its RF section in CDMA channel 1 (step 7042) The device will start its message timer in 7043, and then transmit the outgomg messages in step 7044 At this point, the BORT device is expecting an acknowledgment from the system transceiver In step 7045, the device performs a coarse search on CDMA channel 1 The process proceeds to step 7046, where a trip decision is made If a trip occurred, the BORT device will receive and demodulate the message m 7047 and then venfy that the incoming message was mtended for that device in 7048 If the device was the mtended recipient of the message, the process contmues to step 7049 where the device verifies that the mcommg message was valid If the message was valid, then the process contmues m step 7050 where the BORT device venfies that the message was an acknowledgment message from the system transceiver If the message was a valid acknowledgment message, then the device will clear its outgomg message queue m 7051 and then enter shutdown mode in 7060 Note that if the conditions of steps 7046, 7049, or 7050 are not met, then the process proceeds to step 7052 where the device determines if its message timer has expired If the message timer has not expired, then process control returns to step 7044 Otherwise, control is passed to 7053, where the BORT device transmits an eπor message and then proceeds to step 7060, which initiates the shutdown routme A flow diagram for the processes implemented in the system transceivers 6811 -6813 begms in step 7102 of Figure 71 A and continues to step 7104 when a command is received from the system controller 6820 (from Figure 68) to broadcast a synchronization pulse As a background task in step 7100, the transceiver monitors the system bus 6825 and queue all messages that need to be transmitted to the BORT devices 6801-6803 From step 7104, the process proceeds to step 7106 where the transceiver transmits a synchronization pulse on CDMA channel 2 After the synchronization pulse has completed, the transceiver checks its message queue m step 7108 to see if there are any messages to be transmitted to the BORT devices 6801-6803 If there are messages to be transmitted, the transceiver will switch to CDMA channel 3 m step 7112 and then start a message tuner in step 7114 The transceiver will then transmit the message to the BORT device and pause long enough for the BORT device to respond (steps 7116, and
7117) If an acknowledgment is received m step 7118, the transceiver clears its message queue for that particular BORT device step 7120 and then the proceeds to step 7110, (as will be discussed in reference to Figure 7 IB) From step 7118, if the transceiver does not receive an acknowledgment from the BORT device, it will then check to see if the message timer has expired If the timer has not expired, control is returned to step 7116. where the message is retransmitted to the BORT device If the timer has expired, control is passed to step 7110 (Figure 7 IB)
In Figure 7 IB, the process continues to step 7130, where the system transceiver monitors CDMA channel 1 for mcommg messages from the BORT devices 6801 -6803 The transceiver remains in this loop until in step 7132 it is determined that either a message is received in step 7134 or (as was discussed m reference to Figure 71 A) the transceiver receives a message from the system controller to transmit a synchromzation pulse (step 7104) In step 7134, the transceiver starts its message tuner and then in step 7136 transceiver receives and demodulates the message Decision step 7138 determines whether or not the message was valid If the message was invalid, the process proceeds to step 7140 where the transceiver transmits a "not acknowledgment" message If the message tuner has expired (step 142), then process control returns to step 7130 to momtor for additional messages Otherwise, process control returns to step
7136 to attempt to re-acquire the message From step 7138, if the message was valid, the transceiver will transmit an acknowledgment message (step 7144) and respond to the message if necessary (step 7146) If there is any queued message for this particular BORT device, process control returns to step 7150 (as is seen in Figure 71 A), otherwise, control is returned to step 7130 Figures 72, 73 , 74, 75, 76 and 77 show an alternative time division multiple access-based (TDMA) system/network architecture for the BORT devices The following discussion explains the low level operation ofthe BORT system devices, as were previously discussed
Figure 72 shows a steady state communication timing diagram between a system transceiver and a BORT device for three types of messages The term steady state means that these are messages used for normal exchange of information in three modes of operation Initialization and exception handling will be discussed following the steady state discussion
The system architecture is configured to minimize power dram at the BORT device A significant amount of battery power is expended m the BORT device whenever it receives RF energy or transmit messages, a modest amount of battery power is expended whenever the BORT device is active, but has selected circuitry in a reduced power state, examples including initialization, Fast Serial Search as discussed earlier, and sleep mode preparation, and a minimum amount of battery power is expended while the BORT device is m sleep mode because the only active circuit is a low power oscillator and counter The overall system architecture is configured to maintain positive control of the BORT devices with recovery mechamsms for re-establishing a communication link in the event of a lost message due to tuning error or interference
In order to minimize BORT power, the system transceivers behave predictably over time, and as discussed before, the BORT devices wake up on a schedule so as to retneve a system sync message To this end, one approach is for the system controller to manage the synchronization process, which is a different approach than pre-arranged options such as staggered, coincident or mterleaved system transceiver sync intervals As an exemplary embodiment, the system sync interval is fixed at 5 seconds with all transceivers interleaved and timmg controlled by the system controller Other options are also available, the preferences for each option depending on unplementation trade-offs including consideration of on-air time, probability of receipt based on mterleaved system controllers and asynchronous neighbor interference Figures 72A-C respectively show three messages which are all used to maintain sync with the system transceiver The sync message is the most common system message (Figure 72A), where this message occurs once every sync interval, 5 seconds for the puφoses of this discussion The top line, labeled "System Xcvr" shows the system transceiver sync message as transmitted The bottom line shows relatively timmg ofthe BORT device receivmg the sync message The transmitted sync message contains a leader 7202 which has sufficient duration to compensate for all timing eπors m the wake-up process in the BORT device The leader 702 contains copies ofthe spreadmg code, and the leader 7202 is followed by a sync data pattern 7204, a message type data pattern 7206, a transceiver identification (ID) data pattern 7208 and a cyclical redundant check (CRC) which serves to qualify the data message as non-corrupted Each ofthe data fields may be of length necessary to satisfy system requirements The BORT device wakes up based on a stored parameter in the previous sync interval, initializes and powers up the necessary sections ofthe device and collects one code penod of data during time mterval 7214 before shutting down the receive gain circuits for search 7215, fast serial or fast parallel search method as previously discussed Following search, the BORT re-energizes the receive circuits, performs fine search, diversity search and begins demodulating data waitmg for the sync data pattern 7216 Once the sync data pattern has been received, the BORT device calculates the actual wake-up time based on the time difference from initial search to sync data pattern. This information will be used later to calculate the next sleep interval. The BORT device continues to demodulate the remaining data 7218, detecting the message type and transceiver ID. The message type data field instructs the BORT device that the message is for sync only and no further action is required. The transceiver ID data field instructs the BORT device that it is accurately tracking the same system transceiver and has not drifted off with another transceiver. A positive lock for system integrity is therefore established by the BORT device without a need to energize a transmit circuit for the most common of system exchanges.
Figure 72B shows a second steady state communication exchange denoted as a Point to Point message between a system transceiver and a BORT device. This message may occur once every sync interval in place of a sync message. In normal operation this message is infrequent relative to the sync message by an order of magnitude. In this mode of operation, the system transceiver appends additional data to a sync message intended for a specific BORT device. It is assumed that the system controller maintains an allocation database for which BORT devices are slaved to which system transceivers. The allocation mechanism will be discussed later in the discussion of system initialization. The top line of
Figure 72B shows the system transceiver transmit process followed by the receive process. The bottom line shows the BORT receive process followed by the acknowledge (transmit) process. As in the sync message, the system transceiver sends the Point to Point message leader 7222, followed by the sync 7226, message type 7228 and transceiver ID 7230 data patterns. But unlike the sync message, additional data is appended to include a BORT ID 7231 and optional data 7232 followed by the CRC 7234. The BORT device follows the normal wake-up process and samples a code repetition interval 7242, performs search processes and demodulates the message 7244. The BORT decodes the message as a Point to Point message, notes the transceiver ID and his BORT ID and responds with an acknowledge (ACK). The ACK follows similar structure including a leader 7246, followed by data fields of sync 7248, message type (ACK) 7250, BORT ID 7252, optional data 7254 and a CRC 7256. The system transceiver is always in listen mode when not transmitting, and so the transceiver detects the BORT acknowledge 7236 and demodulates the ACK 7238 completing the point to point exchange. The system controller either polls the ACK from the system transceiver or the transceiver initiates the interchange completing a positive handshake to the system controller. Figure 72C shows a third steady state communication exchange denoted as an "All Call" message between a system transceiver and a BORT device. This message may occur once every sync interval in place of a sync message. In normal operation, this All Call message is very infrequent relative to any other system message. In this mode of operation, the system transceiver appends additional data to a sync message intended for any BORT device able to detect the message. This mode of operation is typically reserved for emergency status when the BORT devices are required to become active and remain active until the emergency state is cleared The top lme of Figure 72C shows the system transceiver transmitting the All Call message followed by receivmg the BORT ACK The bottom line shows the BORT device receiving the All Call followed by transmitting the ACK As in the sync and Point to Point message, the system transceiver sends the All Call message leader
7260, followed by the sync 7262, message type 7264 and transceiver ID 7266 data patterns The message may optionally include end-user data 7268 followed by the CRC 7270 Every BORT device slaved to the system transceiver issuing the All Call follows its normal wake-up process and samples a code repetition mterval 7278, performs search processes and demodulates the message 7280 When the BORT decodes the message as an All Call message, the BORT notes the transceiver ID and responds with an acknowledge
(ACK) A high potential for collision exists as all BORT devices are trying to ACK the message simultaneously So as to reduce contention probability, a delay is initiated by the BORT pnor to sending the ACK to stagger the respective replies to the system transceiver The BORT calculates the delay 7282 based on the sync interval divided by the BORT ID (or a number of bits in the BORT ID) which staggers the BORT devices to assist in collision avoidance The ACK data structure mcludes a leader 7284, followed by data fields of sync 7286, message type (ACK) 7288, BORT ID 7290, optional data 7292 and a CRC 7294 The system transceiver is always m listen mode when not transmitting 7272 The transceiver detects the BORT acknowledge 7273 and demodulates the ACK 7274 completing the communication exchange The system controller either polls the ACK from the system transceiver or the transceiver initiates the interchange completing a positive handshake to the system controller
Figure 73 A and 73B show a flow diagram ofthe steady state processing coπesponding with Figure 72 The steady state process begins m step 7300 where once per sync interval the BORT wakes up, performs a search in step 7302 and makes a decision as to whether a trip condition exists in step 7304 The coarse search step 7302 is implemented as a subroutme call which is shown starting in step 7380 where the receiver RF front-end components are energized in step 7382, one code repetition interval is sampled and stored m step 7384 and the RF front-end is de-energized prior to a fast serial search step 7388 where the coπelation function is performed pnor to returning, m step 7390, to step 7302 This coarse search subroutine is also called, as shown in Figures 75 and 77 Because the present portion ofthe process is a sync processmg thread, the BORT device expects to find a tnp condition, but if no tnp condition is found, the BORT device assumes sync has been lost or the expected message was jammed and processmg contmues m step 7320 where the system transceiver is re-acquired Re-sync operation will be discussed later as shown in Figures 76 and 77
If a tnp was found as expected, the receive thread is initiated m step 7306 and the BORT device performs fine search, waits for the sync byte in order to establish a tune-tag for use later in setting the sleep interval (in step 7308) The message is demodulated and data fields extracted As the BORT device is attempting to maintain lock with one system transceiver, a check is made to determine if the message originated from the correct transceiver m step 7310 If the transceiver ID is not as expected, then synchronization with the desired transceiver is lost and a re-sync operation is performed m step 7318 If the transceiver ID is correct, then the BORT device has mamtained sync and the message type is evaluated m steps 7312, 7314 and 7316
If the message type does not match one ofthe three allowed steady state messages, the exception handler defaults to the re-sync function of step 7318 If the received message type is a standard sync message, the algorithm continues through steps 7324 and 7330 to 7332 where the time of sync byte relative to the wake up time is used in a digital lock loop in step 7334 to calculate the sleep tune which will wake up the BORT device in the leader ofthe next sync message The sleep timer is set in step 7336 and the BORT device enters a power down mode in step 7338 awaiting sleep timer wake up in the next sync interval
If the received message was a Point to Pomt message in step 7314, the algonthm continues through steps 7326 and 7340 to 7342 where the BORT ID is evaluated in step 7342 If the received BORT ID matches the ID of the BORT device, the data bits are used to instruct the BORT on which function to perform in step 7344 An optional short delay is performed in step 7346 prior to a BORT ACK message in step 7348 The delay may be necessary to ensure the system transceiver is ready to receive the message, l e settling time for reversal of transmit to receive Once the ACK has been sent, the BORT is ready to enter sleep mode and exits through the sync message process 7330 as discussed before If the received message was an All Call message in step 7316, the algonthm continues through steps 7328 and 7350 to 7352 where the BORT performs the All Call function based on the message data in step 7352 The delay is calculated in step 7354 to stagger the BORT devices acknowledge messages and the ACK is sent in step 7356 The BORT then enters an extended search cycle continually searching in step 7358 looking for a new trip condition as step 7359 The BORT device does not sleep following an All Call reception If a trip is found in step 7359, the process continues in the normal steady state processing thread at step 7306 through steps 7360 and 7322 In this manner, successive All Call messages are received and processed at whatever rate the system controller and transceiver desires If the All Call condition is resolved, the system controller and transceivers send either a sync or Pomt to Point message where the BORT device enters a sleep mode following receipt
The above discussion assumes the system is operating in a steady state mode Exception handling and initialization are detailed below
Figures 74A and B depict the system initialization sequence, where Figure 74A shows a timeline of two system transceivers, both being received by a BORT device on the lines shown m Figure 74B Transceiver A and Transceiver B of Figure 74A are shown staggered to demonstrate this process and the blocks on each line depict a complete transmitted or received message, solid blocks representing message steps in the acquisition flow. Each system transceiver continues to transmit sync messages 7402 and 7406 at a predefined system interval. The BORT device on power-up or initialization remains active continually searching at 7408 looking for atrip. Once atrip is found, the message is demodulated at times 7410, 7412 for a period so as to establish a good estimate of signal to noise ratio per system transceiver. A running average of SNR is maintained for several transceivers. This process is continued until at least four sync messages are collected from at least one system transceiver.
Once an estimate of SNR is complete, the BORT device nominates its selection to the system controller at time 7414 which contains as data the transceiver ID and SNR for the best of up to three system transceivers evaluated. All system transceivers hearing the nomination receive it at 7413 , and 7415 and relay it to the system controller along with the SNR of receipt by the system transceivers. The system controller now has the SNR measurements relative to the BORT device and all system transceivers able to hear the BORT device where a determination is made as to allocation. The system controller allocates which system transceiver is associated with the BORT device and the chosen system controller relays this information to the BORT device at 7416. The BORT device continues to receive all messages following its nomination at time 7414 awaiting the allocation assignment which comes in the form of a Point to Point message at time 7416 from the system controller assigned. The BORT device receives the allocation Point to Point message at 7418 and acknowledges at time 7420 to complete the Point to Point exchange. The BORT device now has its transceiver ID and timing to enter sleep mode and enter steady state operation.
If the allocation message at 7416 does not arrive within a predetermined time-out interval 7422, the BORT device assumes its nomination was not heard and re-issues it. Alternatively, the BORT may sleep for an extended period of time and attempt a new initialization, which may be a reasonable strategy for non-critical systems to compensate for extended power outages or system failures while preserving valuable BORT battery life.
Figure 75 is a flowchart ofthe above-described procedure, where upon wake-up or initialization determination in step 7500 an array of sync counters is initialized in step 7502 to keep track of how many sync messages have been received from a few system transceivers. The BORT device continues to search in step 7504 until a trip is found in step 7506 where the RF front-end section is re-energized in step 7508 and the message is captured and demodulated in step 7510. The RF front-end section is placed in a reduced power state in step 7516 and the message is evaluated to see if it is a sync type (repetitive) message in step 7518. If the message is not repetitive, it is not considered as the time tag captured will be used to seed the sleep timer and the BORT resumes search 7504. If the message is repetitive, the time information is stored in an array based on the transceiver ID 7520 since the decision as to which transceiver to use is not yet made. In step 7522, a running average is made for the SNR of each transceiver being evaluated and a counter is incremented in step 7524 counting the number of sync messages received from a specific transceiver. If none ofthe counts exceed a predetermined number as determined in step 7526 the BORT resumes search in step 7504. If any ofthe counts exceed a predetermined number as determined in step 7526 the three best transceivers are selected based on SNR in step 7528 and a BORT nomination message is sent containing the transceiver ID and SNR for the best three candidates as observed by the BORT 7530.
A response time-out is started in step 7532 and the BORT searches continually in step 7534 until a trip is received in step 7536, the trip may or may not be the response expected. The RF front-end section is energized in step 7542 and the message is demodulated in step 7544 and considered in step 7546. If the message is not the expected response, the BORT device resumes search in step 7534. If the message is the response to the nomination, the allocated system transceiver ID is decoded from the data in step 7548 and stored for future reference in non-volatile memory. A Point to Point ACK is formed in step 7550 and sent and the BORT device enters sleep mode in steps 7552 and 7554. If while the BORT is waiting for a response at 7536 and not found, a time-out is incremented in step 7538 and evaluated at step 7540. If the time-out expires before the response is received the process starts over step 7502 (or alternatively the
BORT device may enter an extended sleep interval to preserve battery conditions before resuming at step 7502).
If a BORT device detects loss of sync, it enters a re-sync mode depicted in Figures 76A-C and 77. Figure 76A depicts a first tier of re-sync where the BORT device initiates a negative acknowledge (NAK) exchange. If re-sync fails according to that method, the procedure according to Figure 76B is used as a second tier where the BORT device waits for the next sync message and resets. If re-sync fails according to that method, the procedure according to Figure 76C is used as a third and final tier where the BORT device eventually enters the initialization mode, discussed earlier.
In Figure 76 A, the top line illustrates exemplary system transceiver activity at particular times such as sending sync messages 7602 and 7604, as shown. The BORT device processes the sync message at time
7608 but has a failure at time 7610 where the captured search interval does not coincide with the sync message of 7604. The same condition would exist if the system transceiver sync of 7604 were jammed relative to the BORT device. The BORT device initiates a NAK message 7612 and begins to immediately listen at 7616 for a NAK Reply 7614. When the system transceiver hears the NAK it repeats the previous message sent at the sync interval as a NAK Reply 7614 which includes a time value to the next scheduled sync message. The BORT device seeds the sleep mode timer and resumes normal processing at 7620. If the system controller fails to respond with the NAK Reply of 7614 or the BORT device cannot hear the NAK Reply, the BORT device continues to listen 7622 until the next sync message is heard at 7624 and normal processing resumes. If the BORT device fails to reacquire by either the NAK or waiting for sync, the BORT assumes the transceiver has failed, and enters an initialization mode 7630 following a predetermined time-out at 7628.
Figure 77 is a flow diagram ofthe re-sync process starting at step 7700. In the normal wake-up process of Figure 73 A a deterination is made that a re-sync is necessary (steps 7318 or 7320), thus initiating the re-sync process in step 7700, after which in step 7704, a wait time is calculated for generating a NAK message based on the BORT ID (or some number of bits of the BORT ID). The wait time is necessary to compensate for the situation where a jammer jams reception ofthe sync message to several BORT devices at the same time. By staggering their reply, the reliability, at the system level, of re-acquiring sync improves. The NAK is transmitted by the BORT device in step 7706 and a time-out interval is started in step 7708. The BORT device continually searches in step 7710 and upon finding a trip event in step 7712 energizes the RF front-end at step 7718 and demodulates the message in step 7720.
If the message received is the NAK Reply in step 7722, the sleep timer is seeded with a value to wake up the BORT device in the next sync interval in step 7726 based on the time value passed in the NAK Reply. The BORT system then enters a sleep mode in step 7728 and resumes normal operation. If the response received was not a NAK Reply, the response is evaluated to determine if the response is a standard steady state sync type message in step 7724. If so, the timer is set for a standard sync interval in step 7726 and the BORT device sleeps in step 7728. If the received message is neither a NAK Reply nor a sync message, the NAK time-out is incremented at step 7713 and evaluated at step 7714. While waiting for a NAK Reply in step 7712, the NAK time-out is incremented in step 7713 and evaluated in step
7714. If the NAK time-out expires, the BORT device enters the initialization mode 7716, 7500.
The mechanisms and processes set forth in the present description may also be implemented using a conventional general puφose microprocessor or digital signal processor (such as a TMS320C40, although, as discussed many of the inventive mechanisms and processes disclosed herein may be implemented in lower cost, lower performance processors) programmed according to the teachings in the present specification, as will be appreciated to those skilled in the relevant art(s). Appropriate software coding can readily be prepared by skilled programmers based on the teachings ofthe present disclosure, as will also be apparent to those skilled in the relevant art(s).
The present invention thus also includes a computer-based product which may be hosted on a storage medium and include instructions which can be used to program a computer to perform a process in accordance with the present invention. This storage medium can include, but is not limited to, any type of disk including floppy disks, optical disks, CD-ROMs, magneto-optical disks, ROMs, RAMs, EPROMs, EEPROMs, flash memory, magnetic or optical cards, or any type of media suitable for storing electronic instructions.
Obviously, numerous modifications and variations ofthe present invention are possible in light of the above teachings, and in particular hybrids between the signal channel transceiver, multi-channel transceiver and BORT-based network embodiments. It is therefore to be understood that within the scope ofthe appended claims, the invention may be practiced otherwise than as specifically described herein.
To this end, an exemplary single channel embodiment of a transceiver has been described as a first embodiment ofthe present invention (see e.g., Figures 9, 10, 11), and a multi-channel embodiment has also been described as a second embodiment (see, e.g., Figures 9, and 35-36), where features ofthe respective embodiments may be exchanged with one another, albeit for potential penalties of cost, performance and complexity, as has been discussed. Accordingly, the present invention is directed not only to the claims as individually described, but also directed to combinations of the claims and alternative mechanisms as discussed herein.
More particularly, the multi-channel transceiver and single channel transceiver may both use a one- bit limited ADC or a multi-bit linear ADC. The simplicity ofthe one-bit limited ADC does not require the
AGC function as discussed in reference to the multi-channel embodiment, and Figure 35 for example, but the single channel embodiment could also use the multi-bit linear ADC, with AGC as discussed herein, although requiring additional processing power.
Both the single channel embodiment and the multi-channel embodiment have been explained with respect to particular examples given for decimation ratios, sampling rates etc. However, the approaches discussed for the single channel embodiment for digital downconversion-decimation, including the look-up table approach (see e.g., Figure 12), Boolean logic approach (see e.g., Figure 13) as well as coefficient-less approach, as discussed in the section entitled "Coefficient-less Down Conversation, Despread and Decimation in a DSP Processor" may also be implemented in the multi-channel embodiment. While the discussion regarding DC removal with respect to Figure 35, was made in the context of the multi-channel embodiment, the discussion is equally applicable to the single channel embodiment in which a multi-bit linear ADC is also used. Regarding the techniques for compensating for decimation loss, both the digital offset approach discussed with respect to Figure 14, as well as the frequency offsetting of the first local oscillator, and cycling through various offsets, may be employed in either the single channel or the multi-channel embodiment. Simultaneously computing all the offsets was an option discussed herein, such an option may be more suitable for use in a multi-channel embodiment or a hybrid embodiment between the multi-channel embodiment and single channel embodiment due to processing complexity and cost concerns. As with the other alternatives, penalties paid are in terms of cost and complexity. Similarly, the averaging approach discussed with regard to improving trip sensitivity and limiting decimation loss may also be employed in both the single channel and multi-channel embodiments, albeit for an increase in processing complexity. The set-on channel filter approach was discussed with respect to the multi-channel embodiment, see e.g., Figure 39, although it may also be applicable in the single channel embodiment, albeit at a more expensive computation cost to improve sensitivity and process gain during demodulation. The various fine search center of mass methods (see e.g, Figures 19-22 and DBPSK, as discussed with respect to Figures 31 and 32, for example), may be implemented in either the single channel or the multichannel embodiment.
Both the single channel and the multi-channel embodiments are directed to direct sequence spread spectrum transceivers, that may be used in a system or network and both using a PN code as previously been discussed. The particular features of the PN code length, discussed with respect to Table 3, for example, is applicable to both the single channel and multi-channel embodiments. As was previously discussed, the selection ofthe PN code length, is an enabling feature regarding partial decimation as well as FFT radix based on small prime numbers, implemented in both embodiments.
Various other features have been discussed with respect to partial decimation in order to set a predetection bandwidth. While separate examples have been given with respect to the multi-channel and single channel embodiment, the present description should not be limited to only these particular descriptions, but rather other embodiments that will be extensions ofthe particular examples discussed herein, as well as devices which may be built in light ofthe present teachings.
Figures 30A-F have been presented in the context of the first embodiment, however, these approaches may be employed in either single channel or multi-channel embodiment, albeit for increased computational complexity as discussed herein. Figure 34 described a circuit for precharging a voltage controlled oscillator for fast settling acquisition, however, this circuit may also be used in the multi-channel embodiment as well, and any hybrid between the single channel embodiment and the multi-channel embodiment. Figures 40-45, discussed various frequency domain code correlators, which were presented in the context ofthe multi-channel embodiment. However, provided sufficient processing resources are available, these approaches may also be implemented in the single channel embodiment so as to provide an FFT based down conversation despread and decimation operation subsequent decimation in die frequency domain may be used to expand or set the predetection bandwidth as necessary for system requirements. The fast serial search approach discussed with respect to Figures 15A-B and 16, for example, are equally applicable in the multi-channel receiver implementation. Likewise, various power management features ofthe inventive transceiver, as discussed with respect to Figure 9, the battery pack of Figure 10, and that as discussed with respect to the BORT, are equally applicable in a single channel or multi-channel transceivers. Features regarding on-off keying, (see e.g. discussion regarding Figure 25, for example), may be applicable to either the single channel or multi-channel transceivers that use the one-bit limited ADC. The respective diversity approaches (antenna and frequency, for example, discussed with respect to Figures 9, 24-27, and Figures 68 (CDMA)), are applicable to both the single channel and multi-channel embodiment, and therefore are also applicable to hybrid embodiments. Likewise, the discussion regarding the BORT system and network (see e.g., Figures 67-77) are equally applicable to the single channel embodiment and the multi-channel embodiment, as either the single channel transceiver, multi-channel transceiver or a hybrid, may be employed in the BORT system network. Furthermore, the discussion regarding the elimination of redundant data in a multi-drop network, (discussed with reference to Figure 67, for example) is also applicable to the single channel embodiment, as well as the multi-channel embodiment and any embodiment therebetween. Likewise, the discussion regarding predictive repositioning discussed with respect to Figures 66A-C, for example, as well as Figure 39, are applicable to both the single channel and multi-channel embodiment.
While a few examples of how the various features ofthe inventive transceiver have been discussed above, it should be understood that the above-described combinations are only a subset of those that are possible as a natural extension of the exemplary embodiments discussed herein. Therefore, the above- identified combinations should not be construed as being an exhaustive listing, but rather an exemplary set of combinations that are considered part ofthe invention.

Claims

CLAIMS: What is Claimed is:
1. A direct sequence spread spectrum system comprising: a transmitter configured to transmit a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, comprising, a transmitter frequency reference that produces a frequency with a predetermined accuracy, a spreading code generator that generates said spreading code with a predetermined transmit signal chipping frequency error and modulates a data signal with said spreading code to produce a spread data signal having a frequency error component attributable to said predetermined accuracy ofthe transmitter frequency reference, a radio frequency generator that produces a radio frequency signal having a frequency error attributable to said predetermined accuracy of said frequency reference, and a transmitter signal combiner configured to receive and combine said radio frequency signal and said spread data signal to produce the direct sequence spread spectrum signal; and a receiver configured to extract said data signal from said direct sequence spread spectrum signal transmitted from said transmitter, comprising, a receiver frequency reference that produces a frequency with another predetermined accuracy, a code generator that generates said spreading code, said spreading code having a receiver chipping frequency error component, a receiver radio frequency generator configured to produce a downconversion signal derived from said frequency of said receiver frequency reference, said downconversion signal having a frequency error attributable to said predetermined accuracy of said frequency from said receiver frequency reference, a receiver signal combiner that combines the direct sequence spread spectrum signal with the downconversion signal to produce a translated signal, said translated signal including said frequency eπor of said transmitter radio frequency signal eπor component and the downconversion signal error component, a sampling device that samples the translated signal at a frequency that is four times a center frequency ofthe translated signal to produce a sampled signal, a despreading and downconverting combiner coupled to the code generator and configured to despread and downconvert the sampled signal, comprising, a sign inversion mechanism that inverts a sign of respective samples of said sampled signal so as to despread and downconvert said sampled signal, and at least one data signal detector configured to detect the data signal, a composite bandwidth of said at least one data signal detector being in a range including a data signal bandwidth and a frequency uncertainty bandwidth of said signal due to at least the predetermined accuracy ofthe transmitter frequency reference.
2. The system of Claim 1, wherein said receiver comprises at least one of a single channel receiver and a multi-channel receiver.
3. The system of Claim 1, wherein said predetermined accuracy of said transmitter frequency reference causing said frequency eπor of the radio frequency signal and said transmit signal chipping frequency eπor to be not independent of one another, said transmit signal chipping frequency error inducing a performance degradation at said receiver due to a time dependent reposition eπor.
4. The system of Claim 1, wherein: said transmitter frequency reference comprises means for producing the frequency with the predetermined accuracy; said spreading code generator of said generator comprises means for generating said spreading code ; said radio frequency generator comprises means for producing said radio frequency signal; said transmitter signal combiner comprises means for producing the direct sequence spread spectrum signal; said receiver frequency reference comprises means for producing said frequency with another predetermined accuracy; said code generator of said receiver comprises means for generating said spreading code having said receiver chipping frequency eπor component; said receiver radio frequency generator comprises means for producing said downconversion signal; said receiver signal combiner comprises means for combining the direct sequence spread spectrum signal with the downconversion signal to produce the translated signal; said sampling device comprises means for sampling the translated signal at the frequency that is four times the center frequency ofthe translated signal so as to produce the sampled signal; and said despreading and downconverting combiner comprises means for despreading and downconverting the sampled signal, comprising, means for sign inverting the sign of respective samples of said sampled signal so as to despread and downconvert said sampled signal, and means for detecting the data signal, the composite bandwidth of said at least one data signal detector being in the range including the data signal bandwidth and the frequency uncertainty bandwidth of said signal due to at least the predetermined accuracy ofthe transmitter frequency reference.
5. A method for implementing in a receiver digital downconversion and decimation on a received signal represented by a serial stream of data samples, comprising the steps of: decimating said serial digital data by using a subset of said data samples to form a parallel digital data set and using said parallel digital data set as an input indica to a database mechanism configured to produce a baseband data sample that coπesponds to the input indica; downconverting said non-baseband signal by producing the baseband data sample that corresponds with said parallel digital data set; and outputting the baseband data sample as a component of a baseband signal that coπesponds with said received signal.
6. The method of Claim 5, wherein: said decimating step comprises using said parallel data set as the input indica to the database, and implementing said database in at least one of a boolean logic circuit and semiconductor memory.
7. The method of Claim 5, wherein said downconversion step comprises complex downconverting with inphase and quadrature components.
8. A receiver comprising: a digital downconverter and decimator that downconverts and decimates a received signal represented by a serial stream of data samples, comprising, means for decimating said serial digital data by using a subset of said data samples to form a parallel digital data set and using said parallel digital data set as an input indica to a database mechanism configured to produce a baseband data sample that coπesponds to the input indica; means for downconverting said non-baseband signal by producing the baseband data sample that corresponds with said parallel digital data set; and means for outputting the baseband data sample as a component of a baseband signal that corresponds with said received signal.
9. A method for simultaneously downconverting and applying a spreading code to a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, said spreading code having previously been used by a transmitter to spread a data signal at a predetermined chip rate, comprising the steps of: sampling said signal at a sampling rate, Fs, to produce data samples, wherein said sampling rate, Fs, being four times a center frequency of said sampled signal, Fs being a multiple, M, ofthe code chip rate, M having a value of at least 1 and representing an oversample ratio; downconverting and despreading respective samples in a signal signing step comprising, inverting a sign value of one of said data samples if a product of a downconversion coefficient and a despreading code coefficient is negative, not inverting if said product is positive, and zeroing said data sample if said product is zero.
10. The method of Claim 9, wherein said downconverting and despreading step comprises: assigning a value of 1 to respective downconversion coefficient that coincide in time with a positive maximum value of a sinusoid having a frequency equal to the center frequency of said sampled signal, assigning a value of 0 to respective downconversion coefficients that coincide in time with a zero crossing at said sinusoid; and assigning a value of -1 to respective downconversion coefficients that coincide in time with a negative maximum of said sinusoid.
11. A receiver configured to simultaneously downconvert and apply a spreading code to a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, said spreading code having previously been used by a transmitter to spread a data signal at a predetermined chip rate, comprising: means for sampling said signal at a sampling rate, Fs, to produce data samples, wherein said sampling rate, Fs, being four times a center frequency of said sampled signal, Fs being a multiple, M, of the code chip rate, M having a value of at least 1 and representing an oversample ratio; means for downconverting and despreading respective samples in a signal sample signing means comprising, means for inverting a sign value of one of said data samples if a product of a downconversion coefficient and a despreading code coefficient is negative, not inverting if said product is positive, and zeroing said data sample if said product is zero.
12. A method for suppressing self-interference of a signal subjected to a digital decimation process in a receiver, comprising the steps of: inputting said signal as digital data samples at a predetermined sample rate, respective of said digital data samples including a direct current error component; approximating the direct current eπor component by combining at least a subset of said digital data samples; decimating said digital data samples and producing decimated data samples at another predetermined sample rate that is lower than said predetermined sample rate of said digital data samples, wherein said decimating step applies a decimation gain to respective ofthe decimated data samples and enhances said direct current error component in respective of said decimated data samples; identifying said decimation gain; calculating a correction factor by combining the direct current eπor and the decimation gain for each decimation block; and subtracting the correction factor from at least one ofthe decimated data samples so as to suppress a self-interference effect on the signal ofthe direct cuπent error component after being enhanced by the decimating step.
13. The method of Claim 12, wherein said approximating step comprises approximating the direct cuπent eπor component by calculating in a processor a mathematical means so as to determine an average.
14. The method of Claim 12, wherein said identifying step, comprises retrieving predetermined decimation gains from a look-up table. 15. A receiver for suppressing self-interference of a signal subjected to a digital decimation process, comprising: means for inputting said signal as digital data samples at a predetermined sample rate, respective of said digital data samples including a direct cuπent error component; means for approximating the direct cuπent eπor component by combining at least a subset of said digital data samples; means for decimating said digital data samples and producing decimated data samples at another predetermined sample rate that is lower than said predetermined sample rate of said digital data samples, wherein said means for decimating applies a decimation gain to respective ofthe decimated data samples and enhances said direct current eπor component in respective of said decimated data samples; means for identifying said decimation gain; means for calculating a coπection factor by combining the direct cuπent eπor and the decimation gain for each decimation block; and means for subtracting the coπection factor from at least one ofthe decimated data samples so as to suppress a self-interference effect on the signal of the direct current eπor component after being enhanced by the means for decimating.
16. A method for removing ambiguity from an automatic gain control signal used to control a signal level of a received signal in a receiver, said receiver not configured to maintain an overflow indication for successive processing steps when an overflow result occurs therein, comprising the steps of: adjusting a signal level control mechanism to position the signal level of the received signal to within a dynamic range of an analog-to-digital converter that converts the received signal into a corresponding digital signal; inputting the received signal to the analog-to-digital converter; determining a level ofthe received signal input to the analog-to-digital converter and detecting that the level is not within a predetermined portion of the dynamic range of the analog-to-digital converter, comprising the steps of, sequentially adjusting said signal level from a minimum gain to a maximum gain when said level is detected as not being within the predetermined portion ofthe dynamic range, identifying a noise power during while sequentially adjusting said signal level, and stopping said sequentially adjusting step at a gain setting that produces a minimum noise power; and performing a digital signal operation on said digital signal using a signal processing element which does not maintain the overflow indication.
17. A method for reducing signal loss caused by decimating a digital signal in a receiver with a decimation operator having a predetermined bandwidth, a response characteristic of said decimation operator imparting a greater amount of attenuation in a first part of said bandwidth than in a second part of said bandwidth, comprising the steps of: receiving said signal with said receiver, said receiver employing a receiver frequency reference that operates within a predetermined accuracy; decimating said signal with said decimation operator to reduce a sample rate of said signal, where a position of said signal in said predetermined bandwidth being influenced by a frequency offset between a transmitter frequency reference and said receiver frequency reference; determining an amount by which said signal is removed in frequency from said second part of said bandwidth and whether said amount is greater than a predetermined standard; and adjusting a signal downconversion operation by an amount and a direction sufficient to reposition said signal within said second part of said bandwidth, when said determining step determines that the amount by which the signal is from the second part of said bandwidth is greater than said standard. 18. The method of Claim 17, wherein said determining step comprises calculating a magnitude and a direction ofthe frequency offset relative to said second part of said bandwidth.
19. The method of Claim 17, wherein said adjusting step comprises substituting a baseband downconversion coefficient set with another set that translates said signal to within said second part of said bandwidth. 20. The method of Claim 17, wherein said determining step comprises determining a center of said bandwidth as being said second part of said bandwidth, and a band edge as being said first part of said bandwidth.
21. A receiver that reduces signal loss caused by decimating a digital signal with a decimation operator having a predetermined bandwidth, a response characteristic of said decimation operator imparting a greater amount of attenuation in a first part of said bandwidth than in a second part of said bandwidth, comprising: means for receiving said signal and a receiver frequency reference that operates within a predetermined accuracy; means for decimating said signal with said decimation operator to reduce a sample rate of said signal, where a position of said signal in said predetermined bandwidth being influenced by a frequency offset between a transmitter frequency reference and said receiver frequency reference, means for determmmg an amount by which said signal is removed m frequency from said second part of said bandwidth and whether said amount is greater than a predetermined standard, and means for adjusting a signal downconversion operation by an amount and a direction sufficient to reposition said signal withm said second part of said bandwidth, when said means for determmmg determines that the amount by which the signal is from the second part of said bandwidth is greater than said standard 22 A method for reducing signal loss caused by decimation in a receiver of a direct sequence spread spectrum signal transmitted from a transmitter, said decimation havmg associated therewith a predetermined bandwidth and response charactenstic, said response characteristic imparting a greater amount of attenuation in a first part of said bandwidth than in a second part of said bandwidth, comprising the steps of receiving said signal with said receiver, said receiver employing a receiver frequency reference and said transmitter employing a transmitter frequency reference where the tolerances of the respective references combine to create a predetermined signal position uncertainty range in which said signal is positioned pnor to demodulation ofthe signal, decimatmg said signal with said decimation operator to reduce a sample rate of said signal, subdividing said predetermined signal position uncertamty range bandwidth mto a plurality of candidate downconversion frequency bands, changing an amount by which a downconversion operator translates the signal toward the second part of said bandwidth, where said amount is set by assuming the signal is placed in one ofthe plurality of candidate downconversion frequency bands, attemptmg to correlate said signal with a spreading code used to spread the signal at the transmitter and determmmg whether correlation is achieved, and repeating sequentially said changing step for the other channels and stopping said repeating step when said determining step determines that correlation is achieved 23 The method of Claim 22, wherein said repeatmg step compnses performing said changing step for the other channels until the changing step has been performed for all ofthe channels, said determinmg step comprises, decidmg that coπelation is achieved after the changing step has been performed for all of the channels, and determining which of the plurality of candidate downconversion frequencv bands vielded the greatest correlation result
24 The method of Claim 22, further comprising the step of using the selected downconverted frequency bands for subsequent data demodulation and resuming sunultaneous course search following said subsequent data demodulation
25 A receiver that reduces signal loss caused by decimation of a direct sequence spread spectrum signal transmitted from a transmitter, said decimation havmg associated therewith a predetermined bandwidth and response charactenstic, said response characteristic impartmg a greater amount of attenuation in a first part of said bandwidth than in a second part of said bandwidth, comprising means for receiving said signal usmg a receiver frequency reference, said transmitter employing a transmitter frequency reference where the tolerances of the respective references combine to create a predetermined signal position uncertamty range m which said signal is positioned pnor to demodulation ofthe signal, means for decimatmg said signal with said decimation operator to reduce a sample rate of said signal, means for subdividing said predetermined signal position uncertainty range bandwidth mto a plurality of candidate downconversion frequency bands, means for changing an amount by which a downconversion operator translates the signal toward the second part of said bandwidth, where said amount is set by assummg the signal is placed in one ofthe plurality of candidate downconversion frequency bands, attemptmg to coπelate said signal with a spreadmg code used to spread the signal at the transmitter and determinmg whether correlation is achieved, and means for repeatmg sequentially said changing step for the other channels and stoppmg said repeating step when said determining step determines that correlation is achieved
26 The receiver of Claim 25, wherein said means for repeatmg compnses said means for changing for the other channels until the means for changing has been performed for all ofthe channels, said means for determining compnses, means for deciding that coπelation is achieved after the means for changing has operated on all ofthe channels, and means for determmmg which ofthe plurality of candidate downconversion frequency bands vielded the greatest coπelation result
27. A method of filtering a digital signal with digital symmetric channel filters in a digital spread spectrum receiver, comprising the steps of: providing a quadrature stream of data samples that include said signal, said quadrature stream of samples having a bandwidth equal to or greater than a frequency uncertainty range, said frequency uncertainty range being a frequency range in which said signal is contained although a precise location of said signal within said range is not a priori known because of a frequency difference between a frequency reference used in a transmitter that transmitted said signal and another frequency reference in the receiver that receives said signal; calculating in positive channel and negative channel pairs a power in respective of a plurality of channels each having a bandwidth being less than said bandwidth of said quadrature stream of samples, comprising the steps of, performing a quadrature sinusoidal transform for the positive channel and preserving intermediate product terms, performing another quadrature sinusoidal transform for the negative channel that is symmetric to the positive channel using the product terms preserved in said preserving step, and computing a direct cuπent center channel filter power.
28. A method for limiting signal power loss in a channelized receiver having a receiver frequency reference with a predetermined tolerance and having a plurality of channels aπanged within a predetermined bandwidth coπesponding to a frequency uncertainty range in which a signal is present, said signal being transmitted by a transmitter having a transmitter frequency reference with another predetermined tolerance, respective amounts of the predetermined tolerances affecting a width of said frequency uncertainty range, comprising the steps of: representing said signal as a stream of data samples at a predetermined sample rate having a coπesponding bandwidth being not less than the frequency uncertainty range; decimating said predetermined sample rate to create a lower sample rate and naπow a coπesponding bandwidth to be less than respective widths of said plurality of channels; arranging pairs of said channels, comprising, aπanging said channels in symmetric pairs about a center of said frequency uncertainty range, and separating adjacent pairs of said channels non-uniformly, where an amount of separation is different for at least two of said adjacent pairs, so that a maximum signal loss due to said signal being positioned between two channels is less than that if said channels were symmetrically and uniformly spaced within said frequency uncertainty range.
29. The method of Claim 28, wherein said arranging step comprises aπanging said channels using a discrete cosine transform. 30 The method of Claim 28, wherein said aπanging steps comprises aπanging said channels such that a maximum signal loss caused by a signal bemg positioned between two adjacent channels of said channels is approximately equal for each ofthe adjacent channel pairs
31 A channelized receiver that limits signal power loss, comprising a receiver frequency reference with a predetermmed tolerance, a plurality of channels arranged withm a predetermined bandwidth coπespondmg to a frequency uncertainty range in which a signal is present, said signal being transmitted by a transmitter having a transmitter frequency reference with another predetermmed tolerance, respective amounts of the predetermined tolerances affecting a width of said frequency uncertainty range, means for representing said signal as a stream of data samples at a predetermined sample rate having a corresponding bandwidth being not less than the frequency uncertamty range, means for decimating said predetermined sample rate to create a lower sample rate and naπow a coπesponding bandwidth to be less than respective widths of said plurality of channels, means for aπanging pairs of said channels, compnsmg, means for aπanging said channels in symmetric pairs about a center of said frequency uncertainty range, and means for separating adjacent pairs of said channels non-uniformly, where an amount of separation is different for at least two of said adjacent pairs, so that a maximum signal loss due to said signal being positioned between two channels is less than that if said channels were symmetncally and uniformly spaced withm said frequency uncertainty range
32 A method for limiting signal power loss m a channelized receiver havmg a receiver frequency reference with a predetermmed tolerance and having a plurality of channels aπanged withm a predetermined bandwidth correspondmg to a frequency uncertamty range in which a signal is present, said signal being transmitted by a transmitter have a transmitter frequency reference with another predetermmed tolerance, compnsmg the steps of representing said signal as a stream of data samples at a predetermmed sample rate having a correspondmg bandwidth being not less than the frequency uncertamty range, decimating said predetermined sample rate to create a lower sample rate and naπow a coπesponding bandwidth to be less than respective widths of said plurality of channels, detecting a presence of said signal between respective channels of a pair of adjacent of said plurality of channels, determmmg an amount of signal frequency offset relative to either one of said pair of adjacent channels by inteφolating an amount of signal power present in said pair of adjacent channels, positioning a set-on channel filter between said adjacent pair of channels, a center of said set-on channel filter being offset in frequency relative to either one of said adjacent pair by said amount determined in said determining an amount step; and demodulating the set-on channel filter for data demodulation. 33. A channelized receiver that limits signal power loss, comprising: a receiver frequency reference with a predetermined tolerance; a plurality of channels aπanged within a predetermined bandwidth corresponding to a frequency uncertainty range in which a signal is present, said signal being transmitted by a transmitter have a transmitter frequency reference with another predetermined tolerance; means for representing said signal as a stream of data samples at a predetermined sample rate having a corresponding bandwidth being not less than the frequency uncertainty range; means for decimating said predetermined sample rate to create a lower sample rate and naπow a coπesponding bandwidth to be less than respective widths of said plurality of channels; means for detecting a presence of said signal between respective channels of a pair of adjacent of said plurality of channels; means for determining an amount of signal frequency offset relative to either one of said pair of adjacent channels by inteφolating an amount of signal power present in said pair of adjacent channels; means for positioning a set-on channel filter between said adjacent pair of channels, a center of said set-on channel filter being offset in frequency relative to either one of said adjacent pair by said amount determined in said means for determining an amount; and means for demodulating the set-on channel filter for data demodulation. 34. A method in a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver for avoiding false pseudorandom noise code synchronization detection caused by spontaneous in-band interference, said receiver having a plurality of channels aπanged within a predetermined bandwidth coπesponding to a frequency uncertainty range due to frequency offset in respective frequency references in a transmitter and said receiver, comprising the steps of: attempting to despread said signal by applying the pseudorandom noise code to said signal and outputting a stream of digital samples; applying said digital samples to said channel filters; determining respective energy amounts within said channel filters; identifying which channel filter has a maximum energy amount therein; determining a composite average power for a portion of all remaining channels except for the channel filter identified as having the maximum energy and a pair of channels being adjacent thereto; determining if said maximum energy exceeds said average energy by at least a predetermined amount, and deciding that an alignment of said pseudorandom noise code and said signal is within two chip intervals of said pseudorandom noise code so that course synchronization is achieved if said maximum energy exceeds said average energy by at least a predetermined amount; and performing fine search correlation and data demodulation if course synchronization is achieved and returning to said attempting step where said signal and pseudorandom noise code are shifted relative to one anther before being applied to one another.
35. A method for reducing code phase correlation eπor in a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver after a direct sequence spread spectrum signal and a pseudorandom code used to spread the signal at a transmitter have been aligned to one another within one pseudorandom code chip interval, comprising the steps of: sampling said signal at a predetermined sampling rate and producing signal samples; despreading said signal by applying said pseudorandom code to said signal samples and obtaining a despread signal; determining a power of said despread signal, said power being an indication of how closely said signal and said pseudorandom code are aligned to one another; identifying respective powers of despread signal for other relative pseudorandom code phases by, despreading said signal by shifting a relative position of said signal and said pseudorandom code by less than said pseudorandom code chip interval, determining said another of said respective powers of said despread signal, and repeating said identifying step until all of said respective powers have been identified; determining an operational positional alignment between said pseudorandom code and said signal samples by performing a center of mass operation on said power and said respective powers; and despreading said signal using said operational positional alignment previously determined and demodulating said despread signal.
36. The method of Claim 35 wherein said step of determining an operational positional alignment comprises the steps of: retarding a relative position ofthe pseudorandom code relative to the signal samples by at least 54 of said chip interval relative to an initial alignment position that caused said receiver to determine that said pseudorandom code and said signal are aligned to within one chip interval; computing and storing said another signal power; advancing the relative position by a fractional chip step, to compute one ofthe other signal powers; and continuing said advancing step until said relative position ofthe pseudorandom code relative to the signal samples meets or exceeds one chip relative to said position in said retarding step; and determining said operational positional alignment between said pseudorandom code and said signal samples by performing a center of mass operation on said power and said relative powers.
37. The method of Claim 36, wherein: said retarding step and said advancing step combine to provide relative position alignments of -1/2, -1/4, +1/4 and +1/2 of a chip, and said determining a power step provides an initial signal power for a 0 relative position, thereby providing a first set of five signal powers corresponding respectively to relative position alignments of -1/2, -1/4, 0, +1/4 and +1/2 of a chip; said performing a center of mass operation step comprises, calculating a first center of mass of said first set of five signal powers, determining if the first center of mass is greater than +1/4 chip offset, and if so performing the advancing step to identify respective signal powers for +3/4 and +1 chip offset and computing a second center of mass on a second set of five signal powers associated with the 0 +1/4, +1/2, +3/4, and +1 relative position alignments, determining if the first center of mass is less than -1/4 chip offset, and if so performing the advancing step in a retarding direction so as to identify respective signal powers for -3/4 and -1 chip offset and computing a third center of mass on a third set of five signal powers associated with the -1, -3/4, -1/2,
-1/4, and 0 relative position alignments; and adjusting the relative phase to the operational positional alignment using said second center of mass if said first center of mass is determined to be greater than +1/4 chip offset, and adjusting the relative phase to the operational positional alignment using said third center of mass if said second center of mass is determined to be less than -1/4 chip offset.
38. The method of Claim 38, wherein: said sampling step comprises, decimating said signal samples to reduce a sample rate of said samples to coincide with a chip code rate of said pseudorandom noise code, said samples being a first set of samples, obtaining a second set of samples offset by 1/4 of a chip interval of said code chip rate relative to said first set of samples; said second set of samples being provided at said sample rate, obtaining a third set of samples offset by 54 of a chip interval of said code chip rate relative to said first set of samples, said third set of samples being provided at said sample rate, and obtaining a fourth set of samples offset by 3/4 of a chip interval of said code chip rate relative to said first set of samples, said fourth set of samples being provided at said sample rate; said retarding step and said advancing step combine to provide relative position alignments of -1, 0, and +1 of a chip, and further comprising the steps of, determining respective signal powers of said second set of samples for chip offsets of -3/4 and +1/4 relative to said relative position alignment for said first set of samples; determining respective signal powers of said third set of samples for chip offsets of -1/2 and +1/2 relative to said relative position alignment for said first set of samples; determining respective signal powers of said fourth set of samples for chip offsets of -1/4 and +3/4 relative to said relative position alignment for said first set of samples; wherein said performing a center of mass operation step comprises, calculating said center of mass using said signal powers associated with said chip set offsets for said first set of samples, second set of samples, third set of samples and fourth set of samples. 39. The method of Claim 35 , wherein: said sampling step comprises sampling said signal at a multiple M of a chipping rate of said pseudorandom code; decimating said samples to reduce a sample rate of said samples to coincide with the chipping rate; adjusting the relative position by at least -1/2 of a code chip interval; obtaining other data samples after said adjusting step, determining a signal power of said other data samples, and adjusting the relative position further by +1/M; repeating said steps of obtaining, determining and adjusting until said relative position is offset by at least +1/2 of a code chip interval; determining a center of mass for said signal powers for respective of said relative positions; if the center of mass is greater than 1/M of a chip code interval, collecting and measuring a set of additional signal powers for additional relative positions at a predetermined fractional increment, set of additional signal powers comprising elements between 0 and 1, and determining another center of mass using said additional signal powers; and adjusting said relative position by said center of mass if said determining step determines that said center of mass is not greater than 1/M of a chip code interval and adjusting said relative position by said another center of mass if said determining step determines that said center of mass is greater than a 1/M chip code interval.
40. The method of Claim 35, wherein: said sampling step comprises sampling said signal at by an amount corresponding to a product of N and M, where N is a length of said pseudorandom code and M is a multiple of a chipping rate of said pseudorandom code; obtaining sets of data samples, respective sets coπesponding to respective of plural fractional chip interval length relative position adjustments; and despreading respective of said sets of samples using a receiver spreading code generator configured to produce a code chip sample at a rate of (2 x M) +1, comprising the steps of, offsetting the relative position by an amount and direction coπesponding to -1 of a chip interval, despreading one ofthe sets of samples and obtaining a corresponding signal power, advancing the relative position by an amount coπesponding to 1/M of a code chip interval, despreading another ofthe sets of samples and obtaining a coπesponding signal power, repeating said advancing and despreading another steps until the relative position corresponds to +1 of a code chip interval. 41. A direct sequence spread spectrum receiver for reducing code phase correlation error therein after a pseudorandom code used to spread the signal at a transmitter has been aligned to a locally produced pseudorandom code within one pseudorandom code chip interval, comprising: means for sampling said signal at a predetermined sampling rate and producing signal samples; means for despreading said signal by applying said pseudorandom code to said signal samples and obtaining a despread signal; means for determining a power of said despread signal, said power being an indication of how closely said signal and said pseudorandom code are aligned to one another; means for identifying respective powers of despread signal for other relative pseudorandom code phases comprising, means for despreading said signal by shifting a relative position of said signal and said pseudorandom code by less than said pseudorandom code chip interval, means for determining said another of said respective powers of said despread signal, and means for repeating said identifying until all of said respective powers have been identified; means for determining an operational positional alignment between said pseudorandom code and said signal samples by performing a center of mass operation on said power and said respective powers; and means for despreading said signal using said operational positional alignment previously determined and demodulating said despread signal.
42. The receiver of Claim 41 , wherein: said means for sampling comprises means for sampling said signal at a multiple M of a chipping rate of said pseudorandom code; means for decimating said samples to reduce a sample rate of said samples to coincide with the chipping rate; means for adjusting the relative position by at least -1/2 of a code chip interval; means for obtaining other data samples after said means for adjusting, determining a signal power of said other data samples, and adjusting the relative position further by +1/M; means for repeating said means for obtaining, determining and adjusting until said relative position is offset by at least +1/2 of a code chip interval; means for determining a center of mass for said signal powers for respective of said relative positions; if the center of mass is greater than 1/M of a chip code interval, means for collecting and measuring a set of additional signal powers for additional relative positions at a predetermined fractional increment, set of additional signal powers comprising elements between 0 and 1 , and means for determining another center of mass using said additional signal powers; and means for adjusting said relative position by said center of mass if said means for determining determines that said center of mass is not greater than 1/M of a chip code interval and adjusting said relative position by said another center of mass if said determining step determines that said center of mass is greater than a 1/M chip code interval.
43. The receiver of Claim 41 , wherein: said means for sampling comprises means for sampling said signal at by an amount corresponding to a product of N and M, where N is a length of said pseudorandom code and M is a multiple of a chipping rate of said pseudorandom code; means for obtaining sets of data samples, respective sets coπesponding to respective of plural fractional chip interval length relative position adjustments; and means for despreading respective of said sets of samples using a receiver spreading code generator configured to produce a code chip sample at a rate of (2 x M) +1, comprising, means for offsetting the relative position by an amount and direction coπesponding to - 1 of a chip interval, means for despreading one ofthe sets of samples and obtaining a coπesponding signal power, means for advancing the relative position by an amount correspondmg to 1/M of a code chip interval, means for despreading another ofthe sets of samples and obtaining a coπesponding signal power, means for repeating said means for advancing and means for despreading another until the relative position coπesponds to +1 of a code chip interval.
44. A method for reducing code phase coπelation eπor in a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver after a direct sequence spread spectrum signal and a pseudorandom code, used to spread the signal at a transmitter, have been determined by said receiver to be aligned to one another within one-half of a pseudorandom code chip interval, comprising the steps of: sampling said signal at a predetermined sampling rate and producing signal samples; performing a least-squares operation on signal powers associated with different fractional relative position offsets between said signal and pseudorandom code chip, comprising the steps of, producing a pseudorandom code at a relative position being less than or equal to 54 of an initial code chip position when said receiver determined that said signal and said pseudorandom code are aligned; identifying a signal power associated with said relative position, producing at an advanced relative position the pseudorandom code, said pseudorandom code being advanced by a fractional chip step, identifying a signal power associated with the advanced relative position, and repeating said steps of producing and identifying until said relative position reaches or exceeds 54 chip beyond said initial code chip position, determining a least-squares value of said signal powers and adjusting said relative position by said least-squares value if said value is less than a predetermined chip threshold; performing a center of mass calculation on said signal powers and adjusting said relative position by a 14 chip offset if said determining step determines that said least-squares value is not less than said predetermined threshold; readjusting said relative position by performing said step of performing the least-square operation for a second time and after performing at least one of said steps of determining a least-squares value and a performing a center of mass calculation; and demodulating said signal after said readjusting step.
45. A method for removing a frequency uncertainty eπor at an output of a differential binary phase shift keyed direct sequence spread spectrum signal in a receiver, said frequency uncertainty caused in part by a frequency offset between a transmitter frequency reference and a receiver frequency reference, said signal after being despread having a complex Nyquist bandwidth being greater than or equal to said frequency uncertainty, comprising the steps of: storing a first data bit of said signal; multiplying a second data bit with a complex conjugate ofthe first data and producing a complex product; decimating said complex product to a single complex sample C(n) per data bit interval so as to provide a resulting signal with a static phase angle being at least one of θ and θ + 180 degrees; removing said static phase angle with a decision feedback phase error canceler, comprising, determining a complex number Cθ(n) having an angle being a resulting static phase error averaged over M previous bits; translating the static phase eπor to 0 by multiplying C(n) with a complex conjugate of Cθ(n) and obtaining a multiplication result, identifying a sign of a real part of said multiplication result and making a bit decision based thereon, and update a Cθ average with C(n) multiplied with a sign ofthe second bit. 46. A direct sequence spread spectrum signal in a receiver that removes a frequency uncertainty error at an output of a differential binary phase shift keyed, said frequency uncertainty caused in part by a frequency offset between a transmitter frequency reference and a receiver frequency reference, said signal after being despread having a complex Nyquist bandwidth being greater than or equal to said frequency uncertainty, comprising: said frequency reference; means for storing a first data bit of said signal; means for multiplying a second data bit with a complex conjugate ofthe first data and producing a complex product; means for decimating said complex product to a single complex sample C(n) per data bit interval so as to provide a resulting signal with a static phase angle being at least one of θ and θ + 180 degrees; means for removing said static phase angle with a decision feedback phase error canceler, comprising, means for determining a complex number Cθ(n) having an angle being a resulting static phase eπor averaged over M previous bits; means for translating the static phase error to 0 by multiplying C(n) with a complex conjugate of Cθ(n) and obtaining a multiplication result, means for identifying a sign of a real part of said multiplication result and making a bit decision based thereon, and means for update a Cθ average with C(n) multiplied with a sign ofthe second bit. 47 A method for distributing a decimation operation mto plural stages in a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver, compnsmg receivmg a direct sequence spread spectrum signal at said receiver, said signal havmg been spread at a transmitter with a spreadmg code of length N, N bemg divisible by a plurality of pnme factors, sampling said signal at a predetermmed sampling rate, producing said spreadmg code at said receiver, decimating said signal in a first decimation stage by a first fraction of the sampling rate and providing a first decimated signal having a lower sample rate than said predetermmed sample rate, and decimating said decimated signal in a second decimation stage by another fraction ofthe sampling rate and providing a second decimated signal have a lower sample rate than said first decunated signal, wherein because N being divisible by the plurality of pnme factors being an enabling feature for separately performing said decimatmg steps
48 The method of Claim 47, wherein said receivmg step, comprises receivmg said direct sequence spread spectrum receiver wherein said signal has been spread at a transmitter with a spreadmg code havmg at least one of a code length less than 100, bemg a 2k-l sequence, havmg prime factors being less than 10, but greater than 2
49 The method of Claim 47, wherem said sampling step compnses sampling said signal at a rate bemg an mteger multiple of N
50 The method of Claim 47, wherem said step of decimating said signal in a first decimation stage compnses decimating before said signal has been despread with said spreadmg code and said decimatmg said decimated signal m a second decimation stage, compnsmg decimating after said despreading with said spreadmg signal
51 A direct sequence spread spectrum receiver having a plurality of decimation operators, compnsmg means for receiving a direct sequence spread spectrum signal at said receiver, said signal having been spread at a transmitter with a spreadmg code of length N, N being divisible by a plurality of pnme factors, means for sampling said signal at a predetermmed sampling rate, means for producing said spreadmg code at said receiver, means for decimating said signal m a first decimation stage by a first fraction ofthe sampling rate and providing a first decimated signal havmg a lower sample rate than said predetermmed sample rate, and means for decimating said decunated signal m a second decimation stage by another fraction of the sampling rate and providing a second decunated signal have a lower sample rate than said first decimated signal, wherem because N bemg divisible by the plurality of pnme factors being an enabling feature for mcludmg at least two means for decimatmg
52. A method for efficient synchronization of a direct sequence spread spectrum signal in a receiver, said signal being spread with a maximal length spreading code of length N at a transmitter, N being divisible by a plurality of prime factors, comprising the steps of: receiving said signal; digitizing said signal; and coπelating said spreading code with said signal by calculating a Fast Fourier transform with a predetermined number of computations, said predetermined number of computations being lower than a minimum number of calculations required to coπelate another signal despread with another maximal length spreading code that is greater than or equal to 15 and divisible by a lesser number of prime factors than N.
53. A direct sequence spread spectrum receiver that efficiently performs synchronization of a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, said signal being spread with a maximal length spreading code of length N at a transmitter, N being divisible by a plurality of prime factors, comprising the steps of: means for receiving said signal; means for digitizing said signal; and means for correlating said spreading code with said signal by calculating a Fast Fourier transform with a predetermined number of computations, said predetermined number of computations being lower than a minimum number of calculations required to coπelate another signal despread with another maximal length spreading code that is greater than or equal to 15 and divisible by a lesser number of prime factors than N.
54. A method for setting a pre-detection bandwidth in a digital direct sequence spread spectrum receiver, comprising the steps of: receiving and digitizing a direct sequence spread spectrum signal and producing data samples; despreading a data set having N data samples with a pseudorandom noise code, used at a transmitter to originally spread a data signal to form said direct sequence spread spectrum signal, where N coincides in number with another set of samples representative of a pseudorandom noise code; decimating by parts another data set coπesponding to a despread signal and producing M partial decimation summed samples, a ratio of N to M being an amount by which said another data set is decimated, said decimation ratio being proportional to a reduction in effective sample rate and pre-detection
Nyquist bandwidth; squaring respective of said M partial decimation summed samples and producing squared samples; and combining said squared samples to respective of said partial decimation summed samples, wherein said pre-detection bandwidth being greater than or equal to a bandwidth ofthe data signal. 55. The method of Claim 54, wherein said combining step comprises at least one of adding and averaging said squared samples. 56. A digital direct sequence spread spectrum receiver, comprising the steps of: means for receiving and digitizing a direct sequence spread spectrum signal and producing data samples; means for despreading a data set having N data samples with a pseudorandom noise code, used at a transmitter to originally spread a data signal to form said direct sequence spread spectrum signal, where N coincides in number with another set of samples representative of a pseudorandom noise code; means for decimating by parts another data set coπesponding to a despread signal and producing M partial decimation summed samples, a ratio of N to M being an amount by which said another data set is decimated, said decimation ratio being proportional to a reduction in effective sample rate and pre-detection Nyquist bandwidth; means for squaring respective of said M partial decimation summed samples and producing squared samples; and means for combining said squared samples to respective of said partial decimation summed samples, wherein said pre-detection Nyquist bandwidth being greater than or equal to a bandwidth ofthe data signal. 57. A communications system that communicates using a direct sequence spread spectrum signal having symbol rates which are a multiple of a pseudorandom noise code repetition rate, comprising: a transmitter, comprising, means for aligning respective data symbols with the pseudorandom noise code, means for forming the direct sequence spread spectrum signal by inverting corresponding portions of said PN code for a portion of said symbols having a first logic value and not inverting corresponding portions for the other symbols, and means for transmitting in a transmitter said direct sequence spread spectrum signal; and a receiver, comprising, means for receiving and correlating the direct sequence spread spectrum signal, and obtaining a correlation result, means for partitioning said coπelation result to align with said portions that were inverted in said means for forming , means for identifying partial correlation sums for fractional symbol coπelation, and means for demodulating said data using said partial coπelation sums.
58. A method for reducing a settling time of a phase/frequency locked synthesizer in a receiver, said phase/frequency locked synthesizer being turned off and on repetitively, comprising the steps of: using capacitors as storage elements for holding a charge used to feed a voltage controlled oscillator; making an estimate with a processor ofthe charge on each of said capacitors; saving the estimate in non-volatile memory at a power-down event; retrieving from said non-volatile memory said estimate at a power-up event; driving respective cuπent sources connected to respective of said capacitors for a duration sufficient to reestablish the respective charge on said capacitors prior to said power-down event; and enabling said phase/frequency locked synthesizer after the respective charge has been reestablished.
59. A receiver having a phase/frequency locked synthesizer that reduces a settling time when being repeatedly turned on and off, comprising: capacitors used as storage elements for holding a charge used to feed a voltage controlled oscillator; means for making an estimate with a processor ofthe charge on each of said capacitors; a non-volatile memory configured to save the estimate at a power-down event; means for retrieving from said non-volatile memory said estimate at a power-up event; current sources connected to respective of said capacitors; means for driving respective for a duration sufficient to reestablish the respective charge on said capacitors prior to said power-down event; and means for enabling said phase/frequency locked synthesizer after the respective charge has been reestablished.
60. A method for implementing down conversion, channelization, and code filtering steps in a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver having a fast Fourier transform correlator, comprising the steps of: applying one period of a spreading code at 4 samples/chip to a fast Fourier transform, said spreading code being used at a transmitter to form a direct sequence spread spectrum signal received by said receiver, said fast Fourier transform having output points; filtering said output points in a rectangular filter having a bandwidth coπesponding to a chip rate of said spreading code and retaining 1/4 ofthe output points centered on DC, and computing a complex conjugate of a filtered output and saving the complex conjugate as a filtered reference code; maintaining a real-time counter for subsequent signal phase alignment; sampling a received bandpass signal at 4 samples per chip for a duration of one code period, said bandpass signal having a center frequency approximately equal to a chip rate; computing a fast Fourier transform of said bandpass signal and producing fast Fourier transform points; downconverting said signal and channelizing a frequency uncertainty bandwidth by relabling 1/4 of said fast Fourier transform output points centered at a frequency corresponding to an intermediate frequency plus a channel offset frequency as points being centered at 0 Hz; multiplying said relabled output points by said saved filtered reference code and obtaining an output data set; performing a coarse search coπelation operation in one chip steps in one channel by performing an inverse fast Fourier Transform on said output data set; and repeating said downconverting, multiplying and performing step for the other channels.
61. A direct sequence spread spectrum receiver, comprising: means for calculating a fast Fourier transform; means for applying one period of a spreading code at 4 samples/chip to the means for calculating the fast Fourier transform, said spreading code being used at a transmitter to form a direct sequence spread spectrum signal received by said receiver, said fast Fourier transform having output points; means for filtering said output points in a rectangular filter having a bandwidth corresponding to a chip rate of said spreading code and retaining 1/4 ofthe output points centered on DC, and computing a complex conjugate of a filtered output and saving the complex conjugate as a filtered reference code; means for maintaining a real-time counter for subsequent signal phase alignment; means for sampling a received bandpass signal at 4 samples per chip for a duration of one code period, said bandpass signal having a center frequency approximately equal to a chip rate, said means for calculating a fast Fourier transform computing a fast Fourier transform of said bandpass signal and producing fast Fourier transform points; means for downconverting said signal and channelizing a frequency uncertainty bandwidth by relabling 1/4 of said fast Fourier transform output points centered at a frequency coπesponding to an intermediate frequency plus a channel offset frequency as points being centered at 0 Hz; means for multiplying said relabled output points by said saved filtered reference code and obtaining an output data set; means for performing a coarse search coπelation operation in one chip steps in one channel by performing an inverse fast Fourier Transform on said output data set; and means for repeatedly applying said means for downconverting, multiplying and performing for the other channels.
62. A method for maximizing computational efficiency in a processor-based serial coπelator in a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver, comprising the steps of: sampling and storing as a signal data record of length N x M a portion of a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, where N is a spreading code length and M is an integer > 1 ; maintaining a real-time counter so that another sample of said direct sequence spread spectrum signal may be obtained at a later time, said real-time counter enabling said another sample to be taken a predetermined number of chip lengths after said sampling step was performed; forming a coefficient data record of said spreading code, said coefficient data record having a length of N x M; sequentially computing correlation sums in said processor for at least a portion of all possible phase relationships ofthe sampled signal data record and the coefficient data record; determining if one of said coπelation sums exceeded a predetermined threshold indicative of a coarse search detection event; and using said real-time counter to align at least said another sample with said coefficient data if said course search event is detected, comprising the step of aligning said at least another sample with said coefficient list based on a maximum coπelation sum determined in said determining step. 63. The method of Claim 62, wherein said sequentially computing step comprises sequentially computing coπelation sums for all possible phase relationships of the sampled data record and the coefficient data record.
64. The method of Claim 62 wherein said sampling step comprises sampling said data record of a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, where said direct sequence spread spectrum signal comprises a leader having a length being at least N + 1, where N is for a combination of diversity options.
65. The method of Claim 62, further comprising the step of turning off a radio front end of said receiver after said first sample is received and before said second sample is received.
66. The method of Claim 62, wherein said determining step comprises the steps of: determining a relative positional adjustment of the received signal with respect to the data coefficient data record corresponding to the spreading code and adjusting the data coefficient data record by the relative positional adjustment; forming a mixed signal by mixing the received signal with the data coefficient data record after said adjusting step; filtering the mixed signal with a lowpass filter to form a filtered signal; measuring a power of the filtered signal and repeating said deteπnining step, forming step and filtering step for each relative phase position between the received signal and the data coefficient data record; determining which relative phase position provided a maximum power; determining an average power over at least a portion ofthe all relative phase positions excluding phase positions where said the maximum power occurred and within one chip interval of where the maximum occuπed; and comparing the measured maximum with the average power and deciding that coπelation was achieved to within 1 chip interval if said maximum power exceeds said average power by a predetermined amount.
67. The method of Claim 62, wherein said determining step comprises the steps of: determining a relative positional adjustment of the received signal with respect to the data coefficient data record corresponding to the spreading code and adjusting the data coefficient data record by the relative positional adjustment; forming a mixed signal by mixing the received signal with the data coefficient data record after said adjusting step; filtering the mixed signal with a plurality of adjacent filters, each having a bandwidth greater than or equal to a bandwidth ofthe signal after being despread, and forming a plurality of filtered signals; measuring respective powers for the plurality of filtered signals and repeating said determining step, forming step, filtering step and measuring step for each relative phase position between the received signal and the data coefficient data record and for each ofthe adjacent filters; determining which relative phase position provided a maximum power; determining an average power over at least a portion of all relative phase positions except for the maximum and within one chip interval ofthe maximum; and comparing the measured maximum with the average power and deciding that coπelation was achieved to within 1 chip interval if said maximum power exceeds said average power by a predetermined amount.
68. The method of Claim 62, wherein: said sampling step comprising sampling with a sampled limiter; and said determining step comprises the steps of, determining a relative positional adjustment of the received signal with respect to the data coefficient data record coπesponding to the spreading code and adjusting the data coefficient data record by the relative positional adjustment, forming a mixed signal by mixing the received signal with the data coefficient data record after said adjusting step, filtering the mixed signal with a plurality of adjacent filters, each having a bandwidth greater than or equal to a bandwidth ofthe signal after being despreads, and forming a plurality of filtered signals, measuring respective powers for the plurality of filtered signals and repeating said determining step, forming step, filtering step and measuring step for each relative phase position between the received signal and the data coefficient data record and for each ofthe adjacent filters, determining which relative phase position provided a maximum power, and comparing the measured maximum with a predetermined value and deciding that coπelation was achieved to within 1 chip interval if said maximum power exceeds said predetermined power by a predetermined amount.
69. A direct sequence spread spectrum receiver, comprising: means for sampling and storing as a signal data record of length N x M a portion of a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, where N is a spreading code length and M is an integer > 1 ; means for maintaining a real-time counter so that another sample of said direct sequence spread spectrum signal may be obtained at a later time, said real-time counter enabling said another sample to be taken a predetermined number of chip lengths after sampling by said means for sampling; means for forming a coefficient data record of said spreading code, said coefficient data record having a length of N x M; means for sequentially computing coπelation sums in said processor for at least a portion of all possible phase relationships ofthe sampled signal data record and the coefficient data record; means for determining if one of said correlation sums exceeded a predetermined threshold indicative of a coarse search detection event; and means for using said real-time counter to align at least said another sample with said coefficient data if said course search event is detected, comprising means for aligning said at least another sample with said coefficient list based on a maximum correlation sum determined in said means for determining.
70. A direct sequence spread spectrum system comprising: a transmitter configured to transmit a direct sequence spread spectrum signal comprising, a pseudorandom noise code generator that produces a pseudorandom spreading sequence having a predetermined length, and a message formatting mechanism configured to form said direct sequence message to have a leader component followed by a data pattern component, said leader component comprising plural copies of said pseudorandom spreading sequence and having a predetermined transmission length, said data pattern being spread by said pseudorandom spreading sequence; and a receiver that receives said spread spectrum signal comprising, a radio front-end that receives a first sample of said signal coπesponding in length to at least one copy of said pseudorandom spreading sequence in said leader, an acquisition mechanism configured to coπelate said first sample with the pseudorandom sequence and determine whether a coπelation value exceeds a predetermined threshold, indicative of course synchronization being achieved, said acquisition mechanism requiring a predetermined amount of processing time to correlate said first sample with said pseudorandom sequence and determine whether course synchronization has been achieved, said processing time being not greater than 14 the transmission length, wherein if said first sample includes a beginning of said leader but not including a full copy of said pseudorandom code, said receiver has enough time to receive a second sample of said signal and acquire course synchronization before said data is transmitted by transmitter.
71. A direct sequence spread spectrum receiver that is adapted to conserve power when executing a serial search operation to determine if a sample of a received signal is aligned within a predetermined number of chip intervals relative to a spreading code produced in said receiver, said spreading code employed by a transmitter to spread a data signal and form the direct sequence spread spectrum signal, comprising: a radio front end that acquires a first sample of said signal, said radio-front end comprising a digitizer that converts said sample into a digital signal; a signal processor comprising, a memory configured to hold said digital signal, at least one of, another memory configured to hold a copy of said spreading code, and a spreading code generator, a coπelation mechanism that coπelates said copy ofthe spreading code said digital signal, and a detection mechanism that detects if a coπelation output signal from said coπelation mechanism is greater than a predetermined amount so as to signify that said copy of said spreading code is aligned with said signal to within a predetermined chip interval, said chip interval corresponding to a chip of said spreading code; and a controller configured to control when power is applied to said radio front end, said controller accounting for a predetermined amount of settling time prior to data acquisition, said controller applying power to the data acquisition section when acquiring said sample, removing power after said first sample is acquired and while said correlation mechanism and said detection mechanism are coπelating said sample and determining whether said sample and said spreading code are aligned.
72. The receiver of Claim 71, wherein said controller is configured to reapply power to the data acquisition section if said detection mechanism determines that said first sample did not coπelate, and said data acquisition mechanism then acquires said second sample.
73. The receiver of Claim 71 , wherein said signal processing section includes a timer connected to said controller so that if correlation was achieved, the data acquisition section will acquire the other portion of the signal in alignment with the relative positional alignment ofthe first sample and the spreading code as determined by the correlation mechanism. 74. The receiver of Claim 71, wherein: said digitizer comprises means for converting said sample into a digital signal; said coπelation mechanism comprises means for coπelating said copy ofthe spreading code said digital signal; said detection mechanism comprises means for detecting if the coπelation output signal from said means for coπelating is greater than a predetermined amount so as to signify that said copy of said spreading code is aligned with said signal to within a predetermined chip interval, said chip interval coπesponding to a chip of said spreading code; and said controller comprises means for controlling when power is applied to said radio front end, and for applying power to the data acquisition section when acquiring said sample, removing power after said first sample is acquired and while said means for correlating and said means for detecting are correlating said sample and determining whether said sample and said spreading code are aligned.
75. The receiver of Claim 71 configured to perform a method comprising the steps of: converting said sample into said digital signal; correlating said copy ofthe spreading code said digital signal; detecting if the correlation output signal from said means for correlating is greater than a predetermined amount so as to signify that said copy of said spreading code is aligned with said signal to within a predetermined chip interval, said chip interval coπesponding to a chip of said spreading code; and controlling when power is applied to said radio front end, and for applying power to the data acquisition section when acquiring said sample, removing power after said first sample is acquired and while said means for coπelating and said means for detecting are coπelating said sample and determining whether said sample and said spreading code are aligned.
76. A direct sequence spread spectrum system configured to communicate data from a transmitter to a receiver in a direct sequence spread spectrum on-off-keyed system, comprising: the transmitter, comprising a mechanism for enabling and disabling a spreading code used to spread the data signal and form the direct sequence spread spectrum on-off-keyed signal; and the receiver comprising, a receiver front-end configured to receive the direct sequence spread spectrum on-off-keyed signal, a sampled limiter coupled to said receiver front-end and configured to produce a sampled signal corresponding to said direct sequence spread spectrum on-off-keyed signal, a correlator that correlates said spreading code with said direct sequence spread spectrum on-off- keyed signal and produces a despread signal, said despread signal being represented as a coπelation sum having partial sums, said partial sums coπesponding to data elements of said data signal, and a data demodulator that forms an output data stream of data elements, values of respective of said data elements corresponding to respective of said partial sums of said coπelation sum.
77. The system of Claim 76, wherein said transmitter further comprises: an output signal port configured to couple the direct sequence spread spectrum on-off-keyed signal to a transmit antenna; and an output power control mechanism configured to control a signal level of said direct sequence spread spectrum on-off-keyed signal, said power control mechanism adjusting said signal level to respective predetermined levels corresponding to respective portions of said signal coπesponding to whether said spreading code was enabled or disabled for said respective portions, a difference between said predetermined levels being an amount that meets or exceeds a processing gain associated with said direct sequence spread spectrum on-off-keyed signal. 78. The system of Claim 76, wherein said output power control mechanism further comprises means to encode the signal with a synchronization data so as to enable the spreading code to align thereto with no signal output attenuation, and not encoding with the synchronization data attenuates an output signal by at least a process gain of said signal.
79. The system of Claim 76 configured to implement a method comprising the steps of enabling and disabling a spreading code used to spread the data signal and form the direct sequence spread spectrum on- off-keyed signal; correlating in a receiver the spreading code with the direct sequence spread spectrum on-off-keyed signal and producing a despread signal; and forming an output data stream of data elements, values of respective of said data elements coπesponding to respective of said particular sums of said correlation sum.
80. A direct sequence spread spectrum system for transmitting a direct sequence spread spectrum signal from a transmitter to a receiver, comprising: the transmitter, said transmitter being configured to transmit the direct sequence spread spectrum signal in at least one of a plurality of frequencies, comprising, a carrier frequency selection device configured to select said at least one of said plurality of transmitting frequencies, a signal formatting mechanism configured to form said signal, said signal comprising a leader portion followed by a data portion, said leader comprising a code having a predetermined length, said code being repeated a plurality of times in said leader, a length of said leader being transmitted for a duration being at least twice as long as a maximum signal acquisition time required by the receiver to acquire the signal, said data portion being spread by said code; and the receiver that receives said direct sequence spread spectrum signal, comprising, a coπelator configured to despread the spread spectrum signal and determine whether said direct sequence spread spectrum signal is present within said maximum signal acquisition time, wherein if said coπelator attempts to acquire said transmitted signal based only on a fraction of a beginning portion of said leader, said leader being of sufficient length for said receiver to acquire the direct sequence spread spectrum signal by coπelating a second portion of said leader, prior to said data portion of said direct sequence spread spectrum signal. 81. The system of Claim 80 configured to implement a process for transmitting and receiving said direct sequence spread spectrum signal comprising the steps of: forming said signal so as to have a leader portion followed by a data portion, said leader portion comprising a code having a predetermined length, said code being repeated a plurality of times in said leader, a length of said leader being transmitted for a duration being at least twice as long as a maximum signal acquisition time required by the receiver to acquire the signal, said data portion being spread by said code; and despreading in the receiver the spread spectrum signal and determining whether said direct sequence spread spectrum signal is present within said maximum signal acquisition time, wherein if said correlator attempts to acquire said transmitted signal based only on a fraction of said beginning portion of said leader, said leader being of sufficient length for said receiver to acquire the direct sequence spread spectrum signal by coπelating a second portion of said leader, prior to said data portion of said direct sequence spread spectrum signal. 82. The system of Claim 80, wherein said receiver further comprises: a frequency diversity frequency selector that selects at least one of said frequencies for receiving said signal and determining whether said signal is acquired; said coπelator comprising, a relative position adjustment mechanism that adjusts a phase of received signal with respect to a locally generated spreading signal, a signal combiner configured to combine the spreading signal with the received signal and produce a mixed signal, a filter that limits a bandwidth of said mixed signal, a power measuring device that measures a power of said mixed signal for respective of phases adjusted by said relative position adjustment mechanism, and that determines a maximum power, an averaging device that determines an average power for each phase position adjusted by said relative position adjustment mechanism, said average power excluding said maximum power and powers measured within one code chip interval of said maximum, and a comparator that compares said maximum with said average power and determines whether acquisition is achieved for the phase position coπesponding with said maximum if said maximum exceeds said average by a predetermined amount. 83. The receiver of Claim 82 wherein: said coπelator is configured to determine whether acquisition is achieved for all frequencies selected by said frequency selector. 84. A direct sequence spread spectrum communications system comprising: a transmitter that transmits a direct sequence spread spectrum signal formed by spreading a data signal with a pseudorandom code, said transmitter including a frequency reference that imparts a frequency uncertainty in said direct sequence spread spectrum signal due to a suboptimal frequency accuracy; and a receiver that receives said direct sequence spread spectrum signal, comprising, a timer configured to measure a length of time between when a portion of the direct sequence spread spectrum signal is received and when the receiver determines in a coπelation mechanism that the direct sequence spread spectrum signal is acquired so that another portion ofthe direct sequence spread spectrum signal will be compared in phase with a despreading code used in the coπelation mechanism, the coπelation mechanism which is configured to determine a cross coπelation ofthe portion of the signal with the pseudorandom code so as to form a cross coπelation result in a magnitude aπay, said pseudorandom code represented by a coefficient data record, a memory configured to hold said magnitude aπay, a signal acquisition section that uses said timer to acquire another portion of said direct sequence spread spectrum signal to be coincident with the despreading code for cross correlation in said coπelation mechanism with the coefficient data record used for the portion ofthe signal and for producing subsequent magnitude aπays, an averaging mechanism configured to average the magnitude aπay with the subsequent magnitude arrays to form an average aπay; and an acquisition detection mechanism that determines if entries in said average array indicate that signal acquisition is achieved.
85. The system of Claim 84, wherein: said timer of said receiver comprises means for measuring a length of time; said coπelation mechanism of said receiver comprises means for determining a cross correlation ofthe portion ofthe signal with the pseudorandom code; said signal acquisition section comprises means for acquiring said another portion of said direct sequence spread spectrum signal to be coincident with the spreading code; said averaging mechanism comprising means for averaging the magnitude aπay with the subsequent magnitude arrays to form the average array; and said acquisition detection mechanism comprising means for determining if entries in said average array indicate that signal acquisition is achieved.
86. A direct sequence spread spectrum communications system comprising: a transmitter that transmits a direct sequence spread spectrum signal formed by spreading a data signal with a pseudorandom code, said transmitter including a frequency reference that imparts a frequency uncertainty in said direct sequence spread spectrum signal due to a suboptimal frequency accuracy; and a receiver that receives said direct sequence spread spectrum signal, comprising, a timer configured to measure a length of time between when a portion of the direct sequence spread spectrum signal is received and when the receiver determines in a coπelation mechanism that the direct sequence spread spectrum signal is acquired so that another portion ofthe direct sequence spread spectrum signal will be acquired so as to be aligned in phase with a despreading code used in the correlation mechanism, the coπelation mechanism which is configured to determine a cross coπelation ofthe portion of the signal with the pseudorandom code and frequency plane so as to form a cross coπelation result in a magnitude plane, said pseudorandom code represented by a coefficient data record, a memory configured to hold said magnitude plane, a signal acquisition section that uses said timer to acquire another portion of said direct sequence spread spectrum signal to be coincident with the despreading code for cross coπelation in said coπelation mechanism with the coefficient data record used for the portion ofthe signal and for producing subsequent magnitude planes, an averaging mechanism configured to average the magnitude plane with the subsequent magnitude planes to form an average magnitude plane; and an acquisition detection mechanism configured to determine if entries in said average magnitude plane indicate that signal acquisition is achieved.
87. The system of Claim 86, wherein: said transmitter comprises means for forming said direct sequence spread spectrum signal; said timer and said receiver comprise means for measuring the length of time; the coπelation mechanism comprises means for determining said cross correlation; said signal acquisition section of said receiver comprising means for using said timer to acquire said another portion of said direct sequence spread spectrum signal; said averaging mechanism comprising means for averaging the magnitude plane with the subsequent magnitude planes to form said average magnitude planes; and said acquisition detection mechanism comprising means for determining if entries in said average magnitude plane indicate that signal acquisition is achieved. 88. A transmitter in a direct sequence spread spectrum communication system having frequency diversity, comprising: a signal combiner that combines a data signal with a pseudorandom code that spreads the data signal into the direct sequence spread spectrum signal, said pseudorandom code comprising chips having a duration corresponding to a predetermined chipping rate; a clock generator that generates a clock signal at a frequency that is a multiple ofthe chipping rate, said multiple being greater than or equal to 1, wherein said combiner being configured to mix the direct sequence spread spectrum signal with said clock signal to produce a composite signal having two components centered at respective center frequencies that are separated by two times said clock frequency, said composite signal being transmitted to a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver that is configured to receive the composite signal and extract the data signal therefrom. 89. The receiver of Claim 71 , further comprising: a combiner that combines one period of a spreading code at 4 samples/chip to a fast Fourier transform, said fast Fourier transform having output points; a filter that filters output points in a rectangular filter having a bandwidth coπesponding to a chip rate of said spreading code and retaining 1/4 of the output points centered at 0 Hz, and computing a complex conjugate of a filtered output and saving the complex conjugate as a filtered reference code; a real-time counter for subsequent signal phase alignment; an analog to digital converter that digitized a received bandpass signal at 4 samples per chip for a duration of one code period, said bandpass signal having a center frequency approximately equal to a chip rate; a processor comprising, a fast Fourier transform mechanism that transforms said bandpass signal and produces fast Fourier transform points, a downconversion and channelization mechanism that downconverts said signal and channelizes a frequency uncertainty bandwidth by relabling 1/4 of said fast Fourier transform output points centered at a frequency coπesponding to an intermediate frequency plus a channel offset frequency as points being centered at 0 Hz, a multiplication mechanism configured to multiply said relabled output points by said saved filtered reference code and obtaining an output data set, a coarse search correlation mechanism that performs a coπelation operation on said output data set in one chip steps in one channel by performing an inverse fast Fourier Transform on said output data set; and a repeating mechanisms that applies signals from other channels to said downconversion and channelization mechanism, multiplication mechanism and coarse search coπelation mechanism for the other channels; a low-power, continuous, state-independent clock configured to cause said receiver to enter an idle state so as to draw minimal power while in the idle state and to enter an active state where said receiver performs communication functions, said state-independent clock causing said active and idle states to be synchronized with external events.
90. The receiver of Claim 71 , further comprising: a sampling device and memory configured to sample and store as a signal data record of length N x M a portion of a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, where N is a spreading code length and M is an integer > 1; a real-time counter so that another sample of said direct sequence spread spectrum signal may be obtained at a later time, a predetermined number of chip lengths after said sampling step was performed; a spreading code generator configured to form a coefficient data record of said spreading code, said coefficient data record having a length of N x M; a processor comprising, a correlation mechanism that sequentially computes coπelation sums for at least a portion of all possible phase relationships of the sampled signal data record and the coefficient data record and determining if one of said coπelation sums exceeded a predetermined threshold indicative of a course search detection event; an alignment mechanism configured to use said real-time counter to align at least said another sample with said coefficient data if said course search event is detected, and align said at least another sample with said coefficient list based on a maximum coπelation sum determined in said coπelation mechanism; and a low-power, continuous, state-independent clock configured to cause said receiver and transmitter to enter an idle state so as to draw minimal power while in the idle state and to enter an active state where said transceiver performs communication functions, said state-independent clock causing said active and idle states to be synchronized with external events. 1. A spread spectrum communication network comprising: at least one spread spectrum transmitter; at least one spread spectrum receiver operating continuously, and having respective local time references; a system controller managing said at least one transmitter and at least one receiver; a remote spread spectrum receiver located away from said system controller and having a another local time reference; wherein said system controller instructs said at least one transmitter to broadcast a synchronization signal at a repeating interval, respective of said spread spectrum receivers being configured to receive said synchronization signal and adjust said respective local time references so as to minimize a risk of not receiving said synchronization signal broadcast by said system controller; and respective of said spread spectrum receivers comprising a re-acquisition mechanism used to reacquire synchronization if as a result of an error synchronization is lost, said re-acquisition mechanism comprising, a monitoring mechanism that causes respective of said receivers to recognize that synchronization is lost and continue to monitor for a broadcast of a next synchronization signal.
92. The network of Claim 91, wherein at least one of said spread spectrum receivers comprises a transmitter that is configured to transmit a timing request signal to said system controller so as to initiate a communication exchange with the system controller and resynchronize said local time reference . 93. The network of Claim 91 , wherein said at least one transmitter is configured to interleave data with said synchronization message.
94. The spread spectrum communication network of Claim 91 , wherein said remote receiver includes a delay lock loop so as to maintain network coherency by tracking a duration of an expected message.
95. The network of Claim 91 , wherein: said system controller comprising means for instructing said at least one transmitter to broadcast said synchronization signal at a repeating interval; said spread spectrum receivers comprising means for receiving said synchronization signal and adjusting said respective local time reference; and said re-acquisition mechanism of said receivers comprising means for re-acquiring synchronization if the result ofthe eπor synchronization is lost, comprising means for monitoring said broadcast ofthe next synchronization signal.
96. The network of Claim 91 , configured to implement a method comprising the steps of: managing at said system controller said at least one transmitter and said at least one receiver; instructing in said system controller said at least one transmitter to broadcast said synchronization signal at said repeating interval; receiving said synchronization signal at said receivers and, in response said receivers adjusting respective local time references; and re-acquiring synchronization if a result ofthe synchronization is lost, comprising, causing respective of said receivers to recognize that said synchronization is lost, and continuing to monitor for the broadcast ofthe next synchronization signal.
97. A digital communication system comprising: a transmitter configured to transmit a signal, comprising, a transmitter frequency reference that produces a frequency with a predetermined accuracy, a modulator configured to encode data in the signal to be transmitted by on-off-key modulating another signal with a data signal; and a receiver configured to extract said data signal from said signal sent from said transmitter by demodulating said signal, comprising, a detector having a bandwidth coπesponding in width to a signal uncertainty bandwidth, where said signal uncertainty bandwidth accounts for a bandwidth of said data signal and a frequency uncertainty bandwidth caused by said predetermined accuracy of said transmitter frequency reference to be at least as great as said bandwidth of said data signal, said detector comprising, a multichannel filtering mechanism that provides K channels each having a bandwidth as least as great as that ofthe data signal bandwidth and being distributed within said bandwidth of said detector so as to cover said frequency uncertainty bandwidth, one of said channels being a primary channel for signal reception, an acquisition detection mechanism configured to set another ofthe K channels as a channel in which said data signal is present in response to determining that energy received in said another of said K channels is sufficiently high to have suφassed a predetermined threshold, comprising, a demodulator configured to demodulate said data signal using power measured across the K channels for a data bit interval comprising, a processing mechanism configured to calculate power for a bit interval across the K channels and determine if an energy from said primary channel power exceeds a primary channel threshold, and if not determining whether an energy of any ofthe alternate channels exceeds said predetermined threshold.
98. A direct sequence spread spectrum communication network comprising: a transmitter that transmits a direct sequence spread spectrum signal comprising a message; a processor; a plurality of receivers connected to one another in a multi-drop network, said processor being connected to the multi-drop network, respective of said receivers comprising a memory, wherein respective of said receivers that receive said direct sequence spread spectrum signal store the message in said memory, said message having a unique identification, respective of said receivers being configured to relay said message to said processor over the multidrop network according to a signaling protocol, wherein respective ofthe receivers monitor the multi-drop network for other message traffic and, if message traffic is present, determine if an identification of said message traffic is common with said message stored in said memory, and if said identification is common, eliminating the message in the memory because it is redundant with the message traffic being sent to the processor.
99. The network of Claim 98, wherein respective of said receivers comprise means for relaying said message to said processor over the multi-drop network; means for monitoring the multi-drop network for other message traffic; means for determining an identification of said message traffic in common with said message stored in memory if said message traffic is present; and means for eliminating the message in the memory if said identification is common.
100. The network of Claim 98, configured to implement a process comprising the steps of: storing said message in said memory; relaying said message to said processor over the multi-drop network; monitoring the multi-drop network for other message traffic; determining if the identification of said message traffic is common with said message stored in said memory if said message traffic is present and eliminating the message in the memory if said identification is common.
101. A method in a direct sequence spread spectrum receiver for avoiding false pseudorandom noise code synchronization detection caused by spontaneous in-band interference, said receiver having a plurality of channels arranged within a predetermined bandwidth coπesponding to a frequency uncertainty range due to frequency offset in respective frequency references in a transmitter and said receiver, comprising the steps of: attempting to despread said signal by applying the pseudorandom noise code to said signal and outputting a stream of digital samples; applying said digital samples to said channel filters; determining respective energy amounts within said channel filters; identifying the channel filter having a maximum energy amount therein; identifying another channel of said channels which has a second largest energy, said another channel not being one of a pair of channels being adjacent to the channel identified as having the maximum energy amount; determining if said maximum energy exceeds said second largest energy by at least a predetermmed amount; and performing fine search coπelation and data demodulation if course synchronization is achieved, and returning to said attempting step where said signal and pseudorandom noise code are shifted relative to one anther before being applied to one another.
PCT/US1998/010164 1997-05-20 1998-05-18 Direct sequence spread spectrum method, computer-based product, apparatus and system tolerant to frequency reference offset WO1998053556A2 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP98937930A EP0986860A4 (en) 1997-05-20 1998-05-18 Direct sequence spread spectrum method, computer-based product, apparatus and system tolerant to frequency reference offset
AU86561/98A AU744940B2 (en) 1997-05-20 1998-05-18 Direct sequence spread spectrum method, computer-based product, apparatus and system tolerant to frequency reference offset

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US4712897P 1997-05-20 1997-05-20
US60/047,128 1997-05-20
US5192297P 1997-07-08 1997-07-08
US60/051,922 1997-07-08
US08/929,891 1997-09-15
US08/929,891 US5999561A (en) 1997-05-20 1997-09-15 Direct sequence spread spectrum method, computer-based product, apparatus and system tolerant to frequency reference offset

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1998053556A2 true WO1998053556A2 (en) 1998-11-26
WO1998053556A3 WO1998053556A3 (en) 1999-03-04

Family

ID=27367053

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1998/010164 WO1998053556A2 (en) 1997-05-20 1998-05-18 Direct sequence spread spectrum method, computer-based product, apparatus and system tolerant to frequency reference offset

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (2) US5999561A (en)
EP (1) EP0986860A4 (en)
AU (1) AU744940B2 (en)
WO (1) WO1998053556A2 (en)

Cited By (24)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2802036A1 (en) * 1999-12-01 2001-06-08 Sagem PROCESS FOR PARTIAL CORRELATION IN A CDMA RECEPTOR
WO2001050631A2 (en) * 1999-12-31 2001-07-12 Thomson Licensing S.A. Carrier tracking loop for direct sequence spread spectrum systems
JP2003511956A (en) * 1999-10-13 2003-03-25 ユー−ナブ マイクロエレクトロニクス コーポレーション Spread spectrum receiver
EP1517436A2 (en) * 1999-10-07 2005-03-23 Parkervision, Inc. Down converter using subsampling
US7653158B2 (en) 2001-11-09 2010-01-26 Parkervision, Inc. Gain control in a communication channel
US7653145B2 (en) 1999-08-04 2010-01-26 Parkervision, Inc. Wireless local area network (WLAN) using universal frequency translation technology including multi-phase embodiments and circuit implementations
US7693502B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2010-04-06 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for down-converting an electromagnetic signal, transforms for same, and aperture relationships
US7693230B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2010-04-06 Parkervision, Inc. Apparatus and method of differential IQ frequency up-conversion
US7697916B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2010-04-13 Parkervision, Inc. Applications of universal frequency translation
US7724845B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2010-05-25 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for down-converting and electromagnetic signal, and transforms for same
US7773688B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2010-08-10 Parkervision, Inc. Method, system, and apparatus for balanced frequency up-conversion, including circuitry to directly couple the outputs of multiple transistors
US7822401B2 (en) 2000-04-14 2010-10-26 Parkervision, Inc. Apparatus and method for down-converting electromagnetic signals by controlled charging and discharging of a capacitor
US7865177B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2011-01-04 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for down-converting an electromagnetic signal, and transforms for same, and aperture relationships
US7894789B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2011-02-22 Parkervision, Inc. Down-conversion of an electromagnetic signal with feedback control
US7991815B2 (en) 2000-11-14 2011-08-02 Parkervision, Inc. Methods, systems, and computer program products for parallel correlation and applications thereof
US8019291B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2011-09-13 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for frequency down-conversion and frequency up-conversion
US8160196B2 (en) 2002-07-18 2012-04-17 Parkervision, Inc. Networking methods and systems
US8233855B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2012-07-31 Parkervision, Inc. Up-conversion based on gated information signal
US8295406B1 (en) 1999-08-04 2012-10-23 Parkervision, Inc. Universal platform module for a plurality of communication protocols
US8407061B2 (en) 2002-07-18 2013-03-26 Parkervision, Inc. Networking methods and systems
EP1909446A3 (en) * 2006-10-03 2014-03-26 NEC Corporation Mobile communication system and its signal transfer method
WO2017044191A1 (en) * 2015-09-08 2017-03-16 Xilinx, Inc. Radio frequency current steering digital to analog converter
US11460572B2 (en) 2016-08-12 2022-10-04 University Of Washington Millimeter wave imaging systems and methods using direct conversion receivers and/or modulation techniques
US11555916B2 (en) 2016-12-08 2023-01-17 University Of Washington Millimeter wave and/or microwave imaging systems and methods including examples of partitioned inverse and enhanced resolution modes and imaging devices

Families Citing this family (294)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3377391B2 (en) * 1997-02-12 2003-02-17 日本テクトロニクス株式会社 Real-time signal analyzer
US6996096B2 (en) * 1997-02-14 2006-02-07 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Communication apparatus and a method of controlling a communication apparatus
US6130922A (en) * 1997-05-02 2000-10-10 Lsi Logic Corporation Demodulating digital video broadcast signals
JPH1141141A (en) * 1997-05-21 1999-02-12 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Spread spectrum signal receiving method and device therefor
JP3504119B2 (en) * 1997-09-12 2004-03-08 三菱電機株式会社 Demodulation device, clock recovery device, demodulation method, and clock recovery method
DE69923160T2 (en) * 1998-01-30 2005-12-29 Wavecrest Corp., Edina JITTER ANALYZER AND METHOD OF JITTER ANALYSIS
US6396819B1 (en) 1998-03-21 2002-05-28 Richard D. Fleeter Low-cost satellite communication system
US6134429A (en) * 1998-04-10 2000-10-17 Vlsi Technology, Inc. Direct digital down conversion of a 10.8 MHz intermediate frequency signal in the personal handy phone system
US6178195B1 (en) * 1998-05-14 2001-01-23 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for detecting spread spectrum signals using a signal from a secondary source
US6331996B1 (en) * 1998-05-28 2001-12-18 Lucent Technologies Inc. Channel synchronization and impulse sounding in the presence of frequency offset
US6975673B1 (en) * 1998-07-14 2005-12-13 Axonn, L.L.C. Narrow-band interference rejecting spread spectrum radio system and method
US7068728B2 (en) * 1998-10-09 2006-06-27 Broadcom Corporation Carrierless backwards compatible data neworking transmitter, receiver, and signal format
US6327311B1 (en) * 1998-10-09 2001-12-04 Broadcom Homenetworking, Inc. Frequency diverse single carrier modulation for robust communication over in-premises wiring
EP0996237B1 (en) * 1998-10-19 2004-02-04 Lucent Technologies Inc. Timing estimation for GSM bursts based on previously determined average values
US6362903B1 (en) * 1998-10-30 2002-03-26 Lockheed Martin Corporation Use of higher order modulation techniques to transmit information on passbands of a dispersion-limited fiber link
AU2644799A (en) * 1998-11-11 2000-05-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Digital correlator for a receptor of signals from satellite radio-navigation systems
US6898612B1 (en) * 1998-11-12 2005-05-24 Sarnoff Corporation Method and system for on-line blind source separation
US7209725B1 (en) 1999-01-22 2007-04-24 Parkervision, Inc Analog zero if FM decoder and embodiments thereof, such as the family radio service
US6191724B1 (en) * 1999-01-28 2001-02-20 Mcewan Thomas E. Short pulse microwave transceiver
US6560270B1 (en) * 1999-03-04 2003-05-06 Northrop Grumman Corporation Method for tuning a spread spectrum receiver
US6377609B1 (en) * 1999-03-05 2002-04-23 Neptune Technology Group Inc. Spread spectrum frequency hopping system and method
US7110435B1 (en) * 1999-03-15 2006-09-19 Parkervision, Inc. Spread spectrum applications of universal frequency translation
US7130332B1 (en) * 1999-04-20 2006-10-31 Symmetricom, Inc. Pilot tracking for synchronization using correlation between digital signal and locally generated version of PN signal
KR100513710B1 (en) * 1999-05-25 2005-09-07 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for performing code acquisition in CDMA communications system
US6631156B1 (en) * 1999-09-27 2003-10-07 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Digital data communications system
FI119011B (en) 1999-10-13 2008-06-13 U Nav Microelectronics Corp Matched filter and spread spectrum receiver
FI111578B (en) 1999-10-13 2003-08-15 U Nav Microelectronics Corp correlator
FI114887B (en) 1999-10-13 2005-01-14 U Nav Microelectronics Corp Signal detection system of a spread spectrum receiver
US6823017B1 (en) * 1999-10-29 2004-11-23 International Business Machines Corporation Systems, methods and computer program products for filtering glitches from measured values in a sequence of code points
US6650688B1 (en) * 1999-12-20 2003-11-18 Intel Corporation Chip rate selectable square root raised cosine filter for mobile telecommunications
US7227884B2 (en) 2000-02-28 2007-06-05 Aeroastro, Inc. Spread-spectrum receiver with progressive fourier transform
US6981180B1 (en) * 2000-03-16 2005-12-27 Akamai Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for testing request-response service using live connection traffic
US7224719B1 (en) * 2000-03-31 2007-05-29 Qualcomm, Incorporated Fast acquisition of a pilot signal in a wireless communication device
JP3910448B2 (en) * 2000-03-31 2007-04-25 三菱電機株式会社 Automatic frequency control method and apparatus and demodulator
US6292128B1 (en) 2000-04-04 2001-09-18 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Air Force Time domain detection and clockless logic electronic warfare receiver
US6876953B1 (en) * 2000-04-20 2005-04-05 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Narrowband signal processor
GB2365715B (en) * 2000-05-15 2004-04-28 Univ Bristol Circuit
US6879627B1 (en) * 2000-06-01 2005-04-12 Shiron Satellite Communications (1996) Ltd. Variable rate continuous mode satellite modem
US7146176B2 (en) 2000-06-13 2006-12-05 Shared Spectrum Company System and method for reuse of communications spectrum for fixed and mobile applications with efficient method to mitigate interference
US6728301B1 (en) 2000-07-07 2004-04-27 Texas Instruments Incorporated System and method for automatic frequency control in spread spectrum communications
US7245638B2 (en) * 2000-07-21 2007-07-17 Broadcom Corporation Methods and systems for DSP-based receivers
CA2418855A1 (en) * 2000-08-09 2002-02-14 Skybitz, Inc. System and method for fast code phase and carrier frequency acquisition in gps receiver
US20020036569A1 (en) * 2000-08-14 2002-03-28 Martin Philip John Tag and receiver systems
DE10043160B4 (en) * 2000-09-01 2009-11-26 Infineon Technologies Ag A sound signal detection circuit and method for detecting sound signals
EP1325561A4 (en) * 2000-09-18 2004-07-28 Skybitz Inc System and method for fast code phase and carrier frequency acquisition in gps receiver
US6654593B1 (en) * 2000-10-30 2003-11-25 Research In Motion Limited Combined discrete automatic gain control (AGC) and DC estimation
CA2332609A1 (en) * 2001-01-29 2002-07-29 Silicon Analog Systems Corporation High speed filter
FR2820227B1 (en) * 2001-01-30 2003-04-18 France Telecom NOISE REDUCTION METHOD AND DEVICE
DE60229370D1 (en) * 2001-03-30 2008-11-27 M & Fc Holding Llc IMPROVED WIRELESS PACKAGE DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS WITH APPLICABILITY BOTH ON LARGE-NETWORK NETWORKS AND LOCAL NETWORKS
US6785523B2 (en) 2001-05-04 2004-08-31 Atheros Communications, Inc. Self-correlation detection in automatic gain calibration
US6721547B2 (en) 2001-05-04 2004-04-13 Atheros Communications, Inc. In-band and out-of-band signal detection for automatic gain calibration systems
WO2002091104A2 (en) * 2001-05-04 2002-11-14 Atheros Communications, Inc. Self-correlation detection and in-band and out-of-band signal detection for automatic gain calibration systems
US7006556B2 (en) 2001-05-18 2006-02-28 Global Locate, Inc. Method and apparatus for performing signal correlation at multiple resolutions to mitigate multipath interference
US7190712B2 (en) 2001-05-18 2007-03-13 Global Locate, Inc Method and apparatus for performing signal correlation
US7769076B2 (en) 2001-05-18 2010-08-03 Broadcom Corporation Method and apparatus for performing frequency synchronization
US7567636B2 (en) * 2001-05-18 2009-07-28 Global Locate, Inc. Method and apparatus for performing signal correlation using historical correlation data
US6891880B2 (en) * 2001-05-18 2005-05-10 Global Locate, Inc. Method and apparatus for performing signal correlation
US6697007B2 (en) * 2001-08-27 2004-02-24 Lockheed Martin Corporation Automatic recognition of radar scan type
US6889035B2 (en) * 2001-08-29 2005-05-03 Adtran, Inc. Cable-less interconnect architecture for effecting blind coupling of diplexer to radio transceiver
US7183971B1 (en) * 2001-09-26 2007-02-27 Interstate Electronics Corporation Hybrid translator in a global positioning system (GPS)
US8085889B1 (en) * 2005-04-11 2011-12-27 Rambus Inc. Methods for managing alignment and latency in interference cancellation
US6856925B2 (en) * 2001-10-26 2005-02-15 Texas Instruments Incorporated Active removal of aliasing frequencies in a decimating structure by changing a decimation ratio in time and space
US6950670B2 (en) * 2001-10-31 2005-09-27 At&T Corp. Wireless network having joint power and data rate adaptation
US7085335B2 (en) * 2001-11-09 2006-08-01 Parkervision, Inc. Method and apparatus for reducing DC offsets in a communication system
TW543328B (en) * 2001-12-10 2003-07-21 Silicon Integrated Sys Corp TV decoder
KR100474709B1 (en) * 2001-12-10 2005-03-08 삼성전자주식회사 Device and method for cancelling narrow-band interference in wireless communication systems
AUPR963401A0 (en) * 2001-12-19 2002-01-24 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Methods for the enhancement of complex peaks
JP4785320B2 (en) * 2002-01-31 2011-10-05 キヤノン株式会社 Storage device
US7088794B2 (en) * 2002-02-19 2006-08-08 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Automatic gain control for digitized RF signal processing
JP4177585B2 (en) * 2002-02-25 2008-11-05 ソニー株式会社 GPS receiver and receiving method
TW576035B (en) * 2002-04-15 2004-02-11 Accton Technology Corp Detecting apparatus of primary synchronization for cell search for CDMA system
US20040203982A1 (en) * 2002-04-24 2004-10-14 Barak Ilan S. Controlling output power in cellular telephones
US7050485B2 (en) * 2002-05-07 2006-05-23 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Iterative CDMA phase and frequency acquisition
JP2004023556A (en) * 2002-06-18 2004-01-22 Seiko Epson Corp Electronic apparatus
US7570189B2 (en) * 2002-06-27 2009-08-04 Nxp B.V. Radio frequency data capture
EP1383239A1 (en) * 2002-07-17 2004-01-21 STMicroelectronics N.V. Method and device for performing automatic frequency control in a DS-CDMA receiver
US6917641B2 (en) * 2002-07-23 2005-07-12 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for detecting software tampering in a subscriber device
DE60220046T2 (en) * 2002-08-02 2008-01-10 Stmicroelectronics Ltd., Almondsbury Integrated circuit for GPS code acquisition
EP1387498A1 (en) * 2002-08-02 2004-02-04 STMicroelectronics Limited Integrated circuit for code acquisition
DE60238833D1 (en) * 2002-08-02 2011-02-17 St Microelectronics Srl Integrated circuit for code acquisition
US6768441B2 (en) * 2002-08-20 2004-07-27 Telefonaktiebolaget L.M. Ericsson Methods of receiving communications signals including a plurality of digital filters having different bandwidths and related receivers
US7096132B2 (en) * 2002-10-17 2006-08-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Procedure for estimating a parameter of a local maxima or minima of a function
US6873910B2 (en) 2002-10-22 2005-03-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Procedure for searching for position determination signals using a plurality of search modes
AU2003301626A1 (en) * 2002-10-23 2004-05-13 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Frequency and phase control apparatus and maximum likelihood decoder
JP4140340B2 (en) * 2002-10-24 2008-08-27 日本電気株式会社 Mobile communication system, mobile station, base station, and packet communication method used therefor
KR100524730B1 (en) * 2002-11-02 2005-10-31 엘지전자 주식회사 Early syncrounization search method for mobile communication system
US7346094B2 (en) * 2002-12-13 2008-03-18 International Business Machines Corporation System and method for transmitting data and additional information simultaneously within a wire based communication system
WO2005032462A2 (en) 2003-02-27 2005-04-14 Enzo Therapeutics, Inc. Glucocerebroside treatment of disease
US7292619B2 (en) * 2003-03-03 2007-11-06 Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories Method and system for acquiring ultra-wide-bandwidth communications signals using sequential block searches
US7352801B2 (en) * 2003-03-13 2008-04-01 Texas Instruments Incorporated Selecting one of multiple antennas to receive signals in a wireless packet network
US7515939B2 (en) 2003-10-01 2009-04-07 Broadcom Corporation System and method for channel-adaptive antenna selection
KR100606126B1 (en) * 2003-05-12 2006-07-28 삼성전자주식회사 Device and Method for canceling narrow-band interference in mobile communication systems
US7409010B2 (en) 2003-06-10 2008-08-05 Shared Spectrum Company Method and system for transmitting signals with reduced spurious emissions
US8032107B1 (en) * 2003-06-26 2011-10-04 Cypress Semiconductor Corporation Power management by constant awake correlator
KR100548371B1 (en) * 2003-07-04 2006-02-02 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for measuring frequency
IL157787A (en) * 2003-09-07 2010-12-30 Mosaid Technologies Inc Modular outlet for data communications network
US20050031051A1 (en) * 2003-08-04 2005-02-10 Lowell Rosen Multiple access holographic communications apparatus and methods
US7221918B1 (en) * 2003-08-11 2007-05-22 National Semiconductor Corporation Digital DC-offset correction circuit for an RF receiver
US7174138B2 (en) 2003-08-21 2007-02-06 Conexant Systems, Inc. Power-based hardware diversity
US7542815B1 (en) 2003-09-04 2009-06-02 Akita Blue, Inc. Extraction of left/center/right information from two-channel stereo sources
US7372372B2 (en) * 2003-09-05 2008-05-13 Itron, Inc. Sequence inversion keyed countdown timer utilized within a utility meter system
US6976102B1 (en) * 2003-09-11 2005-12-13 Xilinx, Inc. Integrated circuit with auto negotiation
WO2005050889A2 (en) * 2003-09-24 2005-06-02 Sarnoff Corporation Method and apparatus for packet detection processing
US7839916B1 (en) * 2003-10-08 2010-11-23 L-3 Communications Corporation Systems and methods for communication in a global positioning system (GPS) device
EP1524779B1 (en) * 2003-10-16 2010-12-01 Saab Ab Radio signal positioning
US7295638B2 (en) * 2003-11-17 2007-11-13 Motorola, Inc. Communication device
JP4198034B2 (en) * 2003-11-25 2008-12-17 富士通株式会社 Information code transmitter
US8107512B2 (en) * 2004-03-08 2012-01-31 Thomson Licensing Method and apparatus for robust automatic frequency control in CDMA systems with constant pilot signals
US7071866B2 (en) * 2004-03-26 2006-07-04 Northrop Grumman Corporation 2-d range hopping spread spectrum encoder/decoder system for RF tags
US7471717B2 (en) * 2004-05-17 2008-12-30 Yi Ping Huang Apparatus and method for acquiring spread-spectrum signals
US7983867B2 (en) * 2004-06-15 2011-07-19 Varian Medical Systems, Inc. Multi-gain data processing
US7555033B2 (en) * 2004-06-22 2009-06-30 The Aerospace Corporation Binary offset carrier M-code envelope detector
KR100617787B1 (en) * 2004-06-29 2006-08-28 삼성전자주식회사 Gps receiver for detecting jammer using fast fourier transform and therefor method
EP1782302A4 (en) * 2004-06-30 2014-08-13 Nuri Telecom Co Ltd Remote meter-reading system and method using duplicated data transmission of packet data transmission and circuit data transmission
JP4271235B2 (en) * 2004-07-16 2009-06-03 富士通株式会社 Method and apparatus for frequency domain equalization in a single carrier receiver
US7358897B2 (en) * 2004-08-16 2008-04-15 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communicatios Ab Apparatus, methods and computer program products for GPS signal acquisition using an adaptive search engine
US7623565B2 (en) * 2004-09-20 2009-11-24 Cypress Semiconductor Corporation Method for providing packet framing in a communication system
US7593707B2 (en) * 2004-11-01 2009-09-22 Broadcom Corp. Method and system for compensation of DC offset in an RF receiver
GB2420238B (en) * 2004-11-04 2007-03-21 Instro Prec Ltd Correlation apparatus and method
JP4810190B2 (en) * 2004-12-02 2011-11-09 ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 Receiver
US7706745B2 (en) * 2004-12-03 2010-04-27 M&Fc Holding, Llc Method, system, apparatus, and computer program product for communications relay
KR100600817B1 (en) * 2004-12-09 2006-07-18 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and method for timing error detection using implementation of cyclic correlator
US8462858B2 (en) * 2005-02-18 2013-06-11 Texas Instruments Incorporated Wireless communications with transceiver-integrated frequency shift control and power control
US7706992B2 (en) 2005-02-23 2010-04-27 Digital Intelligence, L.L.C. System and method for signal decomposition, analysis and reconstruction
US7353034B2 (en) 2005-04-04 2008-04-01 X One, Inc. Location sharing and tracking using mobile phones or other wireless devices
US8139685B2 (en) * 2005-05-10 2012-03-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Systems, methods, and apparatus for frequency control
US7949032B1 (en) * 2005-05-16 2011-05-24 Frost Edward G Methods and apparatus for masking and securing communications transmissions
US8542714B2 (en) * 2005-07-29 2013-09-24 U-Blox Ag Method and system for reconstructing time of transmit from assisted or weak signal GPS observations
WO2007043124A1 (en) * 2005-09-30 2007-04-19 Fujitsu Limited Oversampling transversal equalizer
JP4676296B2 (en) * 2005-10-05 2011-04-27 東芝テック株式会社 Leakage transmission line diversity device
JP4274166B2 (en) * 2005-10-06 2009-06-03 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Positioning device, positioning method and program
US7515888B2 (en) * 2005-10-06 2009-04-07 Nxp B.V. Systems and method for a highly integrated, multi-mode tuner
US20070099677A1 (en) * 2005-10-27 2007-05-03 Via Technologies Inc. Data transfer method and transceiver thereof
US20070110011A1 (en) * 2005-11-14 2007-05-17 Joakim Nelson Mobile communication apparatus for operation in a wireless local area network
US20070115160A1 (en) * 2005-11-18 2007-05-24 Bendik Kleveland Self-referenced differential decoding of analog baseband signals
JP2007181016A (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-07-12 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Determination timing synchronizing circuit and reception circuit
WO2007136415A2 (en) 2005-12-30 2007-11-29 Comtech Mobile Datacom Corporation Mobile satellite communications
US8265145B1 (en) * 2006-01-13 2012-09-11 Vbrick Systems, Inc. Management and selection of reference frames for long term prediction in motion estimation
CN101421928B (en) * 2006-01-26 2012-05-23 日本电波工业株式会社 Vco driving circuit and frequency synthesizer
EP1833215A1 (en) * 2006-03-10 2007-09-12 Harris Broadcast Systems Europe Detection of excessive signal power
US7941472B1 (en) 2006-04-24 2011-05-10 Lockheed Martin Corporation Serial correlator architecture
TWI302066B (en) * 2006-04-26 2008-10-11 Ind Tech Res Inst Frequency acquisition and tracking circuit
US9097783B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2015-08-04 Telecommunication Systems, Inc. System and method for positioning using hybrid spectral compression and cross correlation signal processing
US7756651B2 (en) * 2006-05-05 2010-07-13 Elster Electricity, Llc Fractional sampling of electrical energy
US8027249B2 (en) * 2006-10-18 2011-09-27 Shared Spectrum Company Methods for using a detector to monitor and detect channel occupancy
US7564816B2 (en) 2006-05-12 2009-07-21 Shared Spectrum Company Method and system for determining spectrum availability within a network
US9538388B2 (en) 2006-05-12 2017-01-03 Shared Spectrum Company Method and system for dynamic spectrum access
US8155649B2 (en) 2006-05-12 2012-04-10 Shared Spectrum Company Method and system for classifying communication signals in a dynamic spectrum access system
US8055204B2 (en) 2007-08-15 2011-11-08 Shared Spectrum Company Methods for detecting and classifying signals transmitted over a radio frequency spectrum
US8997170B2 (en) 2006-12-29 2015-03-31 Shared Spectrum Company Method and device for policy-based control of radio
US8184653B2 (en) 2007-08-15 2012-05-22 Shared Spectrum Company Systems and methods for a cognitive radio having adaptable characteristics
US8326313B2 (en) 2006-05-12 2012-12-04 Shared Spectrum Company Method and system for dynamic spectrum access using detection periods
GB0609601D0 (en) * 2006-05-15 2006-06-21 Ttp Communications Ltd Timing errors
US8024724B2 (en) 2006-08-31 2011-09-20 Itron, Inc. Firmware download
US7847536B2 (en) * 2006-08-31 2010-12-07 Itron, Inc. Hall sensor with temperature drift control
US8312103B2 (en) 2006-08-31 2012-11-13 Itron, Inc. Periodic balanced communication node and server assignment
US8049642B2 (en) 2006-09-05 2011-11-01 Itron, Inc. Load side voltage sensing for AMI metrology
SG141258A1 (en) * 2006-09-12 2008-04-28 Oki Techno Ct Singapore Pte Apparatus and methods for demodulating a signal
SG141257A1 (en) * 2006-09-12 2008-04-28 Oki Techno Ct Singapore Pte Apparatus and method for demodulating a modulated signal
US7843391B2 (en) 2006-09-15 2010-11-30 Itron, Inc. RF local area network antenna design
US8138944B2 (en) 2006-09-15 2012-03-20 Itron, Inc. Home area networking (HAN) with handheld for diagnostics
US8787210B2 (en) 2006-09-15 2014-07-22 Itron, Inc. Firmware download with adaptive lost packet recovery
US8055461B2 (en) 2006-09-15 2011-11-08 Itron, Inc. Distributing metering responses for load balancing an AMR network
US7843834B2 (en) 2006-09-15 2010-11-30 Itron, Inc. Use of minimal propagation delay path to optimize a mesh network
US8212687B2 (en) 2006-09-15 2012-07-03 Itron, Inc. Load side voltage sensing for AMI metrology
US9354083B2 (en) * 2006-09-15 2016-05-31 Itron, Inc. Home area networking (HAN) with low power considerations for battery devices
JP5023881B2 (en) * 2006-10-03 2012-09-12 日本電気株式会社 Mobile communication system, signal transfer method, and receiver
US8384558B2 (en) 2006-10-19 2013-02-26 Itron, Inc. Extending contact life in remote disconnect applications
EP2098002A2 (en) * 2006-12-08 2009-09-09 James Cornwell Look through mode of jamming system
US7907679B2 (en) * 2007-01-12 2011-03-15 General Dynamics C4 Systems, Inc. Methods and systems for acquiring signals using coherent match filtering
US8139680B2 (en) 2007-01-12 2012-03-20 General Dynamics C4 Systems, Inc. Signal acquisition methods and apparatus in wireless communication systems
EP2127159B1 (en) * 2007-02-14 2018-11-28 dormakaba Schweiz AG System and portable device for transmitting identification signals
US7808379B2 (en) * 2007-03-05 2010-10-05 Rosemount Inc. Mode selectable field transmitter
EP1971043A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-09-17 Sony Deutschland GmbH Transmitting device and method for transmitting signals in a wireless communication system, receiving device and method for receiving signals in a wireless communication system
US20080285628A1 (en) * 2007-05-17 2008-11-20 Gizis Alexander C Communications systems and methods for remotely controlled vehicles
JP4724694B2 (en) * 2007-08-08 2011-07-13 日立オートモティブシステムズ株式会社 Radio radar equipment
US20090088105A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2009-04-02 Ahmadreza Rofougaran Method and system for utilizing a programmable coplanar waveguide or microstrip bandpass filter for undersampling in a receiver
US8571088B2 (en) * 2007-11-12 2013-10-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Suppression of multipath effects for received SPS signals
US9285478B2 (en) * 2008-02-20 2016-03-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Multipath detection for received SPS signal
WO2009123598A1 (en) * 2008-04-04 2009-10-08 Beceem Communications Inc. Managing handoffs between overlaid networks
US20090287428A1 (en) * 2008-05-13 2009-11-19 Elster Electricity, Llc Fractional samples to improve metering and instrumentation
US8005152B2 (en) * 2008-05-21 2011-08-23 Samplify Systems, Inc. Compression of baseband signals in base transceiver systems
US8174428B2 (en) * 2008-05-21 2012-05-08 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. Compression of signals in base transceiver systems
US8713697B2 (en) 2008-07-09 2014-04-29 Lennox Manufacturing, Inc. Apparatus and method for storing event information for an HVAC system
WO2010022156A2 (en) 2008-08-19 2010-02-25 Shared Spectrum Company Method and system for dynamic spectrum access using specialty detectors and improved networking
US20100050108A1 (en) * 2008-08-22 2010-02-25 Lennox Manufacturing, Inc., A Corporation Of Delaware Display apparatus and method for entering a reminder in a control unit for an environmental control system
US20100050075A1 (en) * 2008-08-22 2010-02-25 Lennox Manufacturing, Inc., A Corporation Of Delaware Display apparatus and method for a control unit for an environmental control system
JP5195234B2 (en) * 2008-09-29 2013-05-08 ソニー株式会社 Receiving apparatus and receiving method
US8527096B2 (en) * 2008-10-24 2013-09-03 Lennox Industries Inc. Programmable controller and a user interface for same
US8694164B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-04-08 Lennox Industries, Inc. Interactive user guidance interface for a heating, ventilation and air conditioning system
US9325517B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2016-04-26 Lennox Industries Inc. Device abstraction system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning system
US9632490B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2017-04-25 Lennox Industries Inc. System and method for zoning a distributed architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8295981B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2012-10-23 Lennox Industries Inc. Device commissioning in a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8564400B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-10-22 Lennox Industries, Inc. Communication protocol system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8600559B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-12-03 Lennox Industries Inc. Method of controlling equipment in a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8994539B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2015-03-31 Lennox Industries, Inc. Alarm and diagnostics system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8802981B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-08-12 Lennox Industries Inc. Flush wall mount thermostat and in-set mounting plate for a heating, ventilation and air conditioning system
US8788100B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-07-22 Lennox Industries Inc. System and method for zoning a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8874815B2 (en) * 2008-10-27 2014-10-28 Lennox Industries, Inc. Communication protocol system and method for a distributed architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8548630B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-10-01 Lennox Industries, Inc. Alarm and diagnostics system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8600558B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-12-03 Lennox Industries Inc. System recovery in a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8744629B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-06-03 Lennox Industries Inc. System and method of use for a user interface dashboard of a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8615326B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-12-24 Lennox Industries Inc. System and method of use for a user interface dashboard of a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8463442B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-06-11 Lennox Industries, Inc. Alarm and diagnostics system and method for a distributed architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8452456B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-05-28 Lennox Industries Inc. System and method of use for a user interface dashboard of a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US9678486B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2017-06-13 Lennox Industries Inc. Device abstraction system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning system
US8725298B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-05-13 Lennox Industries, Inc. Alarm and diagnostics system and method for a distributed architecture heating, ventilation and conditioning network
US8661165B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-02-25 Lennox Industries, Inc. Device abstraction system and method for a distributed architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning system
US8655490B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-02-18 Lennox Industries, Inc. System and method of use for a user interface dashboard of a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8774210B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-07-08 Lennox Industries, Inc. Communication protocol system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8560125B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-10-15 Lennox Industries Communication protocol system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US9651925B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2017-05-16 Lennox Industries Inc. System and method for zoning a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8977794B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2015-03-10 Lennox Industries, Inc. Communication protocol system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8655491B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-02-18 Lennox Industries Inc. Alarm and diagnostics system and method for a distributed architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8798796B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-08-05 Lennox Industries Inc. General control techniques in a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8855825B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-10-07 Lennox Industries Inc. Device abstraction system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning system
US8543243B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-09-24 Lennox Industries, Inc. System and method of use for a user interface dashboard of a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8452906B2 (en) * 2008-10-27 2013-05-28 Lennox Industries, Inc. Communication protocol system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8892797B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-11-18 Lennox Industries Inc. Communication protocol system and method for a distributed-architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US8762666B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-06-24 Lennox Industries, Inc. Backup and restoration of operation control data in a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network
US9432208B2 (en) * 2008-10-27 2016-08-30 Lennox Industries Inc. Device abstraction system and method for a distributed architecture heating, ventilation and air conditioning system
US8279974B1 (en) * 2008-11-04 2012-10-02 Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Dynamic power reduction in a wireless receiver
US8688045B2 (en) * 2008-11-19 2014-04-01 Qualcomm Incorporated FM transmitter and non-FM receiver integrated on single chip
US8238506B2 (en) * 2009-01-06 2012-08-07 National Applied Research Laboratories Phase-discriminating device and method
US9106364B1 (en) 2009-01-26 2015-08-11 Comtech Mobile Datacom Corporation Signal processing of a high capacity waveform
US8548107B1 (en) 2009-01-26 2013-10-01 Comtech Mobile Datacom Corporation Advanced multi-user detector
EP2224658B1 (en) * 2009-02-27 2015-07-29 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (publ) Correction of frequency offsets greater than the Nyquist frequency
JP5343749B2 (en) * 2009-07-30 2013-11-13 富士通株式会社 Optical communication device
US8675711B1 (en) * 2009-09-25 2014-03-18 Comtech Mobile Datacom Corporation System and methods for dynamic spread spectrum usage
US20110144969A1 (en) * 2009-12-11 2011-06-16 International Business Machines Corporation High-Frequency Entropy Extraction From Timing Jitter
US8611397B2 (en) * 2009-12-21 2013-12-17 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for efficient DSSS FFT processing employing prime factor decomposition
EP2360837B1 (en) * 2010-02-15 2013-01-02 ST-Ericsson SA Process for performing cubic metric computation in the transmitter of a UE for a wireless communication system, and apparatus for performing the same
US9166602B2 (en) * 2010-03-24 2015-10-20 Greenpeak Technologies B.V. Transceiver
US8649388B2 (en) 2010-09-02 2014-02-11 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. Transmission of multiprotocol data in a distributed antenna system
US8892184B2 (en) 2010-10-18 2014-11-18 Siemens Medical Solutions Usa, Inc. Systems and methods for reducing interference in a dual modality imaging system
GB2487044A (en) * 2010-12-24 2012-07-11 Enmodus Ltd Determining whether a signal is present by comparing phase measurements, and distinguishing between signals
US9059778B2 (en) 2011-01-07 2015-06-16 Integrated Device Technology Inc. Frequency domain compression in a base transceiver system
US8989088B2 (en) 2011-01-07 2015-03-24 Integrated Device Technology Inc. OFDM signal processing in a base transceiver system
US8750444B2 (en) * 2011-05-06 2014-06-10 Northrop Grumman Systems Corporation Snapshot processing of timing data
WO2013033840A1 (en) * 2011-09-09 2013-03-14 Per Vices Corporation Systems and methods for performing demodulation and modulation on software defined radios
US10200476B2 (en) 2011-10-18 2019-02-05 Itron, Inc. Traffic management and remote configuration in a gateway-based network
US9419888B2 (en) 2011-12-22 2016-08-16 Itron, Inc. Cell router failure detection in a mesh network
US9214945B2 (en) * 2012-02-27 2015-12-15 Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Digital phase lock loop and method thereof
TWI462539B (en) * 2012-03-06 2014-11-21 Mstar Semiconductor Inc Method of frequency adjustment
US9225383B2 (en) 2012-03-14 2015-12-29 Geoforce, Inc. System and method for implementation of a direct sequence spread spectrum transmitter
US9082102B2 (en) 2012-04-10 2015-07-14 Geoforce, Inc. System and method for remote equipment data management
US9916555B2 (en) 2012-04-10 2018-03-13 Geoforce, Inc. Location tracking with integrated identification of cargo carrier contents and related system and method
US9049641B2 (en) 2012-04-10 2015-06-02 Geoforce, Inc. Apparatus and method for radio frequency silencing in oil and gas operations, excavation sites, and other environments
US9215296B1 (en) 2012-05-03 2015-12-15 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for efficient radio unit processing in a communication system
US8843313B2 (en) * 2012-06-13 2014-09-23 The Boeing Company Multipath isolation through the combined use of antenna diversity and frequency diversity
US9660855B2 (en) * 2012-06-29 2017-05-23 Cable Television Laboratories, Inc. Orthogonal signal demodulation
CN102843178B (en) * 2012-07-27 2014-12-17 航天东方红卫星有限公司 Spread spectrum relay measurement and control system compatible with standard unified S-band measurement and control system
US8879679B2 (en) * 2012-08-27 2014-11-04 Motorola Mobility Llc Frequency offset compensation improvement for a long term evolution (LTE) searcher
BR112015009525A2 (en) * 2012-11-01 2017-07-04 Halliburton Energy Services Inc appliance, system, processor-implemented method, and article including machine-accessible non-transient media
US9078256B2 (en) 2012-11-30 2015-07-07 Electro-Motive Diesel, Inc. Data communication systems and methods for locomotive consists
US9001683B2 (en) 2012-11-30 2015-04-07 Electro-Motive Diesel, Inc. Selective routing of communications in locomotive consist
US9071338B2 (en) 2012-11-30 2015-06-30 Electro-Motive Diesel, Inc. Reliable data transfer for locomotive consist communications
US9019918B2 (en) 2012-11-30 2015-04-28 Electro-Motive Diesel, Inc. Transmission spectrum selection for locomotive consist communications
US8976678B2 (en) 2012-11-30 2015-03-10 Electro-Motive Diesel, Inc. Multiple line communications for locomotive consist
US8687739B1 (en) * 2012-12-12 2014-04-01 Phuong Huynh Quadrature bandpass-sampling RF receiver
US9031567B2 (en) 2012-12-28 2015-05-12 Spreadtrum Communications Usa Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitter optimization based on allocated transmission band
US9203933B1 (en) 2013-08-28 2015-12-01 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for efficient data compression in a communication system
US9553954B1 (en) 2013-10-01 2017-01-24 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus utilizing packet segment compression parameters for compression in a communication system
US9485688B1 (en) 2013-10-09 2016-11-01 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling error and identifying bursts in a data compression system
US8989257B1 (en) 2013-10-09 2015-03-24 Integrated Device Technology Inc. Method and apparatus for providing near-zero jitter real-time compression in a communication system
US9398489B1 (en) 2013-10-09 2016-07-19 Integrated Device Technology Method and apparatus for context based data compression in a communication system
US9313300B2 (en) 2013-11-07 2016-04-12 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. Methods and apparatuses for a unified compression framework of baseband signals
US20150215880A1 (en) * 2014-01-28 2015-07-30 Qualcomm Incorporated Devices and methods for locating received tones in wireless communications systems
DE102014104090B4 (en) * 2014-03-25 2020-08-13 Intel IP Corporation Method and related mobile device for cell search with low memory requirements
US10091667B2 (en) * 2014-08-27 2018-10-02 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Upstream/downstream network control, management of mobile communication devices and corresponding communications through one or more wireless access points
CN104485976B (en) * 2014-12-11 2017-02-22 中国工程物理研究院电子工程研究所 High-dynamic weak-compounding code spread spectrum signal fast capturing method
RU2605045C1 (en) * 2015-06-11 2016-12-20 Публичное акционерное общество "Информационные телекоммуникационные технологии" (ПАО "Интелтех") Method of binary information transmitting and receiving over radio communication channels in non-automatic mode (versions)
DE102016119750B4 (en) * 2015-10-26 2022-01-13 Infineon Technologies Ag Devices and methods for multi-channel scanning
US10327164B2 (en) * 2015-10-29 2019-06-18 Cable Television Laboratories, Inc. Multichannel communication systems
KR20170051895A (en) * 2015-11-03 2017-05-12 삼성전자주식회사 Method for acquiring signal and an electronic device implementing the same
US9985650B2 (en) * 2016-05-04 2018-05-29 Texas Instruments Incorporated Digital down converter
TWI602122B (en) * 2016-06-08 2017-10-11 神雲科技股份有限公司 Firmware updating method
US9905120B1 (en) 2016-08-29 2018-02-27 At&T Digital Life, Inc. Alarm initiation when sensor is intentionally jammed
JP6299822B2 (en) * 2016-08-29 2018-03-28 Nttエレクトロニクス株式会社 Known signal detection method
DE102016218643A1 (en) * 2016-09-28 2018-03-29 Robert Bosch Gmbh Method for evaluating radar radiation and radar apparatus
US10728853B2 (en) * 2016-10-06 2020-07-28 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Wake up radio frame with spectrum spreading based single carrier
EP3410620B1 (en) * 2017-06-02 2021-09-22 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Jamming device and jamming method
US10237835B1 (en) * 2017-11-06 2019-03-19 T-Mobile Usa, Inc. Temporal power control system and method
US10756776B2 (en) 2017-12-01 2020-08-25 Ram Photonics, LLC Method and system for spread spectrum code acquisition
CN109950690B (en) * 2017-12-21 2020-11-17 华为技术有限公司 Antenna and terminal
US10374618B1 (en) 2018-03-29 2019-08-06 Qorvo Us, Inc. Frequency locked loop with multi-bit sampler
US10827043B2 (en) * 2018-04-04 2020-11-03 Hall Labs Llc Normalization of communication between devices
US10833799B2 (en) 2018-05-31 2020-11-10 Itron Global Sarl Message correction and dynamic correction adjustment for communication systems
US10742257B1 (en) 2018-09-26 2020-08-11 Novatel Inc. System and method for demodulating code shift keying data from a satellite signal utilizing a binary search
US10742258B1 (en) 2018-09-26 2020-08-11 Novatel Inc. System and method for demodulating code shift keying data utilizing correlations with combinational PRN codes generated for different bit positions
US11602311B2 (en) 2019-01-29 2023-03-14 Murata Vios, Inc. Pulse oximetry system
WO2020219749A1 (en) * 2019-04-23 2020-10-29 Decision Sciences Medical Company, LLC Direct sequence spread spectrum coded waveforms in ultrasound imaging
RU2768249C1 (en) * 2021-04-26 2022-03-23 Акционерное общество "Концерн "Созвездие" Broadband signal receiving unit
CN117389128B (en) * 2023-12-08 2024-02-23 深圳市山海半导体科技有限公司 Automatic calibration method and system for digital clock

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5610939A (en) * 1993-02-17 1997-03-11 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Signal processing circuit for spread spectrum communications
US5625639A (en) * 1993-10-22 1997-04-29 Nec Corporation Spread spectrum method for transmitting an information signal as a radio signal at a high speed
US5627856A (en) * 1994-09-09 1997-05-06 Omnipoint Corporation Method and apparatus for receiving and despreading a continuous phase-modulated spread spectrum signal using self-synchronizing correlators
US5638362A (en) * 1993-10-14 1997-06-10 Ntt Mobile Communications Network, Inc. Correlation detector and communication apparatus
US5661750A (en) * 1995-06-06 1997-08-26 Cellnet Data Systems, Inc. Direct sequence spread spectrum system
US5687190A (en) * 1995-10-20 1997-11-11 Otc Telecom Non-coherent direct sequence spread spectrum receiver for detecting bit/symbol chip sequences using threshold comparisons of chip sequence correlations

Family Cites Families (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4361875A (en) * 1980-06-23 1982-11-30 Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated Multiple tone detector and locator
US4581606A (en) * 1982-08-30 1986-04-08 Isotec Industries Limited Central monitor for home security system
US4754255A (en) * 1984-03-12 1988-06-28 Sanders Rudy T User identifying vehicle control and security device
US4785463A (en) * 1985-09-03 1988-11-15 Motorola, Inc. Digital global positioning system receiver
US4799062A (en) * 1987-04-27 1989-01-17 Axonn Corporation Radio position determination method and apparatus
US5252966A (en) * 1987-05-21 1993-10-12 Trw Inc. Transmitter for remote control system for door locks
US5095493A (en) * 1988-11-02 1992-03-10 Axonn Corporation Wireless alarm system
US4977577A (en) * 1988-11-02 1990-12-11 Axonn Corporation Wireless alarm system
US5067136A (en) * 1988-11-02 1991-11-19 Axonn Corporation Wireless alarm system
US4983970A (en) * 1990-03-28 1991-01-08 General Electric Company Method and apparatus for digital phased array imaging
US5119396A (en) * 1990-08-27 1992-06-02 Axonn Corporation Binary phase shift keying modulation system
US5311541A (en) * 1992-05-08 1994-05-10 Axonn Corporation Frequency agile radio
WO1994028663A1 (en) * 1992-05-08 1994-12-08 Axonn Corporation A frequency agile radio
CA2111929C (en) * 1993-12-16 1999-04-20 Reinhart Karl Pildner Wireless alarm system
US5457713A (en) * 1994-03-07 1995-10-10 Sanconix, Inc. Spread spectrum alignment repositioning method
US5408217A (en) * 1994-03-21 1995-04-18 Sanconix, Inc. Secure fire/security/sensor transmitter system
US5652592A (en) * 1995-06-06 1997-07-29 Sanconix, Inc Radio location with enhanced Z-axis determination
US5640416A (en) * 1995-06-07 1997-06-17 Comsat Corporation Digital downconverter/despreader for direct sequence spread spectrum communications system
US6111911A (en) * 1995-06-07 2000-08-29 Sanconix, Inc Direct sequence frequency ambiguity resolving receiver
US5909193A (en) * 1995-08-31 1999-06-01 Northrop Grumman Corporation Digitally programmable radio modules for navigation systems

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5610939A (en) * 1993-02-17 1997-03-11 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Signal processing circuit for spread spectrum communications
US5638362A (en) * 1993-10-14 1997-06-10 Ntt Mobile Communications Network, Inc. Correlation detector and communication apparatus
US5625639A (en) * 1993-10-22 1997-04-29 Nec Corporation Spread spectrum method for transmitting an information signal as a radio signal at a high speed
US5627856A (en) * 1994-09-09 1997-05-06 Omnipoint Corporation Method and apparatus for receiving and despreading a continuous phase-modulated spread spectrum signal using self-synchronizing correlators
US5661750A (en) * 1995-06-06 1997-08-26 Cellnet Data Systems, Inc. Direct sequence spread spectrum system
US5687190A (en) * 1995-10-20 1997-11-11 Otc Telecom Non-coherent direct sequence spread spectrum receiver for detecting bit/symbol chip sequences using threshold comparisons of chip sequence correlations

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP0986860A2 *

Cited By (45)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7697916B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2010-04-13 Parkervision, Inc. Applications of universal frequency translation
US8340618B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2012-12-25 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for down-converting an electromagnetic signal, and transforms for same, and aperture relationships
US8233855B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2012-07-31 Parkervision, Inc. Up-conversion based on gated information signal
US8190108B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2012-05-29 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for frequency up-conversion
US8190116B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2012-05-29 Parker Vision, Inc. Methods and systems for down-converting a signal using a complementary transistor structure
US8160534B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2012-04-17 Parkervision, Inc. Applications of universal frequency translation
US8019291B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2011-09-13 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for frequency down-conversion and frequency up-conversion
US7936022B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2011-05-03 Parkervision, Inc. Method and circuit for down-converting a signal
US7937059B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2011-05-03 Parkervision, Inc. Converting an electromagnetic signal via sub-sampling
US7865177B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2011-01-04 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for down-converting an electromagnetic signal, and transforms for same, and aperture relationships
US7693502B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2010-04-06 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for down-converting an electromagnetic signal, transforms for same, and aperture relationships
US7826817B2 (en) 1998-10-21 2010-11-02 Parker Vision, Inc. Applications of universal frequency translation
US7693230B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2010-04-06 Parkervision, Inc. Apparatus and method of differential IQ frequency up-conversion
US8036304B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2011-10-11 Parkervision, Inc. Apparatus and method of differential IQ frequency up-conversion
US7773688B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2010-08-10 Parkervision, Inc. Method, system, and apparatus for balanced frequency up-conversion, including circuitry to directly couple the outputs of multiple transistors
US8594228B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2013-11-26 Parkervision, Inc. Apparatus and method of differential IQ frequency up-conversion
US7724845B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2010-05-25 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for down-converting and electromagnetic signal, and transforms for same
US8224281B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2012-07-17 Parkervision, Inc. Down-conversion of an electromagnetic signal with feedback control
US7894789B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2011-02-22 Parkervision, Inc. Down-conversion of an electromagnetic signal with feedback control
US7929638B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2011-04-19 Parkervision, Inc. Wireless local area network (WLAN) using universal frequency translation technology including multi-phase embodiments
US8223898B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2012-07-17 Parkervision, Inc. Method and system for down-converting an electromagnetic signal, and transforms for same
US8077797B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2011-12-13 Parkervision, Inc. Method, system, and apparatus for balanced frequency up-conversion of a baseband signal
US8229023B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2012-07-24 Parkervision, Inc. Wireless local area network (WLAN) using universal frequency translation technology including multi-phase embodiments
US7653145B2 (en) 1999-08-04 2010-01-26 Parkervision, Inc. Wireless local area network (WLAN) using universal frequency translation technology including multi-phase embodiments and circuit implementations
US8295406B1 (en) 1999-08-04 2012-10-23 Parkervision, Inc. Universal platform module for a plurality of communication protocols
EP1517436A3 (en) * 1999-10-07 2006-01-25 Parkervision, Inc. Down converter using subsampling
EP1517436A2 (en) * 1999-10-07 2005-03-23 Parkervision, Inc. Down converter using subsampling
JP2003511956A (en) * 1999-10-13 2003-03-25 ユー−ナブ マイクロエレクトロニクス コーポレーション Spread spectrum receiver
EP1107469A1 (en) * 1999-12-01 2001-06-13 Sagem Sa Method of partial correlation in a CDMA receiver
FR2802036A1 (en) * 1999-12-01 2001-06-08 Sagem PROCESS FOR PARTIAL CORRELATION IN A CDMA RECEPTOR
WO2001050631A3 (en) * 1999-12-31 2002-01-17 Thomson Licensing Sa Carrier tracking loop for direct sequence spread spectrum systems
WO2001050631A2 (en) * 1999-12-31 2001-07-12 Thomson Licensing S.A. Carrier tracking loop for direct sequence spread spectrum systems
KR100739011B1 (en) * 1999-12-31 2007-07-13 톰슨 라이센싱 Carrier tracking loop for direct sequence spread spectrum systems
US8295800B2 (en) 2000-04-14 2012-10-23 Parkervision, Inc. Apparatus and method for down-converting electromagnetic signals by controlled charging and discharging of a capacitor
US7822401B2 (en) 2000-04-14 2010-10-26 Parkervision, Inc. Apparatus and method for down-converting electromagnetic signals by controlled charging and discharging of a capacitor
US7991815B2 (en) 2000-11-14 2011-08-02 Parkervision, Inc. Methods, systems, and computer program products for parallel correlation and applications thereof
US8446994B2 (en) 2001-11-09 2013-05-21 Parkervision, Inc. Gain control in a communication channel
US7653158B2 (en) 2001-11-09 2010-01-26 Parkervision, Inc. Gain control in a communication channel
US8407061B2 (en) 2002-07-18 2013-03-26 Parkervision, Inc. Networking methods and systems
US8160196B2 (en) 2002-07-18 2012-04-17 Parkervision, Inc. Networking methods and systems
EP1909446A3 (en) * 2006-10-03 2014-03-26 NEC Corporation Mobile communication system and its signal transfer method
WO2017044191A1 (en) * 2015-09-08 2017-03-16 Xilinx, Inc. Radio frequency current steering digital to analog converter
US11460572B2 (en) 2016-08-12 2022-10-04 University Of Washington Millimeter wave imaging systems and methods using direct conversion receivers and/or modulation techniques
US11921193B2 (en) 2016-08-12 2024-03-05 University Of Washington Millimeter wave imaging systems and methods using direct conversion receivers and/or modulation techniques
US11555916B2 (en) 2016-12-08 2023-01-17 University Of Washington Millimeter wave and/or microwave imaging systems and methods including examples of partitioned inverse and enhanced resolution modes and imaging devices

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US5999561A (en) 1999-12-07
EP0986860A4 (en) 2003-05-02
US6639939B1 (en) 2003-10-28
EP0986860A2 (en) 2000-03-22
AU8656198A (en) 1998-12-11
AU744940B2 (en) 2002-03-07
WO1998053556A3 (en) 1999-03-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU744940B2 (en) Direct sequence spread spectrum method, computer-based product, apparatus and system tolerant to frequency reference offset
CA2294216C (en) Receiving a spread spectrum signal
CA2294218C (en) Processing a spread spectrum signal in a frequency adjustable system
US6178197B1 (en) Frequency discrimination in a spread spectrum signal processing system
EP0892528B1 (en) Carrier recovery for DSSS signals
US7672361B2 (en) System and method for despreading in a spread spectrum matched filter
US6263009B1 (en) Acquiring a spread spectrum signal
EP1114524B1 (en) Doppler corrected spread spectrum matched filter
CA2294536C (en) Bandpass correlation of a spread spectrum signal
US6212223B1 (en) Demodulation and correlation for spread spectrum communications
JP2002508617A (en) Method and system for providing a signal strength estimate of a received signal
US7751520B1 (en) Packet detection, synchronization, and frequency offset estimation
CA2294214C (en) Bandpass processing of a spread spectrum signal
EP0862817B1 (en) Method for controlling a receiver, and a receiver
US8233519B2 (en) Signal processing unit and wireless communication device
US7711038B1 (en) System and method for despreading in a spread spectrum matched filter
KR100599541B1 (en) Uwb tranceiver system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AU CA

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AU CA

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1998937930

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 86561/98

Country of ref document: AU

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1998937930

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: CA

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 86561/98

Country of ref document: AU

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1998937930

Country of ref document: EP